dctrack User Guide 2.6.1

Transcription

1 dctrack User Guide Copyright 2012 Raritan, Inc. dctrack-v j-e August

2 This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without express prior written consent of Raritan, Inc. Copyright 2012 Raritan, Inc. All third-party software and hardware mentioned in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of and are the property of their respective holders. FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential environment may cause harmful interference. VCCI Information (Japan) Raritan is not responsible for damage to this product resulting from accident, disaster, misuse, abuse, non-raritan modification of the product, or other events outside of Raritan's reasonable control or not arising under normal operating conditions. If a power cable is included with this product, it must be used exclusively for this product.

3 Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 dctrack Overview... 1 dctrack Training, Professional Services and Help... 2 Training and Professional Services... 2 dctrack Help... 2 Roles and Responsibilities as Defined in dctrack... 5 Chapter 2 dctrack Terminology 7 dctrack Components... 7 Sites... 7 Items... 7 IT Items... 8 Power Items... 9 Environmental Items Connection and Item Statuses Ports Chapter 3 dctrack Interfaces 14 Overview dctrack Web Client Interface Elements Web Client Dashboard Menus Quick Link Drop-Down Launching and Exiting Classic View Logoff and Help Links Cabinet Elevations and Item Details in the Web Client Place Dialog dctrack Classic View Interface Overview Classic View Splash Screen Explorer Menu dctrack Information Classic View Toolbars Dashboard iii

4 Contents Chapter 4 Get Started Using dctrack 39 Overview Log In and Log Off Licensing Add a License View Licenses Change Your Password Change the Administrator Password Chapter 5 Help for System Administrators 43 dctrack Privileges Needed for System Administrators Installing dctrack and Building the Data Center Preparing to Install dctrack VM and Client Requirements dctrack Data Model Power IQ Data Model dctrack Configuration Use Cases Create Users Launching dctrack Education and Training Establish Best Practices and Standardized Processes for Change Management Application Administration Administration in the dctrack Web Client Administration in dctrack Classic View Chapter 6 Help for Data Center Managers 223 Overview dctrack Privileges Needed for Data Center Managers Starting from Scratch - Building a New Data Center in dctrack Managing New Items Reserving Cabinet Space for an Item - Optional Locating Cabinet Space for an Item - Optional Adding Cabinets to a Data Center in dctrack Cloning Items and Their Ports Adding New Items Creating Ports Building New Circuits (Connections) Assigning IP Addresses IP Space Submitting Requests Managing Existing Items Quick Item Search Editing Items Changing a Physical Server to a VM Adding Applications to a Device Item Building New Circuits (Connections) iv

5 Contents Disconnecting Connections Editing and Deleting IP Addresses Editing and Deleting Subnets Viewing Existing Subnets and Related Equipment Removing Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog) Editing IP Addresses DNS Audit Audit Trail Getting Item Readings Asset Management Sensor Event Information Reports Viewing Reports Elevations Cab Detail Cab Resource Items Item Details Connections Power Applications snmptrack Report Chapter 7 Help for Data Center Technicians 313 Overview dctrack Privileges Needed for Data Center Technicians Search Items Editing Items Editing Connections Disconnecting Connections Editing and Deleting IP Addresses Editing and Deleting Subnets Viewing Existing Subnets and Related Equipment Removing Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog) Editing IP Addresses Marking Work Orders as Complete Chapter 8 Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack 321 Floor Map Floor Map Color Coding Navigating the Floor Map Viewing Linked Objects Item Class Radio Button Sorting Items on the Floor Map Adding and Removing Tiles on the Floor Map Creating and Deleting a Custom Floor Map View Viewing Capacity Planning Charts Turning AutoCAD Layers On and Off on the Floor Map Printing the Floor Map v

6 Contents Using Tile: X,Y Coordinates Viewing Cabinet Elevations from the Floor Map Elevations Cabinet Elevation Color Coding Trace Items Trace Ports Power Path Search Items Chapter 9 Change Control Process 339 Overview Requests Overview Approving or Rejecting Requests Marking a Request as Complete Request Archiving Requesting a Bypass on Item Detail Pages Work Orders Overview Work Order Access Levels and Permissions Work Order Archiving Chapter 10 Managing External Tickets in the Web Client 345 Overview Ticket Statuses Sorting and Filtering Tickets Process Tickets Add Item Tickets Discard an Item vi

7 Contents Archived Tickets Delete a Ticket Chapter 11 Managing Events in the Web Client 352 Overview Viewing Events Exporting Events Clearing Events Purging Events Chapter 12 Reserving Cabinet Space for an Item 355 Overview Creating and Placing Reservations for Items from the Reservations Tab Editing and Deleting Reservations Chapter 13 Search and Place 359 About Search and Place Chapter 14 Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client 361 Data and Power Connections Circuits Page Visualizing Data and Power Circuits Data Circuits Power Circuits Building New Circuits (Connections) Editing, Deleting and Disconnecting Circuits Chapter 15 Integrating dctrack with Asset Management Sensors via EMX or PX2 377 Overview EMX Asset Sensor Management Adding an EMX to dctrack Adding Items to dctrack Connecting Asset Sensors to the EMX Configuring Asset Sensors in EMX Setting EMX Asset Sensor LED Colors PX2 Asset Sensor Management Adding a PX2 to dctrack Adding Items to dctrack Connecting Asset Sensors to the PX Configuring the Asset Sensor in PX Setting EMX Asset Sensor LED Colors Configuring a Specific Rack Unit vii

8 Contents Index 395 viii

9 Chapter 1 Introduction In This Chapter dctrack Overview... 1 dctrack Training, Professional Services and Help... 2 dctrack Overview dctrack is a powerful and intelligent data center management and automation application. dctrack has been designed by data center and IT professionals to provide broad and deep visibility into the data center. It empowers data center managers to plan for growth and change by optimizing their current operations, assets, and infrastructure. With dctrack you can view everything in the data center from servers, blades, virtual servers and applications to data networks, IP addressing space and cabling. dctrack also allows you to track real-time power consumption and manage raised floor space and rack elevations. Use dctrack to build your data center map directly or import existing data center information into the dctrack. If you currently maintain data center information in spreadsheet format, that data can be imported into dctrack using the Import wizard. Further, dctrack allows you to import AutoCAD objects to build a data center map. Isolate potential problems with dctrack since end-to-end power and data circuits can be visually and accurately traced while identifying all intermediate circuit points. By using dctrack's workflow and change management feature, data center managers are better able to enforce best practices across the enterprise and meet ITIL framework guidelines. 1

10 Chapter 1: Introduction dctrack Training, Professional Services and Help Training and Professional Services Raritan strongly suggests you take our dctrack training prior to implementing dctrack and prior to using it. The dctrack video training course is accessed from You need a Raritan provided username and password to access training, which are acquired through our training website. Once you are verified, Raritan gives you access to the courses. Raritan offers a Quick Start service that includes help deploying dctrack, as well as a full day of training at your location. Contact Raritan for more information about purchasing this service. dctrack Help Important: To ensure you have the most current documentation for dctrack, Raritan recommends using online help or the PDF versions of the guides that are available on our website as your primary resources. 2

11 Chapter 1: Introduction The following dctrack help resources are available: dctrack User Help - Online and PDF. Provides help for system administrators, data center managers (site administrators) and data center technicians dctrack Implementation Guide - PDF only. Guides you through the initial implementation process you undertake before you begin a first time installation of dctrack dctrack Integration Guide - PDF only. Provides information on clean installs of dctrack, as well as integrating dctrack with existing Power IQ installations or existing an dctrack installation with a new Power IQ installation. dctrack Quick Setup Guide - PDF only. A quick guide that walks you through the installation process and server configuration dctrack Device Quick Setup Guide - PDF only. A quick guide that walks you through installing the dctrack hardware device, as well as the installation process and server configuration Raritan's documentation team encourages you to provide us with feedback regarding the online help. If you wish to provide us with feedback, you can do so by clicking the Feedback icon in the online help and sharing your thoughts via . Note: Feedback via this method is for online help content only and not for technical support, sales, website or product information. See the Contact Us ( page on Raritan's website for additional contact information. About User Help dctrack User Help is structured around tasks performed by system administrators, data center managers and data center technicians. On a per-role basis, the tasks are broken down based on the lifecycle of a data center item from the initial installation to decommissioning. This help is designed for easy access to tasks you perform based on your role. As such, some information is repeated if it is shared between roles. For example, searching for items, adding items and so on. High-level information, such as terminology and the dctrack interface, are provided in individual chapters. Additionally, chapters are provided on specific dctrack functions such as the change control process, managing external tickets and so on. Note: Since each data center is unique, there may be task overlap depending on your individual data center needs, and role titles may vary. 3

12 Chapter 1: Introduction Online Help Features Online help and the PDF version of help provide the same information in different formats. Note: In order to use online help, Active Content must be enabled in your browser. Consult your browser help for information on enabling active content. Use the following online help features to quickly locate information and share information with others. Item Description Online help navigation tree Click the Home icon to open the online help home page Click on the up and down arrows to navigate through each topic in the navigation tree Click the this Page icon to generate an and send a link to the page Click the Send Feedback icon to generate an to send to Raritan Print the current topic by clicking on the Print icon Use the search feature to search online help using full or partial words 4

13 Chapter 1: Introduction Roles and Responsibilities as Defined in dctrack System Administrator The System Administrator role is specific to the installation and configuration of dctrack and, in most cases, is separate from that of the site administrator and/or data center manager. They have permission to do every action in dctrack, no exceptions. System administrators typically: Install and configure dctrack Manage the server dctrack resides on Add users Import items into dctrack from existing resources such as spreadsheets, other applications via web API and so on Application upgrades Backups See Help for System Administrators (on page 43) for additional information specific to this role. Data Center Managers (Site Administrators) Data center managers, also known as site administrators, are the primary leads at a specific data center location. Users in this role may perform some of the same tasks in dctrack as system administrators, but typically do not perform the initial installation of dctrack and do not manage the server dctrack is installed on. Date center managers are mainly responsible for user and team management, data center change management, and keeping the data in dctrack in sync with actual conditions in the data center. This includes: Adding and editing data center items and connections Managing work orders Managing requests Managing teams Managing dctrack libraries and drop-downs Importing and export data Monitoring data center conditions See Help for Data Center Managers (on page 223) for additional information specific to this role. 5

14 Chapter 1: Introduction Data Center Technicians Data center technicians are responsible for the actual installation and/or decommissioning of data center items. In addition to doing the physical item installation and maintenance in a data center, data center technicians use dctrack to perform such tasks as: Adding items to dctrack Creating and editing connections Tracking work orders Locating items in the data center Placing items in the data center See Help for Data Center Technicians (on page 313) for additional information specific to this role. 6

15 Chapter 2 dctrack Terminology In This Chapter dctrack Components... 7 Sites... 7 Items... 7 Ports dctrack Components dctrack is made up of two different components: a dctrack Web Client and a Windows-based Classic View. The dctrack Web Client uses a browser interface that allows you to view the state of your data center at a glance, reserve data center space and add items, build data and power circuits, manage external change tickets, and perform dctrack administration tasks such as manage users, configure the application and so on. Classic View is a where the data center is initially built in the application and where users perform most day-to-day data center management. Sites A site or location is a data center room with its own AutoCAD.dwg drawing file. The term site is used in Classic View and location is used in the Web Client. Note: Once the site is created, in order to see it in the Web Client, you must log out and then log back in to Web Client. Items Any asset being managed in the data center is called an item. In the dctrack Explorer menu, the items are broken into three groups: IT items, power items, and environmental (environ.) items. Then each group is broken further into the item class. Each item can have one or more power port and/or communication port. See Ports (on page 12). 7

16 Chapter 2: dctrack Terminology IT Items Any IT asset that is being managed in the data center is called an item. Items are grouped into six classes called item classes in dctrack : Item Cabinet Description A cabinet item is the structure that contains other items such as devices, network equipment, comm outlets and/or rack PDUs. A cabinet can be an enclosed cabinet or an open bay rack. Cabinets and racks have mounting screw holes that are spaced apart according to an EIA industry standard. This spacing is known as a rack unit (RU), which represents a mounting height of Note: dctrack uses the terms rail position and U position interchangeably. Device Network Data/comm panel A device item is any computer system and its peripherals that are placed into a cabinet in the data center. There are several device types such as servers, appliances, disks, storage, tape drives, KVMs, etc. A network item is any network equipment that provides network connectivity to devices. Network equipment typically has many more ports than devices. Furthermore, multiple network items can be grouped and given a group name and a nickname. A data panel/comm panel (communication panel) is used to terminate both ends of a grouping of a certain number of fixed structured data cables installed in the data center. Typically, one end of the grouping of data cables resides in or near a device cabinet while the other end resides in or near a network cabinet. Data/comm panels can take a variety of types and form factors such as Category 5e/6/6A RJ45 patch panels, 110-type punch down blocks, fiber patch panels, etc. Collectively, the comm panels, data cables, and patch cords are referred to as the structured cable plant. Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. 8

17 Chapter 2: dctrack Terminology Power Items Item UPS PDU Description An UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) item is an electrical system that provides continuous and uninterrupted power by switching very quickly to a local power source in the event the electrical utility feed is interrupted. The local power source is composed of battery cells that are charged by the electrical utility feed during normal conditions. The size and quantity of batteries determine the duration of the local power source. Typically, a UPS feeds PDUs downstream in the power chain. A PDU (Power Distribution Unit) item is an electrical system unit that typically houses a step down transformer and circuit breaker panel boards. In some cases, the electrical panel boards are housed outside the PDU in remote power panel (RPP) cabinets distributed throughout the data center raised floor. A panel board contains circuit breaker positions called poles. An alternate method of electrical distribution is an electrical busway system whereby the PDU main circuit breakers feed the busway instead of the internal panel boards or RPPs. In this system, the circuit breakers reside on the busway modules that house the electrical outlets. Typically a PDU is fed by one or more UPS systems. Note: Do not confuse a rack PDU item with a PDU item. Rack PDU items are essentially a power strip and PDU items are an electrical system unit that typically houses a step down transformer and circuit breaker panel boards. Outlet Rack PDU An outlet item is the housing unit that contains one or more electrical receptacles of varying types. The electrical receptacles are in this case ports. Each outlet is fed from a circuit breaker. A rack PDU item is a specialized power strip that is used to provide additional electrical receptacles for a particular electrical outlet. The rack PDU can be mounted horizontally or vertically in the cabinet. Some rack PDUs may be metered whereby they include an internal electronic measurement unit to measure the current draw at the 9

18 Chapter 2: dctrack Terminology Item Asset management tag and sensors Description receptacle or aggregate level of the rack PDU, and report this reading on an LED display internal to the rack PDU. Other rack PDUs may be intelligent whereby they can report the current draw and other electrical measurements at the receptacle level or at the aggregate level of the rack PDU via SNMP to an IP network device. Additionally, some of the intelligent rack PDUs can have temperature and humidity probes. PX2 devices that are managing asset sensors are added to dctrack as a Rack PDU. Asset management tags are electronic IDs that are adhered to data center items so you can remotely track item locations. Asset management tags are then plugged in to an asset management sensor. The asset sensors are then configured in either Raritan's PX2 device or EMX device. Environmental Items Item CRAC Probe Description A CRAC (Computer Room Air Conditioning) item is usually a floor-standing air conditioning unit that provides cold and, usually, pressurized air under the raised floor to cool the heat dissipative data center equipment. A probe item is equipment that accepts one or more signals from a temperature and/or humidity sensor. The probe reports the temperature and humidity values via SNMP to dctrack. EMX devices that are managing asset sensors are added to dctrack as a probes. 10

19 Chapter 2: dctrack Terminology Connection and Item Statuses Each item and connection is marked with a status. The status identifies the state the item or the connection is in. The status is managed automatically by dctrack based on the last action associated with an item or a connection. Following are the dctrack status definitions: Item New Approved/Not Installed Installed Inactive Discarded Off-Site To Be Removed Deleted Description Item or connection that has been added but has not yet been approved. A request may or may not have been issued. Item or connection that has been approved but has not yet been installed. A work order may or may not have been issued. Item or connection that is installed and is in use. Item that is installed but is not in use. An item that has been removed from inventory and disposed of. This is similar to marking an item for deletion. This status does not apply to connections. When connections are removed they are deleted from dctrack and never exist in a discarded state. An item that has been removed from the data center to an off-site location such as a client's site. This status is different than Discarded in that the item's position in a cabinet and its connections remain in place physically in the data center as well as in dctrack since this item is expected to be returned and hence its resources are reserved. When a connection is being edited, a request is generated to delete the existing connection and create a new connection. Therefore, the status of the existing connection is changed to To Be Removed pending its approval. When an item with a Discarded status is deleted, a status of Deleted is applied to it. The item is no longer visible to the user but it remains in dctrack. Only the Gatekeeper can see this item from the Administration > Items & Ports page. Cabinets with a Deleted status do not count towards the used licenses. 11

20 Chapter 2: dctrack Terminology Ports With the exception of cabinets, all items can be configured with ports. Ports represent all the connectors on an item that may be connected to other ports. Ports can be added or deleted by any user who has edit access to that item. Ports that are already connected may not be deleted until they are disconnected. Once a port is created, only the port name can be edited in dctrack. Item Description Data/comm port Any port on an item used for voice or data communications is a data/comm port. A port is defined with a name, connector, communications protocol, transmission speed, address and comments. Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. Virtual port Logical port Power port Breaker panel pole Sensor port Any data/comm port on a virtual machine. Any data/comm on a Device defined as a Blade Server. Any port on an item used to provide power to the item. Each power supply in a device or in a network equipment item is represented in dctrack as a power port. Each receptacle in a power outlet or rack PDU is represented as a power port. A PDU, RPP or electrical busway module contains panel boards. The maximum number of poles a panel can have is 42 for sites with the address in the United States. Sites defined in all other countries can have a maximum of 96 poles. Poles are either numbered sequentially in an odd/even layout, or using numbers and letters. A panel is laid out such that odd poles are on the left and even poles are on the right. There are 3 types of circuit breakers: 1-, 2-, or 3-pole breakers. As the name implies, a 2-pole breaker requires two pole positions and a 3-pole breaker requires three positions. Sensor ports for temperature sensors, humidity sensors and asset management sensors that are part of an "intelligent" rack PDU, PDU, UPS, CRAC or 12

21 Chapter 2: dctrack Terminology Item Description probe item. 13

22 Chapter 3 dctrack Interfaces In This Chapter Overview dctrack Web Client Interface Elements dctrack Classic View Interface Overview dctrack is made up of two interfaces - the Web Client, which is completely web-based, and Classic View, which is a Windows-based component of the dctrack application. dctrack Help indicates the interface in which a task is performed. Both the dctrack Web Client and Classic View use interfaces that most users are familiar with. This section explains interface elements that are specific to dctrack functions. dctrack Web Client Interface Elements Web Client Dashboard The dctrack dashboard is the first view presented to you when you log in to dctrack. It provides a high-level view of the data center's capacity and the items being managed by dctrack. 14

23 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Switch between the different data center locations by selecting them from the drop-down in the upper left of the dashboard tab. Use the Refresh button to get the most up-to-date information for the location. The dashboard uses widgets in the form of gauges, bar graphs and pie charts, depending on the status or item being tracked, to display data center information. Electrical Utilization The Electrical Utilization widget uses a gauge to graphically depict the electrical load of the data center based on the budgeted power of your data center's power supplies vs. the total power being delivered by the UPS bank(s). Measurements are in kilowatts. The kw/cabinet in the upper left of the widget is the average power consumed per cabinet. The far end of the gauge in red is the maximum available electrical power available to the data center as measured in kilowatts. The data center power consumption in kilowatts is indicated on the gauge by the needle. Hovering over the needle gives you the exact numerical value. This value is also visible on at the top of the gauge. 15

24 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Cooling Utilization The Cooling Utilization widget uses a gauge to graphically depict the amount of cooling required by the data center vs. the cooling being delivered by the CRAC units. Measurements are in tons. The amount of heat produced in the data center, which is based on the load drawn by the electrical equipment, is indicated on the gauge by the needle. Hovering over the needle gives you the exact numerical value. This value is also visible on at the bottom of the gauge. The maximum available cooling supply for the data center is depicted as the maximum number in red at the top of the gauge. 16

25 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Floor Utilization The Floor Utilization widget uses a gauge to graphically depict the amount of space being utilized and the amount of space available in the data center. Measurements are in square feet and total pounds. Weight/sf is the average weight of the equipment per square foot measure in pounds per square foot. The total floor space in the data center is depicted as the maximum number in the red on the meter. The needle points to the occupied floor space. Hovering over the needle gives you the exact numerical value. This value is also visible on at the top of the gauge. 17

26 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Cabinet Utilization The Cabinet Utilization widget uses a gauge to graphically depict the total number of rack units being used and the total number available in the data center. The needle on the gauge is points to the number of rack units utilized in the data center. Hovering over the needle gives you the exact numerical value. The number at the top of the gauge in red indicates the total number of rack units in the data center. From the Rails Used drop-down, select Front Rail Utilized, Rear Rail Utilized or Either Rail Utilized to view information on the rails used in the cabinet. 18

27 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Item Class Summary The Item Class Summary widget uses a pie chart to display the percentage of each item class from the total number of items in your data center, which is being managed by dctrack. Each piece of the pie chart represents a specific item class. 19

28 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Network and Data Panel Utilization The Network and Data Panel Utilization widget uses a bar graph to show the total number of patch panels and network ports in the data center, and the total amount of patch panel and network data ports that are connected in the data center. Hover your mouse over a bar in the graph to view the patch panel and network usage and statistics. The drop-down box in the upper left of the widget panel contains all of the connectors available for the selected location. Select a connector to view its statistics. Used ports and networks are indicated in blue on the graph, and available ports and networks are indicated in brown. Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. Menus Use the menus along the top of the dctrack Web Client to access the functions that are available such as search and place, building circuits and so on. 20

29 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Quick Link Drop-Down Use the Quick Link drop-down located in the far left corner of the Web Client interface to quickly move between pages you have open. The order of the list is determined by the order in which the tabs were opened. Closing a tab removes its corresponding name from the list. Launching and Exiting Classic View To launch Classic View: Click the Classic View link in the upper right of the web-based dctrack Web Client. Classic View opens in a secondary window. If this is the first time you are launching Classic View, dctrack verifies you have.net 3.5 Framework installed. See Log In to dctrack for the First Time (on page 54) for information on installing.net. To exit dctrack Classic View: Select File > Exit or close the Classic View window. 21

30 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Logoff and Help Links Click the Logoff link located in the upper left section of the dctrack Web Client to log off of the application. Click the Help to access online help for dctrack. 22

31 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Cabinet Elevations and Item Details in the Web Client You can select whether to view the front of the cabinet to display the items mounted on the front or both rails, or select to view the back of the cabinet to display the items mounted on the back or both rails. In viewing the front and back, you can select to view the item names in the text view or the item images in the image view. Elevations are a graphical representation of data center cabinets and their contents. They are provided in the Web Client when adding/placing, making reservations and managing circuits. By default, cabinets are displayed in a text view, and use color coding to identify the type of item within the cabinet. See Cabinet Elevation Color Coding (on page 333, on page 25). Note: Items that do not have an image in the dctrack Models library are displayed as text in Image view in the Web Client, and are displayed as a blank image in the Classic View. Use the drop-down in the top right corner of the elevation view to switch between displaying the back and front of the cabinet, and text and image views. Zero U rack PDUs mounted on the cabinet are displayed to the right and/or left of the cabinet. Hovering over the rack PDUs displays the PDU name. 23

32 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Double clicking on an item in the cabinet opens a dialog containing an enlarged image of the item, identifies the location of all the ports of the item and whether each port is connected. Alternate between front and back views of the item using the Front and Back buttons. When viewing an item, the port labels are indicated by a red border when the ports are connected, and a green border when they are not connected. The color of the label indicates the color code assigned to that port. In some cases, the image of the item and its port color codes make the port labels difficult to read. In those cases, click the Identify button causing a pulsing glow around the port label. The label glows red when the port is connected, and glows green when it is not connected. Click Stop to stop the pulsating glow around the port labels. 24

33 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Cabinet Elevation Color Coding In any page with a cabinet elevation, the color legend of the items mounted in the cabinet is available by clicking on the Cabinet Color Legend icon. 25

34 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Place Dialog The Place dialog is used when placing an item using the dctrack Web Client. See About Search and Place (on page 359) for information on using this function. This dialog contains prepopulated information based on the model you selected in the search screen and the cabinet you choose in the search results, such as the item's make and model, dimensions, the cabinet you have selected to place the item, data and power ports and so on. This dialog allows you to give a name to the item you are creating as well as other information such as the item's serial number, asset tag number, operating system, and so on. Leave the Issue Place Request checkbox selected to issue a place request for the item, and/or leave the "Continue to building circuits" checkbox selected to proceed to building circuits for the item (if applicable). Each of these options is discussed in this section. An elevation view of the cabinet the item is placed in is also displayed in this dialog. See Cabinet Elevations and Item Details in the Web Client (on page 23) for details on cabinet elevations. 26

35 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces dctrack Classic View Interface The dctrack Classic View Interface is Windows-based, making use of a menu tree (the Explorer Menu), toolbars and so on. Pages are opened by selecting from the Explorer Menu, and the contents of each page are displayed in the center of application interface. Use the toolbar to perform actions such as view item details, save, edit, sort and so on. The buttons available on the toolbar vary based on the page you are working on. See Classic View Toolbars (on page 36) for details on what each button in the toolbar does when selected. Image key Explorer menu 27

36 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Image key Classic View Toolbars (on page 36) Pages (on page 30) dctrack information Dashboard (on page 38) For item pages, such as cabinets, racks and so on, a List view is available and a Detail view is available. List view displays each of the items that match the item type selected in the Explorer Menu in a list format. Double click on an item to open its Detail page. Use the Detail 1 and Detail 2 buttons to view detail information for the currently open item. Navigate between items from the Detail pages by selecting them from the Record Locator drop-down, or using the back and forward arrows to the left and right, respectively, of the Record Locator drop-down. Overview Classic View is a Windows-based client used to manage and view data center items, perform certain application administration tasks, manage work orders, generate reports and so on. It is in this piece of the dctrack application you do most of your day-to-day data center management once you have built your data center in dctrack. 28

37 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces List View and Detail View Items in dctrack can be viewed in a list or the item details can be viewed on Detail 1 and Detail 2 pages. List view displays the item information in a spreadsheet style format. To view details, select an item from a list and click either the Detail 1 or Detail 2 icon, or double-click on the item. You can navigate between items in a either list or detail view using the Next and Previous Item navigation arrows. Alternatively, you can use keyboard navigation such as direction arrow keys, page up, page down, and so on. To locate a specific item, you can enter it into the Record Locator drop-down or scroll through the list. 29

38 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Pages When an Item or Connection page is first opened, it displays a list of items or connections. This is called the List page. You can view more information about a particular item or connection in the List page by double-clicking it, or selecting it and then clicking the Detail 1 or Detail 2 icon. Depending on your access level, certain text boxes and drop-downs are disabled or locked. These fields are outlined in red. Some fields are locked even to the Gatekeeper in order to protect data integrity since in some instances changing data in one field could impact related data. For example, changing an item's model after it has been approved and installed is not allowed. On the Detail pages, some of the data may be represented in a table view (that is, in columns and rows). The columns are field headings and the rows are the data records. Each row has a row marker used to select the entire row. Double-clicking or right-clicking the row marker usually results in an action. A right arrow in the row marker indicates that a particular record (or row) is the currently selected one. An asterisk symbol in the row marker indicates that this row can be used for entry of a new record. 30

39 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Classic View Splash Screen This page is displayed when dctrack is initially launched, and contains a quick summary of the cabinet licenses are provided on this page. Note: You can also view dctrack license information in the Web Client. See Licensing (on page 39). 31

40 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Explorer Menu This menu is always visible in the left margin of the dctrack application. It is used to navigate through the various pages of the application. Click on a link to expand the menu, and select a page from the options displayed. 32

41 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces 33

42 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces dctrack Information Relevant dctrack database information is displayed in this area including licensee name, the currently selected data center site, your login name, the current user measurement units, and dctrack server. License Information in Classic View Clicking on the 'Release X.x' located below the dctrack logo at the top of the Explorer Menu in Classic View displays the Splash Screen, which contains license information. 34

43 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Switch Site Locations in Classic View To quickly switch between sites while in Classic View, click the drop-down arrow next to the currently displayed site information at the bottom of the Explorer Menu. Switch Measurement Units in Classic View Quickly switch between measurement units by selecting from the Units drop-down at the bottom of the Explorer Menu. 35

44 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Launching the Web Client from Classic View Click on the dctrack Server link to access the dctrack Web Client log in page. Classic View Toolbars The toolbars that are used in dctrack vary depending on the page you are working in. Following is an overview the icons that make up most toolbars. Icon Description The page view icons switch the item pages between List, Detail 1, and Detail 2 pages. The List screen contains all items in the selected item class based on the selection in the Explorer menu. The Detail 1 page contains information specific to the selected item. The information for each item varies depending on its item class. The Detail 2 page contains additional fields about the selected item. The Record Locator shows the currently selected item. You are able to type the name of an item into the Record Locator to find the item or use it as a drop-down to select the item from a list. Clicking on an item name opens it to its Detail 1 page. The Record Locator drop-down is always sorted by item name regardless of the sort 36

45 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Icon Description order selected. The Page Mode drop-down switches the item page between View, Edit and Add. View screen mode allows you to view data only. While in this mode, the Permission Lock icon is red and in the locked position. Provided you have the appropriate permissions, you can switch to Edit and Add page modes. When in either of these modes, the Permission Lock icon turns green and to the unlocked position. The Actions drop-down provides you with various actions depending on the specific item page and page mode you are working with. Generally, the Actions drop-down is where requests are initiated and processed. The Clone icon triggers the Clone Items pop-up. This icon is only available when the screen mode is switched to Add page mode. The Item Status Filter icon displays the Item Status list that can be used to filter the records by status. See Connection and Item Statuses (on page 11) for more detail. The Sort icon triggers the Select Sort Order dialog. This dialog allows you to select multiple field names from the Available Fields list. Each field can be sorted in ascending or descending sort order prior to adding it to the Field Sort Order sequential list. The Save icon saves changes to pages and records. In many cases, the use of this icon is optional since the record is automatically saved if the backward ƒ and forward icons are pressed, or if a new record or a new screen are selected. The Remote Desktop icon displays a list Microsoft Remote Desktop or Telnet sessions that can be launched based on the items IP or HTTP addresses. The Audit Trail icon opens the Automatic Audit Trail Log dialog. 37

46 Chapter 3: dctrack Interfaces Icon Description The Pending Requests icon opens a List of Items with Pending Request dialog. The Request Bypass icon opens a dialog that allows you to enable (Yes) or disable (No) the request bypass feature. The Items Counter displays the total number of items in the currently selected item class. Dashboard The dashboard in Classic View is a two-line text band that is always visible at the bottom of the dctrack application. Like the dashboard in the dctrack Web Client, it provides high level metrics about the data center but uses text to display the information. The following information is contained on the dashboard: Licenses and Used - the total number available of available licenses (top number) and the total number of licenses currently in use CIs - total number of configuration items being tracked in dctrack Devices - total number of devices being tracked in dctrack Sq Ft - total square footage of the data center Cabs - the total number of cabinets and racks in use at the site, and the ratio (in percentage) of the area of cabinets and racks to the area of the data center RUs - percentage of used rack units lbs/sf - total weight of the configuration items in the data center per square foot W/sf - power consumption per square foot of the data center Load and Tons - total load, measured in kilowatts, consumed by all devices, network equipment and probes in the data center. The heat from all the devices measured in tons Supp and Tons - power supply provided by the UPS (measured in kilowatts), and the cooling being provided by the CRAC units (measured in tons) 38

47 Chapter 4 Get Started Using dctrack In This Chapter Overview Log In and Log Off Licensing Change Your Password Change the Administrator Password Overview Once dctrack has been installed and configured, your data center has been built in dctrack and users have been added, you are ready to begin using dctrack to manage your data center. Log In and Log Off Note: If you are a Site Administrator or Gatekeeper logging in to dctrack for the first time, see Log In to dctrack for the First Time (on page 54). To log in to dctrack: 1. Connect to dctrack using a web browser. 2. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address or name assigned to dctrack. 3. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 4. Enter your username and password on the dctrack log in page and click Submit. To log off of the dctrack Web Client: Click the Logoff link at the top left of the Web Client. To exit dctrack Classic View: Select File > Exit or close the Classic View window. Licensing dctrack is licensed based on the number of cabinets maintained by the application. Contact Raritan Sales for additional information. 39

48 Chapter 4: Get Started Using dctrack Add a License Licenses are added in the dctrack Web Client. If this is your first time logging in and you need to add a license file, see Log In to dctrack for the First Time (on page 54). Once you add a license file and log in for the first time, you can follow the instructions in this topic to add or remove license files as needed. To add a license file: 1. Click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Product Licensing in the Application Administration panel. 3. Click Add in the Licenses section. 4. Use the browse function to locate and add the license file. Licenses are.lic files. Repeat this step to add incremental licenses if needed. Note: Your license file can be retrieved from the Raritan web site after you have activated your registration. To activate your registration, click the link in the "Thank you for registering" from Raritan and create your user account. Once you create your account, look for a "Your Raritan software license key is available" containing a link to your license file download page. 5. If you see error messages AND you're unable to use dctrack or to add the total licensed number of cabinets, contact Raritan Technical Support. There may be a problem with your license file. View Licenses The licenses that you have uploaded to dctrack are available to view from either the dctrack Web Client or Classic View. Web Client Administrators can view and add dctrack licenses from the dctrack Web Client. To view licenses from the dctrack Web Client: 1. Click Administration > Settings to open the Settings page in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Product Licensing in the Appliance Administration panel. 40

49 Chapter 4: Get Started Using dctrack Licensing Summary contains information about how many cabinets your combined licenses allow you to add to dctrack. Customer Name Cabinet license capacity Cabinet licenses available Your company name. The total number of cabinets allowed by all your licenses. The number of cabinets remaining that you are allowed to add. The Licenses list contains all license files that you have uploaded to dctrack. Feature Type Count Licensee Classic View The feature that is allowed by this license. Initial: A required license to activate dctrack and set the initial cabinet capacity allowed. Incremental: A secondary license type that allows you to add to the initial license's cabinet capacity. The number of cabinets that you can add to dctrack under this license. Your company name. In dctrack Classic View, license information is available on the splash screen and in the dashboard at the bottom of the page. The splash screen provides a quick summary of licensed cabinets and total number of ports. It also provides a summary of the items, comm ports, power ports, and sensors associated with each cabinet. Change Your Password The instructions provided here apply to users with a role of View, Member or Manager. Site Administrators and Gatekeepers, see Change the Administrator Password (on page 42) for instructions on changing your password. To change your password: 1. From the dctrack Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The 'User Information for...' page opens. 2. Click Change Password. The Change Password dialog appears. 3. Enter your current password and then enter your new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields. Click OK. 41

50 Chapter 4: Get Started Using dctrack Change the Administrator Password The administrator password can only be changed by the administrator. It is important to change the default administrator account password as soon as possible. This helps prevent unauthorized administrator access to dctrack. To change the administrator password: 1. Select Administration > Settings to open the Settings window in a secondary browser. 2. Click User Accounts in the Authorization and Authentication panel. The Users page opens. 3. Click on the admin user. 4. Click Change Password on the "User Information for ADMIN" page. 5. Type a new password for the admin account in the Password field, then type it again in the Confirm Password field. 6. Click Save. 42

51 Chapter 5 Help for System Administrators In This Chapter dctrack Privileges Needed for System Administrators Installing dctrack and Building the Data Center Launching dctrack Application Administration dctrack Privileges Needed for System Administrators System administrators need to be a part of the Site Administrators group, which contains the Admin user. Installing dctrack and Building the Data Center Preparing to Install dctrack Following is a high-level overview of the dctrack application installation process: Download the application - dctrack is downloaded from the Raritan website. Contact Raritan if you do not have access to either location. Setup the server - Create a vsphere ESX\ESXi 4.x virtual machine that meets the dctrack minimum requirements and install dctrack server components on the virtual machine. See VM and Client Requirements (on page 44). Configure the server - Setup network accessibility to the dctrack server within the vsphere client s virtual machine console. Install licenses - Install the license file in the network installation folder. Configure user workstations - Install the client workstation via web browser. Microsoft Access 2003 or its runtime version and.net 3.51 Framework are required on each workstation. Setup client access - Setup clients within the web browser user workstations via web browser. Install snmptrack - Install snmptrack if you plan to use its SNMP polling capabilities. Before you begin the installation process: Determine the use case installation scenario that applies to you: Use Case 1: Implementing dctrack for the First Time (Clean Install) (on page 50) 43

52 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Use Case 2: Integrating Power IQ with an Existing dctrack Installation (on page 90) Use Case 3: Integrating dctrack with an Existing Power IQ Installation (on page 106) Use Case 4: Integrating an Existing dctrack Installation with an Existing Power IQ Installation (on page 119) Verify you have the dctrack DVD containing the dctrack.iso file. Verify the datastore has 160GB free for a new virtual machine and 3GB free for the installation ISO file. Upload the ISO file to the datastore. Note: The instructions in this guide refer to the vsphere client, which is compatible with ESX/ESXi 4.0 and higher. VM and Client Requirements Virtual Machine Recommendations dctrack must be given priority on your virtual machine. Configure ESXi so that all required resources are available on the dctrack virtual machine at all times. Manipulating ESXi settings or changing the priority of other virtual machines running on the same ESXi host may impact the ESXi scheduling policy and take resources away from the dctrack virtual machine. This might result in poor performances or in dctrack malfunctioning. The following are Raritan's recommendations for the dctrack VMware host configuration: Item Number of CPUs 4 RAM (GB) 4 Datastore (GB) 160* CPU (GHz) 2.8 Recommendation VMware ESX/ESXi 4.0 or

53 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators *Note: An additional 3GB of space may be needed to upload the ISO so it can be installed. Alternatively, the ISO can be installed directly from the DVD. The following ports must be open when building your virtual machine: Client Requirements and Supported Software Classic View requires the following to be installed in order to use dctrack. Workstation: Dual core processor with 2 GHz, 2GB of RAM and 2GB of free disk space Supported operating systems: Windows 7 operating system Windows XP operating system Supported browsers: Internet Explorer 7 or 8 Firefox 3.5 Note: To use Firefox or later with dctrack, Microsoft.NET Framework Assistant must be installed. The dctrack prerequisites installer can deploy the add-on as well. Note: If you are using Firefox running on a Windows 7 operating system, the Windows 7 User Account Control must be set to Never Notify during the installation and can then be set back. Adobe Flash Player and later Microsoft.NET Framework

54 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Note:.NET versions are not inclusive of past.net versions. So, for example, if you are installing.net 4.0 you must install.net 3.5 SP1. Note: Raritan recommends that dctrack users with database backup files that exceed 2G should use either Internet Explorer 9 or Chrome to restore a database. See Restore Your Database (on page 94) for more details. When you launch dctrack from the dctrack Web Client, the following software is installed automatically if it does not already exist on your machine. This software can also be re-installed, for example in order to repair issues, by clicking the Prerequisites button in the dctrack Web Client start page. Add-ons and database drivers Microsoft Access 2003 Runtime Microsoft Access 2003 Runtime is installed when dctrack is installed. Microsoft Access Macro Security is set to Low during the installation process. See your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security if you wish to change the setting from Low to another level. Note: Microsoft Access 2007 is not supported. PostgreSQL ODBC drivers and PostgreSQL ADO drivers Microsoft Office file converter pack PostgreSQL ODBC drivers and PostgreSQL ADO drivers are required to run dctrack. If these drivers are not already installed on your machine, they are installed automatically when you launch dctrack. If this is not already installed on your machine, it is installed automatically when you launch dctrack. dctrack Classic View supports the following software but are not required in order to use dctrack. Supported software AutoCAD 2009 or earlier AutoCAD.dwg files, which can be linked to an existing drawing of a data center floor plan (top view), are supported. Note: AutoCAD 2010 and 2011 are not supported by dctrack. 46

55 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Supported software Microsoft Visio Microsoft Visio is also supported but Visio drawings must be saved in AutoCAD.dwg file format in order to import them into dctrack. dctrack Data Model The dctrack model consists of: Floor Plan Drawings - An AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio drawing in.dwg file format. Sites - A data center room. Multiple sites are supported by dctrack. Items - Assets within your data center. Items include cabinets, devices, networks, data and comm panels, UPS, PDUs, outlets, rack PDUs, CRAC units and environmental probes. Ports - Data/communication and power ports. This includes data panel ports, virtual network and data panel ports, power ports, breaker panel poles and environmental probe ports. Connections - Data/communication and power connections are made in dctrack between data/data panel ports and power ports, respectively. Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. 47

56 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Power IQ Data Model Following is the Power IQ data model. dctrack maps Power IQ items imported into dctrack during the Power IQ integration process to dctrack items based on this data model. Note: The Power IQ data model is relevant to Power IQ users and dctrack users who are synching with Power IQ. See Power IQ Integration Settings (Synching dctrack and Power IQ) (on page 135). There are nine types of objects used. From largest to smallest they are: DATA_CENTER - The data center object type. This object has no parent. FLOOR - The floor object type. This object can only have a DATA_CENTER as a parent. ROOM - The room object type. This object can have a DATA_CENTER or FLOOR as a parent. AISLE - The aisle object type. This object can have a DATA_CENTER, ROOM, or FLOOR as a parent. ROW - The row object type. This object can have a DATA_CENTER, ROOM, FLOOR, or AISLE as a parent. RACK - The rack object type. This object can have a DATA_CENTER, ROOM, FLOOR, AISLE, or ROW as a parent. DEVICE - The IT Device object type. This object can only have a RACK as a parent. Two objects represent outlets and Power Distribution Units: OUTLET - The outlet object type. This object can only have a DEVICE as a parent. PDU - The PDU object type. This object represents PDUs that do not have outlet level metering and are unable of communicating device-specific data to the system. A model does not necessarily have to contain all object levels. For example, a model could include: Device "Exchange Server" has a Rack "IT Rack #1" as its parent object. Rack "IT Rack #1" has a Data Center "IT Data Center" as its parent object. Room "Server Closet" could never have Rack "IT Rack#1" as a parent. An object can only be mapped to a larger parent object. 48

57 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 49

58 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators dctrack Configuration Use Cases Following are use cases that cover the dctrack configurations being used by most of our clients. Since each configuration is different, installation steps may vary from one use case to another. For example, a clean install where a client is installing dctrack and Power IQ for the first time is different from clients who have Power IQ and are adding dctrack. Follow the use case installation instructions for the configuration you are using. Important: Raritan strongly suggests you read through the uses case(s) that apply to your dctrack configuration. Use Case 1: Implementing dctrack for the First Time (Clean Install) In this use case, you are implementing dctrack for the first time, meaning you have neither dctrack or Power IQ installed already. See VM and Client Requirements (on page 44) and Preparing to Install dctrack (on page 43) before you begin. This use case includes the following steps: Create the dctrack Virtual Machine (on page 50) Load dctrack onto the Virtual Machine (on page 51) Run the Prerequisite Program (Optional) (on page 52) Initial Configuration of dctrack (on page 53) Perform Post Installation Steps (on page 54) Build the Data Center in dctrack (on page 61) Create the dctrack Virtual Machine Note: The following virtual machine installation steps are an example of a virtual machine installation. Follow your installation preferences if they differ from these. To create the virtual machine: 1. Connect to the VMware server using vsphere client. Log in as a user that has permission to create, start, and stop virtual machines. 2. In the Summary tab, click New Virtual Machine in the Command box. 3. Choose Custom. Click Next. 4. Enter a name for the virtual machine. Click Next. 5. Choose a datastore with at least 160GB of free space available for the VM. Click Next. 50

59 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 6. You may need to select the Virtual Machine Version, depending on your host. Select the version. Click Next. 7. Select Linux for the Guest Operating System, then select Other Linux (32-bit) from the Version drop-down. Click Next. 8. Set the number of virtual processors to 1. Click Next. 9. Adjust the amount of memory allocated for the virtual machine to at least the minimum 4G required. For better performance, increase the amount of allocated memory. Click Next. 10. Set the number of NICs to one or two. If there are two NICs, one can be used for external access to the web interface and the other can be used as a private LAN for communication with the PDUs and other data center devices. In either case, make sure Connect at Power On is checked, and leave all other settings at default. Click Next. 11. Select LSI Logic for the SCSI Controller. Click Next. 12. Select "Create a new virtual disk." Click Next. 13. Set the Disk Capacity 160GB (based on your datastore selection early) and select "Store with the virtual machine". Click Next. 14. Leave all advanced options at default. Click Next. 15. Select the "Edit virtual machine settings before completion" checkbox, then click Continue. The New Virtual Machine - Virtual Machine Properties dialog appears. Select New CD/DVD in the Hardware/Summary panel. In the Device Type section, select the Data Store ISO radio button, then browse and select the datastore containing the ISO file. Click Finish to save drive and return to the main dialog. 16. Click Finish to create the virtual machine. Load dctrack onto the Virtual Machine To load dctrack onto the virtual machine: 1. Select VM and right click Edit Settings. 2. Select Options > Advanced > Boot Options and select Force BIOS Setup. 3. Click "Power on" to power up the virtual machine. 4. Click on "disk" at the top of the console window and select "Connect to ISO image on datastore". 5. Select the datastore 6. Select the dctrack ISO. 7. Click on the Console tab. 8. Click inside console window, 51

60 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 9. Use the Esc key to get to main BIOS page. 10. Exit the BIOS by selecting Exit Discarding Changes and using the Enter key. The dctrack Kickstart page opens. 11. Type 2 for a VMware installation and press Enter to begin installation. 12. When the installation completes, disconnect the ISO disk and press Enter to reboot the dctrack virtual machine. The virtual machine reboots and displays a console prompt. Run the Prerequisite Program (Optional) When you launch dctrack, the application checks the client to make sure it meets the minimum system requirements. If this is the first time you are using dctrack, you must install the prerequisites program. The prerequisites program installs all of the software required to use dctrack on your local machine. This includes: Microsoft Access 2003 Runtime Microsoft Office file converter pack dctrack shared components PostgreSQL ODBC drivers PostgreSQL ADO drivers To run the prerequisites program: 1. Connect to dctrack using a web browser on any machine on the network. 2. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address assigned to dctrack. For example: 3. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 4. Select Install Prerequisites for Classic View from the Administration menu to download the dctrackprereqs.exe file and save it to your machine. 5. Once the program is downloaded, run the dctrackprereqs.exe by double-clicking on it. 6. Click Install on the first dialog of the install wizard. 7. Optionally, select the 'Set MC Access security mode to low' on the 'Setting MS Access 2003 security mode' dialog. Click Next. Note: If you do not set the Microsoft Access security mode to low, dctrack still works but security warnings are displayed each time you launch dctrack. You must then answer all questions about blocking unsafe expressions with "No". If you set the security mode to low but want to change to a higher level later, see your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security. 52

61 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 8. If you are using Firefox as your browser, you must install the Firefox.NET Framework add-on. Check the 'Install Mozilla Firefox.NET Framework assistant add-on' checkbox and click Next. If you are not using Firefox and are not planning on using it in the future, you do not need to install this add-on. 9. Click Finish on the last dialog. All of the components required to run dctrack are installed. Initial Configuration of dctrack After installing dctrack, you must configure the system for access over the network. To configure the system for access over the network: 1. Access the local port from the Console tab of the VMware Infrastructure Client. 2. When prompted to log in, use the username config and the password raritan. The dctrack configuration page opens. 3. Select Networking Setup, then select Setup LAN 1 to configure the primary Ethernet port. 4. Press the Space bar to select Enable this LAN Port. 5. To manually assign the network settings to dctrack, deselect Use DHCP. Type the IP address, network masks, and gateway into the appropriate fields. If using DHCP, note the address. This must be a DHCP server available on the LAN. 6. Select Accept to reset the network interface with the new values. 7. If you are using a second network interface, select Setup LAN 2 from the Network Configuration menu and configure the secondary Ethernet port in the same manner as the first. Optional 8. Select Ping Network Test to ensure that dctrack can communicate over the network. Optional 9. Setup the Name Servers under Network Configuration. If you do not setup the Name Server, DNS names cannot be resolved. Optional 10. In order to increase the secure access to dctrack, it is advisable to disable SSH remote access to dctrack. To disable SSH remote access to dctrack, select System Services. Deselect Enable SSH. By default, the config account has access to dctrack. SSH is re-enabled if a support connection is created. Optional 11. Select Exit from the main menu. You can now access dctrack from any client on the network. 53

62 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Perform Post Installation Steps Once you are done installing dctrack, perform the following post installation steps: Log In to dctrack for the First Time (on page 54) Add a License (on page 40) Change the Administrator Password (on page 42) Configure the System Clock (on page 59) Configure NTP Server Settings (on page 60) Log In to dctrack for the First Time dctrack supports the Windows 7 and Windows XP operating systems, as well as the Internet Explorer and Firefox browsers. If you are using Firefox running on the Windows 7 operating system, additional steps must be taken the first time you log in. See Firefox Users (on page 55). The first time you log in to dctrack, you download dctrack licenses. The steps outlined in this section walk you through the license installation. See Licensing (on page 39)for more license details. This information covers logging in to dctrack for the first time. Once all licenses and necessary add-ons are installed, the majority of steps do not need to be repeated. See Log In and Log Off (on page 39) for information on logging in to dctrack after the initial log in. Internet Explorer Users To log in using Internet Explorer: 1. Connect to dctrack using a web browser. 2. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address or name assigned to dctrack. 3. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 4. The first time you access dctrack, the Licensing page opens. Log in to the page. a. Click Add, then select your dctrack license file. Licenses are.lic files. Repeat this step to add incremental licenses if needed. Note: Your license file can be retrieved from the Raritan web site after you have activated your registration. To activate your registration, click the link in the "Thank you for registering" from Raritan and create your user account. Once you create your account, look for a "Your Raritan software license key is available" containing a link to your license file download page. b. Click Continue. If you see error messages and the Continue button is disabled, contact Raritan Technical Support. There may be a problem with your license file. 54

63 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators c. Select Yes to the End User License Agreement and click Submit. 5. Log in to dctrack with the default username admin and password raritan. The dctrack dashboard opens. Note: For security reasons, be sure to change the admin password. See Change the Administrator Password (on page 42). 6. Click the Classic View link in the dctrack Web Client to open Classic View. You must have local administrator rights on the client machine in order to run and properly install the Classic View prerequisites. To install prerequisites, do one of the following: If you have.net 3.5 components installed, clicking the Classic View link launches dctrack Classic View and no other steps are needed. Begin using the application. If the components are not found, dctrack walks you through the install (see steps below). Note: The.NET 3.5 component is built into the Windows 7 operating system, so dctrack launches without needing to install any components. If.NET 3.5 components are not installed, clicking Classic View displays a message letting you know. Install the.net components by following the wizard that is launched when you click Classic View or by clicking Administration > Install Classic View Prerequisites. a. Click Install on the first dialog of the install wizard. b. Optionally, select the "Set MS Access security mode to low" on the "Setting MS Access 2003 security mode" dialog. Click Next. Note: If you do not set the Microsoft Access security mode to low, dctrack still works but you see security warnings each time you launch dctrack. You must then answer 'No' to all questions about blocking unsafe expressions. If you set the security mode to low but want to change to a higher level later, see your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security. c. Click Finish on the last dialog. All of the components required to run dctrack are installed. Firefox Users To log in using Firefox as your browser: 1. If you are a Firefox user running the Windows 7 operating system, if Firefox.NET Assistant has not already been installed, set the Windows 7 User Account Control to Never Notify and restart Windows 7. See your Windows Help for information on changing this setting. 2. Connect to dctrack using a web browser. 55

64 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 3. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address or name assigned to dctrack. 4. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 5. The first time you access dctrack, the Licensing page opens. Log in to the page. a. Click Add, then select your dctrack license file. Licenses are.lic files. Repeat this step to add incremental licenses if needed. Note: Your license file can be retrieved from the Raritan web site after you have activated your registration. To activate your registration, click the link in the "Thank you for registering" from Raritan and create your user account. Once you create your account, look for a "Your Raritan software license key is available" containing a link to your license file download page. b. Click Continue. If you see error messages and the Continue button is disabled, contact Raritan Technical Support. There may be a problem with your license file. c. Select Yes to the End User License Agreement and click Submit. 6. Firefox users running the Windows 7 operating system, restart Firefox and then reconnect to dctrack via its IP address. 7. Log in to dctrack with the default username admin and password raritan. The dctrack dashboard opens. Note: For security reasons, be sure to change the admin password. See Change the Administrator Password (on page 42). 8. Click the Classic View link in the dctrack Web Client to open Classic View. You must have local administrator rights on the client machine in order to run and properly install the Classic View prerequisites. To install prerequisites, do one of the following: If you have.net 3.5 components installed, clicking the Classic View link launches dctrack Classic View and no other steps are needed. Begin using the application. If the components are not found, dctrack walks you through the install (see steps below). Note: The.NET 3.5 component is built into the Windows 7 operating system, so dctrack launches without needing to install any components. If.NET 3.5 components are not installed, clicking Classic View displays a message letting you know. Install the.net components by following the wizard that is launched when you click Classic View or by clicking Administration > Install Classic View Prerequisites. a. Click Install on the first dialog of the install wizard. 56

65 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators b. Optionally, select the "Set MS Access security mode to low" on the "Setting MS Access 2003 security mode" dialog. Click Next. Note: If you do not set the Microsoft Access security mode to low, dctrack still works but you see security warnings each time you launch dctrack. You must then answer 'No' to all questions about blocking unsafe expressions. If you set the security mode to low but want to change to a higher level later, see your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security. c. Click Finish on the last dialog. All of the components required to run dctrack are installed. 9. To complete the installation, do one of the following: If you are using Firefox on a Windows XP client, close and then reopen the browser to complete the installation. Log back in and launch dctrack. Firefox users running the Windows operating system, reset the User Account Control to its previous setting and reboot. Log back in and launch dctrack. Licensing dctrack is licensed based on the number of cabinets maintained by the application. Contact Raritan Sales for additional information. Add a License Licenses are added in the dctrack Web Client. If this is your first time logging in and you need to add a license file, see Log In to dctrack for the First Time (on page 54). Once you add a license file and log in for the first time, you can follow the instructions in this topic to add or remove license files as needed. To add a license file: 1. Click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Product Licensing in the Application Administration panel. 3. Click Add in the Licenses section. 4. Use the browse function to locate and add the license file. Licenses are.lic files. Repeat this step to add incremental licenses if needed. Note: Your license file can be retrieved from the Raritan web site after you have activated your registration. To activate your registration, click the link in the "Thank you for registering" from Raritan and create your user account. Once you create your account, look for a "Your Raritan software license key is available" containing a link to your license file download page. 57

66 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 5. If you see error messages AND you're unable to use dctrack or to add the total licensed number of cabinets, contact Raritan Technical Support. There may be a problem with your license file. View Licenses The licenses that you have uploaded to dctrack are available to view from either the dctrack Web Client or Classic View. Web Client Administrators can view and add dctrack licenses from the dctrack Web Client. To view licenses from the dctrack Web Client: 1. Click Administration > Settings to open the Settings page in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Product Licensing in the Appliance Administration panel. Licensing Summary contains information about how many cabinets your combined licenses allow you to add to dctrack. Customer Name Cabinet license capacity Cabinet licenses available Your company name. The total number of cabinets allowed by all your licenses. The number of cabinets remaining that you are allowed to add. The Licenses list contains all license files that you have uploaded to dctrack. Feature Type The feature that is allowed by this license. Initial: A required license to activate dctrack and set the initial cabinet capacity allowed. Incremental: A secondary license type that allows you to add to the initial license's cabinet capacity. Count Licensee The number of cabinets that you can add to dctrack under this license. Your company name. Classic View In dctrack Classic View, license information is available on the splash screen and in the dashboard at the bottom of the page. The splash screen provides a quick summary of licensed cabinets and total number of ports. It also provides a summary of the items, comm ports, power ports, and sensors associated with each cabinet. 58

67 Change the Administrator Password Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators The administrator password can only be changed by the administrator. It is important to change the default administrator account password as soon as possible. This helps prevent unauthorized administrator access to dctrack. To change the administrator password: 1. Select Administration > Settings to open the Settings window in a secondary browser. 2. Click User Accounts in the Authorization and Authentication panel. The Users page opens. 3. Click on the admin user. 4. Click Change Password on the "User Information for ADMIN" page. 5. Type a new password for the admin account in the Password field, then type it again in the Confirm Password field. 6. Click Save. Configure the System Clock dctrack uses the system clock to time-stamp events. Set the system clock as soon as possible to keep an accurate record of events. Using an NTP server is recommended to keep the system clock synchronized. Note: These steps are performed in the dctrack Web Client. To set the system clock: 1. Select Administration > Settings to open the Settings page in a secondary browser window. 2. Click the Time Settings link in the Appliance Administration panel. 3. Update each time setting as needed. Click Save. See Configure NTP Server Settings (on page 60) for additional time setting information. 59

68 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Configure NTP Server Settings NTP must be enabled before you can configure NTP server settings. The Configure Time Servers table lists the NTP servers the dctrack appliance contacts to get date and time information. The dctrack appliance attempts to retrieve the date and time from the first server on the list. If this attempt fails, it proceeds down the list and attempts to contact the second server, then the third, and so on. Note: The dctrack appliance uses NTP. The dctrack application does not. Note: These steps are performed in the dctrack Web Client. To enable NTP and configure NTP servers: 1. Select Administration > Settings to open the Settings page in a secondary browser window. 2. Click the Time Settings link in the Appliance Administration panel. 3. Select Yes in the Enable NTP drop-down and click Save. 4. Click Manage Time Servers to configure settings for the NTP servers. 5. Click Add. 6. Type the time server's IP address or DNS name in the Time Server field. If you are using the DNS name, it must be configured via the console. 7. Click Save Changes. 60

69 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Build the Data Center in dctrack After you have installed and configured dctrack, your next step is to build your data center in the application. This section contains the essential steps to help you complete this task. The steps in this process are performed in dctrack Classic View. Once the data center is built in Classic View it is available in the dctrack Web Client where you can manage items, build connections, reserve cabinet space, place items and so on. The flowchart shown here outlines the steps in this process. For more information on each step, see dctrack Help. 61

70 62 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators

71 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Step Step 1: Customize dctrack Lists and MIBs Step 2: Import the Models Library Description Customize Drop-Down Lists Populate and customize drop-down lists. These are the user-customizable field values for many data fields in dctrack. For example, User Departments, Colors, Item Function, and so on. Add and Configure SNMP MIBs If dctrack is to request SNMP data from SNMP-enabled facility equipment in the data center, MIBs and OIDs for this equipment need to be configured in dctrack. All equipment for a particular manufacturer that uses the same MIB can share the same dctrack MIB definition. The dctrack Models library is updated regularly by Raritan. It is important that you download the latest library before beginning to populate the dctrack database. You obtain the latest library from the Raritan website by logging on and accessing the dctrack Firmware and Documentation page. Note: To access the website, you need a valid dctrack license and username and password. If the latest library does not contain all the models you need, add new models to the library directly in dctrack, or submit a list of missing models and their manufacturers to Raritan to be included in a future build of the library. Step 3: Prepare Drawing Files Step 4: Create Sites and Link Drawings Locate any AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio floor plan drawings of your data centers. As a best practice, Raritan recommends a single working copy be used throughout your organization. This copy of the drawing file can be saved on a file share that is visible as a read-only file to all dctrack users. Add a site for each data center room to be modeled and enter the appropriate site information. Link the floor plan to the site in dctrack by using the Browse button on the Sites page to do this. 63

72 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Step Step 5: Synch AutoCAD Objects Description Synchronize the floor plan drawing with dctrack using the AutoCAD Sync function on the Visualize > Floor Map page. Synching imports items such as cabinets, floor PDUs, CRAC units, and other floor-standing units into dctrack. dctrack allows you to select groups of items of a given type, such as cabinets, floor PDUs and so on, and then select the appropriate dctrack item class. Step 6: Collect Data Step 7: Import Cabinets Cabinets are created by synching a linked AutoCAD drawing. However, synching only creates the cabinet item and populates its Item Name field. All other information must be populated using the Import Wizard or it must be entered manually. Use the "Cabinets Only" spreadsheet template to capture the information and then import it. Step 8: Create the Data Center Infrastructure in dctrack Step 9: Automated Data Population Step 10: Add and Assign Applications Optional Step 11: Test and Verify Applications may have been discovered and added during SNMP auto-discovery. If they were not discovered, manually add any additional applications from the appropriate device items page in dctrack. 64

73 Customize Drop-Down Lists Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Lists are maintained by administrators and work in conjunction with libraries as a tool to manage the information collected in and maintained by dctrack. Items can be added to lists and edited as needed to fulfill your specific requirements. Customizable drop-down lists (administrative lists) are specific to your data center needs and are used in dctrack as field values. For example, departments, color coding, item functions, and so on. Once lists are created, you can view, edit and delete them as needed. Note: These steps are performed in Classic View. To add an item to a list: 1. Click Administration > Lists to open the Lists page. 2. In the Lists section of the page, click on the list you want to add the item to. 3. Click Add. 4. In the Add/Edit List Item section of the page, enter a name for the item. Required 5. Enter a description of the item. 6. Enter any additional information as needed and where applicable. The information that can be entered varies depending on the list you are adding it to. 7. Click Save. See Lists (on page 180) for more details on what lists are in dctrack and for more information on working with drop-down lists once you have finished building your data center in dctrack. Add and Configure SNMP MIBs Configure MIBs and OIDs in dctrack for your SNMP enabled equipment if you are going to use SNMP requests to get data. Note: These steps are performed in Classic View. To create an SNMP MIB Definition: 1. From the SNMP library: a. Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. b. Add a MIB definition in the MIB Library section of the page. c. Load a MIB file that is provided by the item manufacturer. d. Once the MIB is loaded, you can browse in the MIB Browser and Object Details section of the page. 65

74 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators e. Identify the MIB OID that contains the data you want and select it in the browser. The details of this OID branch are shown in the lower right section of the page. f. From the Link OID to dctrack drop-down, select the dctrack field that corresponds to the OID value. Note: If you want to select a custom field, type the name of the custom field into the drop-down. If the custom field already exists, it is added. If the field is not found, you are prompted by the application to create it. Create the field if needed. g. Select a value in the Index Start drop-down. The index is a value that is added to the end of the OID to create the full OID used to query the item. For example, if querying amps for all receptacles of a rack PDU, then the Index Start would be the last digit in the OID for the first receptacle. dctrack then increments the index for each receptacle that exists for that particular rack PDU. h. Select a multiplication factor to correct the unit. For example, the amps value in MIB is stored in milliamps and must be multiplied by to store the value as amps in dctrack. i. Once all fields are mapped, link the MIB definition with all the models that use it by selecting the MIB in the MIB Library section and then selecting all the models you want to link to the MIB (use Ctrl and Shift keys for multiple selections). Click Link. Repeat the process for other MIBs. 2. From an item page such as a Rack PDU page: a. Add a Comm Port. b. Provide the IP address and SNMP Community Name. 3. Click Get Readings to get a new SNMP reading. 4. See Using snmptrack Poller (on page 187) for more details on using SNMP in dctrack. 66

75 Import the Models Library Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators The dctrack Models library is updated regularly by Raritan. It is important that you download the latest library before beginning to populate the dctrack database. You obtain the latest library from the Raritan website by logging on and accessing the dctrack Firmware and Documentation page. Note: These steps are performed in Classic View. Note: To access the website, you need a valid dctrack license and username and password. Note: The import may take some time to complete depending on the size of the import. To import models into the Models library: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > Models. 2. Click Import. 3. Use the Browse feature on the Library Import dialog to locate the master library file the model(s) are imported from. Alternatively, select the "Re-import models that I deleted from My Library" checkbox to import only previously deleted models. 4. Click Begin. 67

76 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Prepare Drawing Files Locate any AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio floor plan drawings of your data centers so they can be added to dctrack. As a best practice, Raritan recommends a single working copy be used throughout your organization. This copy of the drawing file can be saved on a file share that is visible as a read-only file to all dctrack users. If floor plan drawings do not exist, create the drawings in either AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio. Note: Drawing files must be in.dwg file format to be imported into dctrack. Before you import your drawings into dctrack, make sure they meet the dctrack mandatory drawing requirements. These mandatory requirements are: A Solid Hatch object must be drawn inside each rack, cabinet, PDU and CRAC unit. A text label (Standard Text or Multiline Text) must be created and placed inside every rack, cabinet, PDU and CRAC unit. This label must contain the name or ID of the object that will be viewed in dctrack. All drawing objects must be in Model Space. Do not begin the name of any layer with the word "dctrack" unless you are directed to do so. Also, review the drawings to ensure: All floor objects such as cabinets, floor PDUs, and CRAC units, and other floor-standing units are included in the drawing. All floor objects have unique text IDs and that they match any other documentation to be imported into dctrack. 68

77 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Optional Drawing Feature Requirements Cable Routes Option Draw UTP cabling on a Layer called dctrackcablingcopper. Draw fiber cabling on a Layer called dctrackcablingfiber. Draw coax cabling on a Layer called dctrackcablingcoax. Draw power cabling on a Layer called dctrackcablingpower. Draw lines representing the cable routes using the Pline (Polyline) command. The Pline between two cabinets must be a continuous Pline object. Each end of the Pline must cross inside the cabinet Solid Hatch. Turn the above Layers off after creating the Layers and drawing the cable routes. Do not Freeze them. Raised Floor Grid Labeling Option 1. Draw a marker on a Layer called dctrackgridmarker. 69

78 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators The figure shown here is an example of a grid marker starting at a location where the A1 tile doesn't exist. Note that the blue lines were temporarily drawn to represent the location of the A1 tile exactly. Note the corner and direction of the line inside. 2. Draw the marker using the Rectangle command matching the origin coordinate (A1) tile exactly. If the A1 tile doesn't exist because of the geometry of the room walls, use the temporary lines to extend the raised floor grid to where the A1 tile would have been and draw the square marker there. Delete the temporary lines. 3. Inside this square, draw a Line (don't use Pline) from the exact corner of the square to the approximate center. Choose the corner that represents the 0,0 coordinate. In other words, this line starts at the corner and points to the direction of increasing numbers and letters. 4. Do not draw any other objects on this Layer. 5. The Layer should be turned Off, however, do not Freeze it. The figure below shows an example of a grid marker at the A1 tile which is not a full tile, but the marker must have the dimensions of a full tile. Note the corner and direction of the line inside. 70

79 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Perforated Tiles (PT) Option 1. Draw the Perforated Tiles (PT) on a Layer called dctrackperftiles. 2. The PT is represented by drawing a Solid Hatch that is the size of one floor tile. You can make the PT look more realistic by showing the perforations in the Solid Hatch object. To do this: a. Before drawing the Solid Hatch, draw a grid of small Circles inside the square of the tile. b. Next, draw the Solid Hatch. This keeps the Solid Hatch out of the interior of the Circles. Delete all the Circles. 71

80 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 3. Use the PT Solid Hatch and copy it to every tile in the data center where a PT can be possibly installed. Use the Array command to accomplish the copying. Start with the PT Solid Hatch in the lower left most tile. Then provide the Array command with the number of rows and columns of PTs to be created. For correct array propagation, use the mouse with 'intersection snap' turned on so as to pick the offset points. The Layer should be turned Off but do not Freeze it. 4. Draw a grid of 7 x 7 circles using the Array command. 5. Draw two Lines from opposite corners in order to find the center point of the tile. 6. Move all circles so that the center of the center circle is at the intersection of the two Lines. Delete the two Lines. 7. Draw a Solid Hatch bound by the tile and the outside of all Circles. Delete all the Circles. 72

81 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 8. Use the Array command to copy the hatch object to all tiles in your data center. 9. Delete all extra PT hatch objects where a PT may never be installed such as under and to the sides of the PDU and CRAC units. Good Practices The cabinet outline should be a single object. Use the Pline or the Rectangle commands to draw the cabinet outline. If a cabinet has a curved front that you want to show, use a single Pline to draw the cabinet starting at the center of the rear. Then, for the curved front, draw several shorter straight lines while varying the angle each time to achieve the curved look. Make the Pline width of the cabinet outline equal to 0.75 or 1. Draw cabinet outlines, cabinet solid hatches and cabinet labels on separate Layers. This makes it much easier to make modifications and global changes in the future. A text label (Standard Text or Multiline Text) should be created to identify each row. The same label should be used in the Row Label field on the Cabinet page. Colors: Use Color 81 for the cabinet Solid Hatch. Use Color 254 for PDU and CRAC Solid Hatches. Use Color 151 for PT Solid Hatches. 73

82 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Use text style Arial Bold and a text height of 9 inches. This text height assumes that the AutoCAD drawing is drawn in a scale of 1:1. Use the Fillet command with a radius of 3 inches to round the edges of all the Plines representing the cable routes. This provides a cleaner look. This radius size assumes that the AutoCAD drawing is drawing in a scale of 1:1. If there is a title block in the AutoCAD drawing, place it in the Paper Space and create a Viewport to the Model Space. When you use the Advanced Print feature in dctrack, dctrack switches to the first Paper Space layout (if it exists) and print it, thus printing your floor map with a title block. Visio Drawings If your floor plan is in Microsoft Visio rather than AutoCAD, you can save it as a DWG file and then import it into dctrack. This Save As conversion can be repeated each time the drawing needs to be modified. In the following instructions, the term "shapes" refers to the Visio drawing element that is used to represent an item in a data center. For example, a server may be represented by a rectangle. Visio-to-AutoCAD Export Rules Due to the behavior of the Microsoft Visio -to-autocad export, you must follow these rules when creating the drawing in Visio in order to provide proper visualization once the drawing is imported into dctrack. Each floor plan object must use a solid fill color other then 01:White. To add a fill color to a shape in Visio: 1. Right-click the object and choose Format > Fill. 2. Select a color and set the pattern to 01:Solid. The specific color is not important since it is not be used in dctrack. Visio shapes on a layer cannot use a black border. In Visio, an object border is drawn in black and is then filled in with another color. For example, a rectangle with a black outline may be filled in with blue. When the drawing is converted to DWG and opened in dctrack, the object is filled in with black since the color of the rectangle border is used for the fill color and not the fill color itself. To change the boarder and fill color for shapes on a Visio layer: 1. In Visio, go to View > Layer Properties. The Layer Properties dialog appears. 2. Create a new layer for the objects by selecting the New... button, naming the layer in the New Layer dialog and clicking OK. 74

83 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Important: Do not begin the name of any layer with the word "dctrack" unless you are directed to do so. 3. Using the Layer Color drop-down on the Layer Properties dialog, select a color. To change the color to the same color that dctrack uses for cabinets (AutoCAD's color 81), click on More Colors from the color drop-down in Visio and select the Custom tab. a. Enter the RGB colors as follows: Red = 159 Green = 255 Blue = Click OK to apply the changes to the layer. 5. Next, make sure all objects are assigned only to the layer you just created. To do this, turn on the Format Shape toolbar and select an object. The layer name is displayed in the toolbar for all objects selected. Note: When you do this, the rectangle of the object takes on the color of the layer and no longer appears to be filled even though it is. Objects do not have a black border to define them from each other after you complete these steps and save the Visio drawing as an AutoCAD file. Instead, the object border and its fill use the color of the layer. If you want the Visio objects to use a boarder that is a different color than the fill, do the following as a workaround. To create a boarder for the objects: 1. Draw an additional rectangle that has no fill (Pattern = None) around each object that is not assigned to a layer (Layer = {No Layer}). This is similar to the way it would be done in AutoCAD, where the rectangle and the hatch are two separate objects. 2. To easily distinguish classes of objects, create separate layers and colors for each type of floor-standing object in the data center such as a cabinet, PDU, CRAC or UPS. 3. Text labels should be modified if the text wraps to multiple lines. Text wrapping causes AutoCAD to insert a dash at the end of each line. The workaround to this issue is to size the text box of the label to be wide enough so that the text does not wrap. Reducing the font size also helps prevent wrapping. Each floor plan object must have a unique text ID. To add a text ID to a Visio object: 1. Double-click on the object to put it in edit mode and type the text ID or use the Text Tool to add a text box. 75

84 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 2. Make sure the text box is inside the floor plan object. 3. Create duplicate objects with no fill and no text ID. Duplicate objects cannot be on a layer. Place them on top of the original object to provide borders for the objects. This is important to clearly distinguish multiple objects arranged side-by-side in a row. The Visio Measurement Units setting must be set to inches, not feet and inches. If you are using US units in the Visio drawing, the Measurement Units setting must be set to inches rather than feet and inches. To change the measurement setting in Visio: 1. Select File > Page Setup. 2. Select the Page Properties tab. 3. Select Inches from the "Measurement units" drop-down. Create Locations (Sites) and Link Drawings Create Locations (Sites) This topic covers creating a site for the first time within dctrack. Add a site for each data center room to be modeled and enter the appropriate site information. Once you have created the site, you are ready to import AutoCAD items and synch AutoCAD objects. Note: Once the site is created, in order to see it in the Web Client, you must log out and then log back in to Web Client. Note: These steps are performed in Classic View. Note: The term site is used in Classic View and location is used in the Web Client. To add a site for the first time: 1. Click Sites to open the Sites page. 2. Click Add on the bottom of the Sites page. 3. Complete the Site Information section: a. Enter a Site Code and the Site Name for the site. The site code and site name appear in the Available Sites list once the site is added. Required b. Select a type for the site, either main, regional, local or disaster recovery. c. Enter the square footage of the site. Required 76

85 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators d. Enter the outer room dimensions, if needed. When you put your cursor in the Outer Room Dimensions field, example diagrams of rooms measured in length and width is displayed. Tip: You can change the measurement units to either US or SI (metric) by clicking on the Units drop-down at the bottom of the left frame. e. Enter the data center heights, if needed. When you put your cursor in any one of the Data Center Heights fields, example diagrams of room heights is displayed. 4. Complete the Site Address section: a. Select the country the site is located in. Required b. Enter the floor, street, city, state and postal code for the site, if needed. 5. Complete the Floor Map Drawing Options section: a. Select the appropriate Drawing North arrow that best reflects your floor map orientation. For example, select the down arrow if North is located in that direction. b. If a raised floor grid labeling system such as A1, A2 and so on is used in the data center, make the appropriate selection from the Grid Labeling drop-down. 6. Complete the Cabinet Row Orientation on Drawing section: a. Make the appropriate selections to indicate the direction in which the cabinet position numbers increase. The labels shown inside the depiction of the cabinets are cabinet IDs, they are not position numbers. The position number for each cabinet is entered on the IT Items Cabinet page. Position numbers are used to create a convention that allows dctrack to track the relative position of a cabinet within a row. 7. Upload a of the site in the Site Picture section of the page: a. Click Browse and select the picture. JPG, BMP, WMF and GIF formats are supported. Once added, the picture is displayed in the box under the Site Picture field. 8. Upload a drawing of the site in the Site Drawing section of the page: a. Click Browse and select the AutoCAD.dwg drawing file of the data center. See Requirements and Good Practice for more detail about setting up the AutoCAD drawing. Note: AutoCAD 2010 and 2011 file formats are not supported by dctrack. 9. Click Save. 77

86 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Importing AutoCAD Items into dctrack Note: These steps are performed in Classic View. You are able to import AutoCAD objects into dctrack. Once an object has been imported, you can edit its detail information from its corresponding Items page. For example, you can import a cabinet represented on an AutoCAD drawing, select IT Items > Cabinets to locate it, and then edit the cabinet information. To import an AutoCAD object into dctrack: 1. Select Visualize > Floor Map to open the Floor Map page. 2. Click the AutoCAD Synch button. The Synch dctrack with AutoCAD Drawing dialog opens. 3. A blank space appears in the "In dctrack" column of the "Objects found in AutoCAD Drawing" list if the objects are found in the AutoCAD drawing but are either not found in dctrack or are in dctrack with a matching label that is not linked to AutoCAD. Note: Not every floor-standing item has to have a link. For example, UPS units may not be located within the data center raised floor room, so the UPS exists in dctrack but does not have a link to the AutoCAD drawing. 4. If the items already exists in dctrack but have not been linked to the AutoCAD drawing, No is displayed under the Linked column of the "Items found in dctrack" list. If the item is already linked, Yes is displayed. 5. Select objects of the same item class from the "Objects found in AutoCAD Drawing" list. Use Ctrl + click or Shift + click to select multiple items. 6. Click Import Items. The items are added to the "Items found in dctrack" list. Close the Synch dctrack with AutoCAD Drawing dialog. 7. Edit the item(s) as needed. Link AutoCAD Objects with dctrack Items To link/synchronize AutoCAD objects with dctrack items: 1. Select Visualize > Floor Map to open the Floor Map page. 2. Click the AutoCAD Synch button. The Synch dctrack with AutoCAD Drawing dialog opens. 78

87 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators A blank space appears in the "In dctrack" column of the "Objects found in AutoCAD Drawing" list if the objects are found in the AutoCAD drawing but are either not found in dctrack or are in dctrack with a matching label that is not linked to AutoCAD. Note: Not every floor-standing item has to have a link. For example, UPS units may not be located within the data center raised floor room, so the UPS exists in dctrack but does not have a link to the AutoCAD drawing. If the items already exists in dctrack but have not been linked to the AutoCAD drawing, No is displayed under the Linked column of the "Items found in dctrack" list. If the item is already linked, Yes is displayed. 3. Link the items to objects in the AutoCAD drawing in one of the following ways: a. Link one object to one AutoCAD object: Select the item from the "Items found in dctrack" list. Select an object from the "Objects found in AutoCAD Drawing" list. Click "Link dctrack Item with AutoCAD Object". Note: Using this method of linking also allows you to link AutoCAD objects to objects in dctrack that do not have matching object labels. 4. Link those objects found in the AutoCAD drawing with dctrack items. a. Link multiple objects to the AutoCAD drawing: Select objects of the same item class from the "Objects found in AutoCAD Drawing" list. Use Ctrl + click or Shift + click to select multiple items. Select the corresponding item class from the "Import selected AutoCAD objects as Item Class" drop-down and click Import Items. All new items that have been imported are now visible in dctrack in the floor map items list and on the corresponding Item Class page. 79

88 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 5. Double-click on each item or click Detail 1 to complete all relevant fields for each item. From the Actions drop-down, select Submit New Item Request for Approval. Import Cabinets Cabinets are created by synching a linked AutoCAD drawing. However, synching only creates the cabinet item and populates its Item Name field. All other information must be populated using the Import Wizard or it must be entered manually. Use the "Cabinets Only" spreadsheet template to capture the information and then import it. Note: These steps are performed in Classic View. To import data from a spreadsheet or CSV file into dctrack: 1. Select Administration > Wizards > Import. 2. In the "Select a file to import from" section of the page, click Browse. Locate the source file and click Open in the "Select a file to import" dialog. Click Next. 3. In the Import Wizards section, select the type of import - Items with Ports as Quantities, Comm Circuits or Power Circuits. 4. From the Import all Items to this Site drop-down, select the site you are importing the data for. Click Next. The data from the spreadsheet is displayed in the data table at the top of the page and each column, along with the dctrack field it is mapped to, is displayed in the field match panel at the bottom left of the page. 80

89 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators If dctrack has successfully mapped each of the spreadsheet column headings to a field in dctrack, the "You've successfully mapped this field! Click Next." message is displayed at the bottom of the page. Additionally, all of the field values are listed in the "Available values in dctrack for field" box in the import panel on the bottom left of the page. Click Next. If dctrack could not map a spreadsheet column heading to a dctrack field, you must do one of the following: a. Skip the field by selecting the "Skip column" checkbox. OR b. Manually select and map the fields to a dctrack field listed in the "Map to dctrack field" drop-down. Use the Add function to add the field or Map to map the field. dctrack prompts you to enter related information for each field. Required information is indicated by a red asterisk (*). You are able select multiple items (with the exception of Models) using Ctrl and/or Shift. 5. After the last field is matched or mapped, click Next to open the data validation page. Click Validate to begin the process. Note: Large imports and/or use of hardware with specifications below the minimally recommended specifications can result in a processing time of up to several minutes. During validation, the format and integrity of the data is verified. Any rows (records) that do not meet the import criteria are displayed in the import panel of the page along with the specific reason for the validation failure. You can make corrections to data directly in the data table at the top of the page. To do this, first move back one column from the column you want to make changes to and then make changes. Once the changes are made, click Next to move forward until you reach the Validation page again. You can move back using the Back button, or you can click on the column name in the list of columns to the left. If the amount of conflicts and thus the corrections are involved, If the number of conflicts in need of correction is long, click the "Pop up Problems List" button to open a new window containing the list of conflicts in order to keep the information visible while you move back to the columns that require corrections. 6. Once data validation is complete and no more conflicts are displayed click Next > to open the Import page. 7. Before you begin the final import, it is recommended that you export the validated data to a new or existing spreadsheet using the Save As button so you have a copy of the most current version of the data. 8. Click on the Import button to begin the import process. The progress of the import as it happens is displayed on the page. 81

90 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators You can stop the import at any time by pressing the Cancel button. Records imported up to the point before you canceled the process are retained in the database. At the end of the import process, a status message is displayed. For all records that are imported successfully, the time, date and other parameters of the import are saved as a separate import session in the Completed Import Session drop-down for future reference and additional functions. 9. Once the import is complete, all items are marked as New and are located on the respective item pages. You are advised to go to the item detail pages for each imported item in order to review and, if necessarily, revise or adjust imported items. All import sessions are contained in the Select an Import Session drop-down and can be referenced from there in the future. Note: In order for an import session to appear in the Select an Import Session drop-down, more than one record must imported as part of the session. 82

91 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Create the Data Center Infrastructure in dctrack Create the Structured Cable Plant Infrastructure In this step, the comm panel items are created either manually or using the Import Wizard. This step is performed in Class View. To run the Import Wizard: From the Explorer Menu in dctrack, select the Administration > Import Wizard. Import the appropriate item template. If you are using the Import Wizard to create comm panel items, the comm panel item attributes are imported but the comm panel ports, that is the cables between a pair of comm panels, are not created during the import process. This information must be added after the comm panels are imported. To add comm panel items manually: Select IT Items > Comm Panel and enter the relevant information. Use the Create Ports button to create ports between a comm panel and its far end comm panel. The far end comm panel can be an existing panel in dctrack or created during the port creation step. Add data cable lines between the cabinets in the floor plan drawing. The cable line must be a continuous line and each end must penetrate inside the cabinet rectangle. Optional Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. 83

92 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Create the Power Infrastructure The UPS, PDU, Outlet and Rack PDU power item pages are accessed from the dctrack Explorer menu under Power Items. Following are high-level steps to follow when creating the power infrastructure in dctrack. This step is performed in Classic View. UPS Create UPS units and assign them to UPS Banks. If UPS units are included in your floor plan drawing and you have synched with your drawing already, go to the Power Items > UPS page to edit and/or update them. If UPS units are not included in your floor plan drawing, create them on the UPS page. You must enter the UPS capacity in kva and kw as well as the voltage values. You must assign the UPS to a UPS bank even if you have only one UPS unit. UPS banks are created in the Available UPS Banks section of the UPS page. Floor PDUs The 04 Power Panels template is used to manually collect data for this step. Note that this template is not currently importable. Create a floor PDU, assign it to a UPS bank, enter the PDU capacity in kva, and enter its input breaker amperage and voltage, which should match your UPS voltage. If PDU units are included in your floor plan drawing and you have synched them with your drawing already, go to the Power Items > PDU page in Add mode to edit and update the PDU items. If PDU units are not included in your floor plan drawing, add the PDU items on the PDU page. Create power panels, remote power panels, or busways for each floor PDU. If using remote power panels (RPP), create RPP for each floor PDU. Next, go back to the floor map and sync each RPP with its matching floor object in the AutoCAD drawing. Add breakers to each power breaker panel. If using busways, breakers are added when creating the outlet plug-in modules in the power outlets step. Power Outlets Create power outlet items, assign them to breakers and create outlet ports, such as electrical sockets or receptacles, on the Power Items > Outlet page. 84

93 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators On the floor plan drawings, add power cable lines between cabinets and floor PDUs or RPPs. A cable line must be a continuous line and each end must penetrate inside the cabinet and PDU/RPP rectangles. Optional If using busways, rather than selecting a breaker, enter the total number of poles within the outlet plug-in module. Then, for each of the poles, select the appropriate breaker. Once this is complete, create the outlet ports (such as electrical sockets or receptacles). Rack PDUs Create one rack PDU with ports, such as electrical sockets or receptacles, for each rack PDU model in the data center. Clone each rack PDU model as needed to cover all rack PDUs installed. Rename the cloned rack PDUs. There is no need to assign cabinet location. Use the Import Wizard to update all rack PDU s with cabinet and RU position information, as well as any other unique attributes such as serial numbers and purchase information. Use the 02 Items - All Other Classes import template file for the rack PDU import. Note that by using this import process you create a comm port for each intelligent rack PDU. dctrack Power Chain Following is a high-level view of the dctrack power chain. 85

94 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators CRAC Units Create the Environmental Infrastructure Create CRAC units and assign to CRAC groups. If CRAC units were included when you synched with your drawing, select Environ. Items > CRAC Explorer menu to edit and/or update the CRAC items. If CRAC units were not included when you synched with your drawing, use this page to add the CRAC items. You must enter the CRAC capacity in tons, which is automatically converted to kw, as well as the Input Voltage values. You must assign the CRAC to a CRAC group even if you have only one CRAC unit. CRAC groups are created in the Available CRAC Groups section of the page. Probes Probes are equipment that allows various sensors to be connected to them. To create probes, use the Import Wizard and include them along with all other servers and switches. To run the Import Wizard: From the Explorer Menu in dctrack, select the Administration > Import Wizard. Import the appropriate item template. Create IP Subnets IP Subnets To access IP subnets: From the Explorer menu, select the IP > Subnets page to define IP subnets for the site. Important: You must create your IP subnets prior to performing an SNMP auto-discovery. Otherwise, the discovered IP address is not added to the systems and ports that you are adding. Take note of the additional features in the other IP Space pages for IP addresses, VLANs, DNS audits, and so on. Perform Automated Data Population Note: These steps are performed in Classic View. Run SNMP Auto-Discovery dctrack uses SNMP auto-discovery to locate existing data center items and their associated ports, and then create them dctrack. Items must be SNMP enabled in order for dctrack to locate them, and their MAC and IP addresses must be provided. Important: Run SNMP auto-discovery before you import item 86

95 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators spreadsheets. If you do not, the discovered MAC and IP addresses are not added to ports created during the import process. Important: You must create your IP subnets prior to performing an SNMP auto-discovery. Otherwise, the discovered IP address is not added to the systems and ports that you are adding. SNMP auto-discovery collects the following types of data using RFC 1213 MIB ( ) and Host Resources MIB ( ): System name, description, services, uptime System network interfaces (ports) including MAC and IP addresses System RAM and virtual memory Disk storage capacity and percent used Brand, number and load of system processors Installed software and installation date Port names located through SNMP auto-discovery use the prefix "eth." Make sure to use this prefix when using the Import Wizard so as not to duplicate ports. To access SNMP auto-discovery: 1. From the Explorer menu, select the IP Space > Discovery to run the SNMP auto-discovery. 2. Add one or more of the discovered systems by choosing the appropriate site and item class. 3. Visit each discovered item and complete the missing port attributes, such as the connector and media. This info cannot be derived from the discovery process. This step can be performed on the item pages. However, it is easier to do from the Administration > Item & Ports page by selecting Ports from the upper left drop-down list. 87

96 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Import Items and Ports, Data Connections and Power Connections Items that are not discovered during an SNMP auto-discovery are imported using the Import Wizard or entered manually. Items that are already in dctrack via SNMP auto-discovery are updated by the import process thus adding information not available from discovery such as the model, cabinet and RU position, serial number, and so on. To run the Import Wizard: From the Explorer Menu in dctrack, select the Administration > Import Wizard. Import the appropriate item template. Import Items and Ports (servers, switches, and so on) The "02 Items - All Other Classes" import template should be used for documenting items to be imported. The following items are imported via the Wizard: Device Items Network Items Comm Panel Items Rack PDU Items Probes Items Note: Communications and power ports are created as part of this process. Manually update any remaining data not included in the template. Next, assign the ports location on the item s front and rear images. This needs to be done once for each model for all item classes. To assign ports: 1. From the Item Detail 1 page (such as IT Items > Device > Detail 1 page), click on the Port Placement button. Use drag-and-drop or the Auto Arrange button to position the port labels at the desired locations on the image of the model. Port labels are assigned to the front and/or rear images. 2. Once the locations are set, click on the Copy to All button to copy the port locations to all items of the same model and that have the same number of ports. 88

97 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Data Connections Use the "05 Connections - Communications" import template to document all communications connections and import them into dctrack. Manually update any remaining data not included in the template. Power Connections Use the "06 Connections - Power" import template to document all power connections to be imported into dctrack. Manually update any remaining data not included in the template. Add and Assign Applications (Optional) Applications may have been discovered and added during SNMP auto-discovery. If they were not discovered, manually add any additional applications from the appropriate device items page in dctrack. Note: These steps are performed in Classic View. To add an application: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > Device. 2. Select the device you want to add the virtual machine to. 3. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 4. Add the application manually or through SNMP. Manually: a. From the Application Name drop-down, select the application to be tracked. b. If the application name does not exist in the list, then switch to Add page mode and select Add New Application Name from the Actions drop-down. The Manage Lists dialog appears. Add the application name and click Save. Switch back to the Edit page mode and go back to the device item in question. Auto-Discovery a. Click the Discovered Applications button. The Apps from SNMP dialog appears. All applications that were auto-discovered via SNMP and are installed on the device item are displayed. If no applications are displayed or the specific application you are looking for is not displayed, run the SNMP process again. b. Select applications to be added. 5. Click Update and then click Close. Test and Verify Once you have completed all necessary data center build steps, test the application and verify the data for completeness and accuracy by using dctrack on a trial basis and incorporating dctrack into your standard data center management processes. 89

98 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Use Case 2: Integrating Power IQ with an Existing dctrack Installation This use case assumes you are an existing dctrack user who is adding Power IQ to your installation. See Important Notes on Importing Data Using the Power IQ Import Wizard (on page 90) before you begin. Important: The steps you must perform to add Power IQ to your dctrack installation vary based on the version of dctrack you are currently using. Refer to the dctrack version-specific instructions provided here. Important Notes on Importing Data Using the Power IQ Import Wizard Following are notes on synching dctrack and Power IQ using the Power IQ Import Wizard in Classic View. Important: Once you begin the import process, data is immediately written to the dctrack database and the process cannot be stopped once it has begun. Before You Begin Raritan recommends you do the following before you begin the process: Make a backup of your database Review the data to be imported, and make sure it is accurate and current Create a rack under the data center in Power IQ. Without this, Power IQ will not be available in the Import Wizard General Information The best practice is do as stated so that the action can be reversed by deleting the session. Sessions are only created if 2 or more items are added at a time. You can import one item at a time but you cannot delete through the wizard only via normal means of deleting unapproved item from item screen As a best practice: First add all racks at the rack level, then import all IT items at the device level. By doing this, you can delete the session if needed. Make sure the import job contains two or more items at the same level. Make sure two or more racks are imported as part of the import job. 90

99 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators dctrack does not rename Power IQ data centers when they are imported into dctrack. dctrack renames racks and items that are added to dctrack from Power IQ. dctrack uses ALL CAPS for item names. Data center names, floors and room names that exceed 20 characters are truncated. For example, Data Center - Headquarters - Somerset, NJ becomes Data Center - Headqu If two items have the same name and exceed 20 characters, the second item is made up of the first 17 characters followed by a number in parenthesis. For example, Cisco MDS 9222i Multiservice Modular Switch becomes CISCO MDS 9222I M(1) All items that are imported are in a New state. Move the items to an Installed by selecting an import session and clicking Approve. If a make and model are not applied to a rack, those racks remain in a New state and cannot be move to Installed until makes and models are mapped to the racks. Power IQ PDU outlets are not imported using the Power IQ Import Wizard. You must add them manually once you have imported all your racks and items. PDU IP addresses are imported using the Power IQ Import Wizard, but IT device IP address and community strings are not imported using the wizard. If a Power IQ PDU or IT device is mapped to a dctrack rack PDU, device, network or probe, the Power IQ item name is used. Timestamp and site are used to indicate individual import jobs. Each import is tracked by timestamp, so it is important to remember what you have done sequentially. dctrack does not display specific changes that occurred for each import. dctrack asks if you want to delete items/racks from both Power IQ and dctrack, or only from dctrack. Import multiple items in one import vs. importing items one at a time. Adding items one at a time is not recommended since if a mistake is made during the process, nothing is imported. Important Maintaining Data Once dctrack and Power IQ are Synched In order to maintain data integrity, once Power IQ and dctrack data are synched, all items must be added and updated in dctrack. Do not add or update items in Power IQ once they are synched with dctrack. dctrack 2.2 Users dctrack 2.2 does not support Power IQ. Call Raritan Technical Support in order to schedule a database upgrade. 91

100 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators dctrack 2.4 Users dctrack 2.4 does not support an upgrade to dctrack 2.6. Follow these steps to move to dctrack 2.6 and integrate it with Power IQ. Back Up Your Database (on page 92) Recreate the dctrack Virtual Machine (on page 92) Load dctrack onto the Virtual Machine (on page 51) Restore Your Database (on page 94) Run the Prerequisite Program (Optional) (on page 52) Initial Configuration of dctrack (on page 53) Import Power IQ Data into dctrack (on page 104) Back Up Your Database To back up your database: 1. In the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. 2. Click Data Backups in the Data Management section. 3. In the Backup Archives box, click Create. The file is created and added at the top of the list. Recreate the dctrack Virtual Machine After you have upgraded to the current version of dctrack and backed up your database, recreate your dctrack virtual machine. See Virtual Machine Recommendations (on page 44) for recommended minimum requirements. Note: The following virtual machine installation steps are an example of a virtual machine installation. Follow your installation preferences if they differ from these. To create the virtual machine: 1. Connect to the VMware server using vsphere client. Log in as a user that has permission to create, start, and stop virtual machines. 2. In the Summary tab, click New Virtual Machine in the Command box. 3. Choose Custom. Click Next. 4. Enter a name for the virtual machine. Click Next. 5. Choose a datastore with at least 160GB of free space available for the VM. Click Next. 6. You may need to select the Virtual Machine Version, depending on your host. Select the version. Click Next. 7. Select Linux for the Guest Operating System, then select Other Linux (32-bit) from the Version drop-down. Click Next. 8. Set the number of virtual processors to 1. Click Next. 92

101 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 9. Adjust the amount of memory allocated for the virtual machine to at least the minimum 4G required. For better performance, increase the amount of allocated memory. Click Next. 10. Set the number of NICs to one or two. If there are two NICs, one can be used for external access to the web interface and the other can be used as a private LAN for communication with the PDUs and other data center devices. In either case, make sure Connect at Power On is checked, and leave all other settings at default. Click Next. 11. Select LSI Logic for the SCSI Controller. Click Next. 12. Select "Create a new virtual disk." Click Next. 13. Set the Disk Capacity 160GB (based on your datastore selection early) and select "Store with the virtual machine". Click Next. 14. Leave all advanced options at default. Click Next. 15. Select the "Edit virtual machine settings before completion" checkbox, then click Continue. The New Virtual Machine - Virtual Machine Properties dialog appears. Select New CD/DVD in the Hardware/Summary panel. In the Device Type section, select the Data Store ISO radio button, then browse and select the datastore containing the ISO file. Click Finish to save drive and return to the main dialog. 16. Click Finish to create the virtual machine. Load dctrack onto the Virtual Machine To load dctrack onto the virtual machine: 1. Select VM and right click Edit Settings. 2. Select Options > Advanced > Boot Options and select Force BIOS Setup. 3. Click "Power on" to power up the virtual machine. 4. Click on "disk" at the top of the console window and select "Connect to ISO image on datastore". 5. Select the datastore 6. Select the dctrack ISO. 7. Click on the Console tab. 8. Click inside console window, 9. Use the Esc key to get to main BIOS page. 10. Exit the BIOS by selecting Exit Discarding Changes and using the Enter key. The dctrack Kickstart page opens. 11. Type 2 for a VMware installation and press Enter to begin installation. 93

102 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 12. When the installation completes, disconnect the ISO disk and press Enter to reboot the dctrack virtual machine. The virtual machine reboots and displays a console prompt. Restore Your Database Once you have recreated your virtual machine, restore your database. Note: Raritan recommends that dctrack users with database backup files that exceed 2G should use either Internet Explorer 9 or Chrome to restore a database. To restore your database: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Data Backups in the Data Management section. The Data Backups page opens. 3. In the Restore a Backup Archive section, click Browse, then select a backup file. 4. Click Upload. dctrack reboots. dctrack is restored to the backup's configuration settings. Run the Prerequisite Program (Optional) When you launch dctrack, the application checks the client to make sure it meets the minimum system requirements. If this is the first time you are using dctrack, you must install the prerequisites program. The prerequisites program installs all of the software required to use dctrack on your local machine. This includes: Microsoft Access 2003 Runtime Microsoft Office file converter pack dctrack shared components PostgreSQL ODBC drivers PostgreSQL ADO drivers To run the prerequisites program: 1. Connect to dctrack using a web browser on any machine on the network. 2. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address assigned to dctrack. For example: 3. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 4. Select Install Prerequisites for Classic View from the Administration menu to download the dctrackprereqs.exe file and save it to your machine. 5. Once the program is downloaded, run the dctrackprereqs.exe by double-clicking on it. 94

103 6. Click Install on the first dialog of the install wizard. Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 7. Optionally, select the 'Set MC Access security mode to low' on the 'Setting MS Access 2003 security mode' dialog. Click Next. Note: If you do not set the Microsoft Access security mode to low, dctrack still works but security warnings are displayed each time you launch dctrack. You must then answer all questions about blocking unsafe expressions with "No". If you set the security mode to low but want to change to a higher level later, see your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security. 8. If you are using Firefox as your browser, you must install the Firefox.NET Framework add-on. Check the 'Install Mozilla Firefox.NET Framework assistant add-on' checkbox and click Next. If you are not using Firefox and are not planning on using it in the future, you do not need to install this add-on. 9. Click Finish on the last dialog. All of the components required to run dctrack are installed. Initial Configuration of dctrack After installing dctrack, you must configure the system for access over the network. To configure the system for access over the network: 1. Access the local port from the Console tab of the VMware Infrastructure Client. 2. When prompted to log in, use the username config and the password raritan. The dctrack configuration page opens. 3. Select Networking Setup, then select Setup LAN 1 to configure the primary Ethernet port. 4. Press the Space bar to select Enable this LAN Port. 5. To manually assign the network settings to dctrack, deselect Use DHCP. Type the IP address, network masks, and gateway into the appropriate fields. If using DHCP, note the address. This must be a DHCP server available on the LAN. 6. Select Accept to reset the network interface with the new values. 7. If you are using a second network interface, select Setup LAN 2 from the Network Configuration menu and configure the secondary Ethernet port in the same manner as the first. Optional 8. Select Ping Network Test to ensure that dctrack can communicate over the network. Optional 9. Setup the Name Servers under Network Configuration. If you do not setup the Name Server, DNS names cannot be resolved. Optional 95

104 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 10. In order to increase the secure access to dctrack, it is advisable to disable SSH remote access to dctrack. To disable SSH remote access to dctrack, select System Services. Deselect Enable SSH. By default, the config account has access to dctrack. SSH is re-enabled if a support connection is created. Optional 11. Select Exit from the main menu. You can now access dctrack from any client on the network. Import Power IQ Data into dctrack dctrack users who are adding Power IQ import data from dctrack to Power IQ in order to synch the two applications. To do this, use the Power IQ wizard in dctrack Classic View. You must be using Power IQ 3.1 Important: In order to maintain data integrity, once Power IQ and dctrack data has been synched, all items must be added and updated in dctrack. Do not add or update items in Power IQ once they are synched with dctrack. To import dctrack into Power IQ data: 1. Log in to Power IQ. 2. In the Settings tab, click ODBC Access in the Data Management section. The ODBC Access page opens. 3. Click Add, then double-click the addresses to enter edit mode and type a Network Address and a Network Mask into the fields. Repeat to add new addresses as needed. Select an address and click Remove to remove authorization from the address. The network address and mask are specified so the client machine where dctrack is running can access the ODBC channel of PowerIQ. So, The range depends on which clients are allowed to access PowerIQ via ODBC. You define the range. If you do not know which clients are using the network address, specify The Network Mask value can be used to specify a single address or a range of addresses. Use netmask to allow access from all IP addresses. 4. Click Save when all authorized addresses have been added. The Power IQ database restarts. 5. After the restart, ODBC compliant applications are allowed to access the database from the authorized IP addresses. 6. Log in to the dctrack Web Client. 7. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 96

105 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 8. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 9. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 10. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 11. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 12. Click Save. 13. Launch Classic View and make sure at least one data center containing at least one rack exists. If at least one data center with at least one rack does not exist, you cannot map items. 14. In Classic View, click Administration > Wizards > Power IQ. 15. Review the information for each step. 16. Click Begin. 17. Proceed through each step of the wizard, adding and mapping Power IQ and dctrack items. Mapping may require you to add makes and models, and/or map similar but not identical information. For example, Power IQ may use the term 'Cisco' and dctrack uses 'Cisco Systems'. These two terms need to be mapped manually. 18. Once the import is completed, select an import session from the Select a Session drop-down, and map any items that are not mapped. 19. Once all data is mapped, click Approve to approve the imported items and add them to dctrack. 20. Delete the import by selecting it from the Select a Session drop-down and clicking Delete. 97

106 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Add Remaining dctrack Items to Power IQ After you have mapped all of the Power IQ items by importing Power IQ data into dctrack, if you were maintaining more items in dctrack than you were maintaining in Power IQ before you integrated the applications, these items must be added to Power IQ after synching the applications using the Power IQ wizard. For example, if you only maintained PDUs in Power IQ for Site A but maintained servers and so on for Site A in dctrack, those additional items must be added to Power IQ. Raritan recommends you perform this step as a best practice to better ensure data integrity. To add remaining dctrack items to Power IQ: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 2. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 3. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 4. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 5. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 6. Click Save. 7. Once you are ready to begin the synch process, click Update Power IQ. A progress bar is displayed throughout the process. The process may take some time to complete depending on the amount of data being imported. 8. Click Cancel at any time to stop the synch process. All of the data up to the point you canceled the synch process is now in Power IQ. The remaining data can be synched at a later time, as needed. A message is displayed at the bottom of the page once the process is complete. 9. Check the Events tab for issues, such as missed items, items that were not mapped, and so on. 98

107 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators dctrack 2.5 Users Follow the steps outlined here if you are a dctrack 2.5 user who is adding Power IQ. See Important Notes on Importing Data Using the Power IQ Import Wizard (on page 90), VM and Client Requirements (on page 44) and Preparing to Install dctrack (on page 43) before you begin. Important: Before you begin an upgrade from dctrack 2.5 to 2.6, you must disable Data Backup Encryption feature in the Security and Encryption section of the Settings page if you have enabled it. See Important - Disable Data Backup Encryption in dctrack 2.5 (on page 99). This use case includes the following steps: Upgrade to the Current Version of dctrack (on page 99) Back Up Your Database (on page 92) Recreate the dctrack Virtual Machine (on page 92) Load dctrack onto the Virtual Machine (on page 51) Restore Your Database (on page 94) Run the Prerequisite Program (Optional) (on page 52) Initial Configuration of dctrack (on page 53) Import Power IQ Data into dctrack (on page 104) Important - Disable Data Backup Encryption in dctrack 2.5 Data backup and encryption is not supported in dctrack 2.6, so the Data Backup Encryption feature is disabled. If you are using the Data Backup Encryption feature in 2.5, disable it before you upgrade to 2.6. If you leave this feature enabled when upgrading to dctrack 2.6 and then back up the 2.6 database, the 2.6 backups are also encrypted. This may cause serious data corruption. To do this disable the Data Backup Encryption feature in dctrack 2.5: 1. On the Settings page, click Data Backup Encryption in the Security and Encryption section. The Backup Security Configuration page opens. 2. Select the No radio button for "Encrypt Backup?". 3. Click Save. Upgrade to the Current Version of dctrack Important: Before you begin an upgrade from dctrack 2.5 to 2.6, you must disable Data Backup Encryption feature in the Security and Encryption section of the Settings page if you have enabled it. 99

108 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Before you install Power IQ, upgrade to the current version of dctrack. To upgrade dctrack: 1. If the Data Backup Encryption feature is enabled in dctrack 2.5, disable it. a. On the Settings page, click Data Backup Encryption in the Security and Encryption section. The Backup Security Configuration page opens. b. Select the No radio button for "Encrypt Backup?". c. Click Save. 2. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 3. Click Software Upgrades in the Appliance Administration section. 4. Click Browse, select the firmware file (usually a *.bin file). 5. Click Upload. The new firmware uploads to dctrack. Back Up Your Database To back up your database: 1. In the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. 2. Click Data Backups in the Data Management section. 3. In the Backup Archives box, click Create. The file is created and added at the top of the list. Recreate the dctrack Virtual Machine After you have upgraded to the current version of dctrack and backed up your database, recreate your dctrack virtual machine. See Virtual Machine Recommendations (on page 44) for recommended minimum requirements. Note: The following virtual machine installation steps are an example of a virtual machine installation. Follow your installation preferences if they differ from these. To create the virtual machine: 1. Connect to the VMware server using vsphere client. Log in as a user that has permission to create, start, and stop virtual machines. 2. In the Summary tab, click New Virtual Machine in the Command box. 3. Choose Custom. Click Next. 4. Enter a name for the virtual machine. Click Next. 5. Choose a datastore with at least 160GB of free space available for the VM. Click Next. 100

109 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 6. You may need to select the Virtual Machine Version, depending on your host. Select the version. Click Next. 7. Select Linux for the Guest Operating System, then select Other Linux (32-bit) from the Version drop-down. Click Next. 8. Set the number of virtual processors to 1. Click Next. 9. Adjust the amount of memory allocated for the virtual machine to at least the minimum 4G required. For better performance, increase the amount of allocated memory. Click Next. 10. Set the number of NICs to one or two. If there are two NICs, one can be used for external access to the web interface and the other can be used as a private LAN for communication with the PDUs and other data center devices. In either case, make sure Connect at Power On is checked, and leave all other settings at default. Click Next. 11. Select LSI Logic for the SCSI Controller. Click Next. 12. Select "Create a new virtual disk." Click Next. 13. Set the Disk Capacity 160GB (based on your datastore selection early) and select "Store with the virtual machine". Click Next. 14. Leave all advanced options at default. Click Next. 15. Select the "Edit virtual machine settings before completion" checkbox, then click Continue. The New Virtual Machine - Virtual Machine Properties dialog appears. Select New CD/DVD in the Hardware/Summary panel. In the Device Type section, select the Data Store ISO radio button, then browse and select the datastore containing the ISO file. Click Finish to save drive and return to the main dialog. 16. Click Finish to create the virtual machine. Load dctrack onto the Virtual Machine To load dctrack onto the virtual machine: 1. Select VM and right click Edit Settings. 2. Select Options > Advanced > Boot Options and select Force BIOS Setup. 3. Click "Power on" to power up the virtual machine. 4. Click on "disk" at the top of the console window and select "Connect to ISO image on datastore". 5. Select the datastore 6. Select the dctrack ISO. 7. Click on the Console tab. 8. Click inside console window, 9. Use the Esc key to get to main BIOS page. 101

110 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 10. Exit the BIOS by selecting Exit Discarding Changes and using the Enter key. The dctrack Kickstart page opens. 11. Type 2 for a VMware installation and press Enter to begin installation. 12. When the installation completes, disconnect the ISO disk and press Enter to reboot the dctrack virtual machine. The virtual machine reboots and displays a console prompt. Restore Your Database Once you have recreated your virtual machine, restore your database. Note: Raritan recommends that dctrack users with database backup files that exceed 2G should use either Internet Explorer 9 or Chrome to restore a database. To restore your database: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Data Backups in the Data Management section. The Data Backups page opens. 3. In the Restore a Backup Archive section, click Browse, then select a backup file. 4. Click Upload. dctrack reboots. dctrack is restored to the backup's configuration settings. Run the Prerequisite Program (Optional) When you launch dctrack, the application checks the client to make sure it meets the minimum system requirements. If this is the first time you are using dctrack, you must install the prerequisites program. The prerequisites program installs all of the software required to use dctrack on your local machine. This includes: Microsoft Access 2003 Runtime Microsoft Office file converter pack dctrack shared components PostgreSQL ODBC drivers PostgreSQL ADO drivers To run the prerequisites program: 1. Connect to dctrack using a web browser on any machine on the network. 2. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address assigned to dctrack. For example: 3. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 102

111 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 4. Select Install Prerequisites for Classic View from the Administration menu to download the dctrackprereqs.exe file and save it to your machine. 5. Once the program is downloaded, run the dctrackprereqs.exe by double-clicking on it. 6. Click Install on the first dialog of the install wizard. 7. Optionally, select the 'Set MC Access security mode to low' on the 'Setting MS Access 2003 security mode' dialog. Click Next. Note: If you do not set the Microsoft Access security mode to low, dctrack still works but security warnings are displayed each time you launch dctrack. You must then answer all questions about blocking unsafe expressions with "No". If you set the security mode to low but want to change to a higher level later, see your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security. 8. If you are using Firefox as your browser, you must install the Firefox.NET Framework add-on. Check the 'Install Mozilla Firefox.NET Framework assistant add-on' checkbox and click Next. If you are not using Firefox and are not planning on using it in the future, you do not need to install this add-on. 9. Click Finish on the last dialog. All of the components required to run dctrack are installed. Initial Configuration of dctrack After installing dctrack, you must configure the system for access over the network. To configure the system for access over the network: 1. Access the local port from the Console tab of the VMware Infrastructure Client. 2. When prompted to log in, use the username config and the password raritan. The dctrack configuration page opens. 3. Select Networking Setup, then select Setup LAN 1 to configure the primary Ethernet port. 4. Press the Space bar to select Enable this LAN Port. 5. To manually assign the network settings to dctrack, deselect Use DHCP. Type the IP address, network masks, and gateway into the appropriate fields. If using DHCP, note the address. This must be a DHCP server available on the LAN. 6. Select Accept to reset the network interface with the new values. 7. If you are using a second network interface, select Setup LAN 2 from the Network Configuration menu and configure the secondary Ethernet port in the same manner as the first. Optional 103

112 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 8. Select Ping Network Test to ensure that dctrack can communicate over the network. Optional 9. Setup the Name Servers under Network Configuration. If you do not setup the Name Server, DNS names cannot be resolved. Optional 10. In order to increase the secure access to dctrack, it is advisable to disable SSH remote access to dctrack. To disable SSH remote access to dctrack, select System Services. Deselect Enable SSH. By default, the config account has access to dctrack. SSH is re-enabled if a support connection is created. Optional 11. Select Exit from the main menu. You can now access dctrack from any client on the network. Import Power IQ Data into dctrack dctrack users who are adding Power IQ import data from dctrack to Power IQ in order to synch the two applications. To do this, use the Power IQ wizard in dctrack Classic View. You must be using Power IQ 3.1 Important: In order to maintain data integrity, once Power IQ and dctrack data has been synched, all items must be added and updated in dctrack. Do not add or update items in Power IQ once they are synched with dctrack. To import dctrack into Power IQ data: 1. Log in to Power IQ. 2. In the Settings tab, click ODBC Access in the Data Management section. The ODBC Access page opens. 3. Click Add, then double-click the addresses to enter edit mode and type a Network Address and a Network Mask into the fields. Repeat to add new addresses as needed. Select an address and click Remove to remove authorization from the address. The Network Mask value can be used to specify a single address or a range of addresses. Use netmask to allow access from all IP addresses. 4. Click Save when all authorized addresses have been added. The Power IQ database restarts. After the restart, ODBC compliant applications are allowed to access the database from the authorized IP addresses. 5. Log in to the dctrack Web Client. 6. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 7. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 104

113 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 8. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 9. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 10. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 11. Click Save. 12. In Classic View, click Administration > Wizards > Power IQ. 13. Review the information for each step. 14. Click Begin. 15. Proceed through each step of the wizard, adding and mapping Power IQ and dctrack items. Mapping may require you to add makes and models, and/or map similar but not identical information. For example, Power IQ may use the term 'Cisco' and dctrack uses 'Cisco Systems'. These two terms need to be mapped manually. 16. Once the import is completed, select an import session from the Select a Session drop-down, and map any items that are not mapped. 17. Once all data is mapped, click Approve to approve the imported items and add them to dctrack. 18. Delete the import by selecting it from the Select a Session drop-down and clicking Delete. Add Remaining dctrack Items to Power IQ After you have mapped all of the Power IQ items by importing Power IQ data into dctrack, if you were maintaining more items in dctrack than you were maintaining in Power IQ before you integrated the applications, these items must be added to Power IQ after synching the applications using the Power IQ wizard. For example, if you only maintained PDUs in Power IQ for Site A but maintained servers and so on for Site A in dctrack, those additional items must be added to Power IQ. Raritan recommends you perform this step as a best practice to better ensure data integrity. To add remaining dctrack items to Power IQ: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 2. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 105

114 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 3. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 4. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 5. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 6. Click Save. 7. Once you are ready to begin the synch process, click Update Power IQ. A progress bar is displayed throughout the process. The process may take some time to complete depending on the amount of data being imported. 8. Click Cancel at any time to stop the synch process. All of the data up to the point you canceled the synch process is now in Power IQ. The remaining data can be synched at a later time, as needed. A message is displayed at the bottom of the page once the process is complete. 9. Check the Events tab for issues, such as missed items, items that were not mapped, and so on. Use Case 3: Integrating dctrack with an Existing Power IQ Installation This use case assumes you are currently a Power IQ user that is adding dctrack to your installation. You must be using Power IQ 3.1 or higher, and must integrate with dctrack 2.6. See VM and Client Requirements (on page 44) and Preparing to Install dctrack (on page 43) before you begin. This use case includes the following steps: Create the dctrack Virtual Machine (on page 50) Load dctrack onto the Virtual Machine (on page 51) Run the Prerequisite Program (see "Run the Prerequisite Program (Optional)" on page 52) Initial Configuration of dctrack (on page 53) Perform Post Installation Steps (on page 54) Synch dctrack and Power IQ Data (on page 117) Important Maintaining Data Once dctrack and Power IQ are Synched In order to maintain data integrity, once Power IQ and dctrack data are synched, all items must be added and updated in dctrack. Do not add or update items in Power IQ once they are synched with dctrack. 106

115 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Back Up Your Database To back up your database: 1. In the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. 2. Click Data Backups in the Data Management section. 3. In the Backup Archives box, click Create. The file is created and added at the top of the list. Upgrade to the Current Version of Power IQ Before you integrate dctrack and Power IQ, upgrade to the current version of Power IQ. To upgrade Power IQ: 1. Log in to Power IQ. 2. In the Settings tab, click Software Upgrades in the Appliance Administration section. The Upgrade page opens. 3. Click Browse, select the firmware file (usually a *.bin file). 4. Click Upload. The new firmware uploads to dctrack. Create the dctrack Virtual Machine Note: The following virtual machine installation steps are an example of a virtual machine installation. Follow your installation preferences if they differ from these. To create the virtual machine: 1. Connect to the VMware server using vsphere client. Log in as a user that has permission to create, start, and stop virtual machines. 2. In the Summary tab, click New Virtual Machine in the Command box. 3. Choose Custom. Click Next. 4. Enter a name for the virtual machine. Click Next. 5. Choose a datastore with at least 160GB of free space available for the VM. Click Next. 6. You may need to select the Virtual Machine Version, depending on your host. Select the version. Click Next. 7. Select Linux for the Guest Operating System, then select Other Linux (32-bit) from the Version drop-down. Click Next. 8. Set the number of virtual processors to 1. Click Next. 9. Adjust the amount of memory allocated for the virtual machine to at least the minimum 4G required. For better performance, increase the amount of allocated memory. Click Next. 107

116 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 10. Set the number of NICs to one or two. If there are two NICs, one can be used for external access to the web interface and the other can be used as a private LAN for communication with the PDUs and other data center devices. In either case, make sure Connect at Power On is checked, and leave all other settings at default. Click Next. 11. Select LSI Logic for the SCSI Controller. Click Next. 12. Select "Create a new virtual disk." Click Next. 13. Set the Disk Capacity 160GB (based on your datastore selection early) and select "Store with the virtual machine". Click Next. 14. Leave all advanced options at default. Click Next. 15. Select the "Edit virtual machine settings before completion" checkbox, then click Continue. The New Virtual Machine - Virtual Machine Properties dialog appears. Select New CD/DVD in the Hardware/Summary panel. In the Device Type section, select the Data Store ISO radio button, then browse and select the datastore containing the ISO file. Click Finish to save drive and return to the main dialog. 16. Click Finish to create the virtual machine. Load dctrack onto the Virtual Machine To load dctrack onto the virtual machine: 1. Select VM and right click Edit Settings. 2. Select Options > Advanced > Boot Options and select Force BIOS Setup. 3. Click "Power on" to power up the virtual machine. 4. Click on "disk" at the top of the console window and select "Connect to ISO image on datastore". 5. Select the datastore 6. Select the dctrack ISO. 7. Click on the Console tab. 8. Click inside console window, 9. Use the Esc key to get to main BIOS page. 10. Exit the BIOS by selecting Exit Discarding Changes and using the Enter key. The dctrack Kickstart page opens. 11. Type 2 for a VMware installation and press Enter to begin installation. 12. When the installation completes, disconnect the ISO disk and press Enter to reboot the dctrack virtual machine. The virtual machine reboots and displays a console prompt. 108

117 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Run the Prerequisite Program (Optional) When you launch dctrack, the application checks the client to make sure it meets the minimum system requirements. If this is the first time you are using dctrack, you must install the prerequisites program. The prerequisites program installs all of the software required to use dctrack on your local machine. This includes: Microsoft Access 2003 Runtime Microsoft Office file converter pack dctrack shared components PostgreSQL ODBC drivers PostgreSQL ADO drivers To run the prerequisites program: 1. Connect to dctrack using a web browser on any machine on the network. 2. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address assigned to dctrack. For example: 3. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 4. Select Install Prerequisites for Classic View from the Administration menu to download the dctrackprereqs.exe file and save it to your machine. 5. Once the program is downloaded, run the dctrackprereqs.exe by double-clicking on it. 6. Click Install on the first dialog of the install wizard. 7. Optionally, select the 'Set MC Access security mode to low' on the 'Setting MS Access 2003 security mode' dialog. Click Next. Note: If you do not set the Microsoft Access security mode to low, dctrack still works but security warnings are displayed each time you launch dctrack. You must then answer all questions about blocking unsafe expressions with "No". If you set the security mode to low but want to change to a higher level later, see your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security. 8. If you are using Firefox as your browser, you must install the Firefox.NET Framework add-on. Check the 'Install Mozilla Firefox.NET Framework assistant add-on' checkbox and click Next. If you are not using Firefox and are not planning on using it in the future, you do not need to install this add-on. 9. Click Finish on the last dialog. All of the components required to run dctrack are installed. 109

118 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Initial Configuration of dctrack After installing dctrack, you must configure the system for access over the network. To configure the system for access over the network: 1. Access the local port from the Console tab of the VMware Infrastructure Client. 2. When prompted to log in, use the username config and the password raritan. The dctrack configuration page opens. 3. Select Networking Setup, then select Setup LAN 1 to configure the primary Ethernet port. 4. Press the Space bar to select Enable this LAN Port. 5. To manually assign the network settings to dctrack, deselect Use DHCP. Type the IP address, network masks, and gateway into the appropriate fields. If using DHCP, note the address. This must be a DHCP server available on the LAN. 6. Select Accept to reset the network interface with the new values. 7. If you are using a second network interface, select Setup LAN 2 from the Network Configuration menu and configure the secondary Ethernet port in the same manner as the first. Optional 8. Select Ping Network Test to ensure that dctrack can communicate over the network. Optional 9. Setup the Name Servers under Network Configuration. If you do not setup the Name Server, DNS names cannot be resolved. Optional 10. In order to increase the secure access to dctrack, it is advisable to disable SSH remote access to dctrack. To disable SSH remote access to dctrack, select System Services. Deselect Enable SSH. By default, the config account has access to dctrack. SSH is re-enabled if a support connection is created. Optional 11. Select Exit from the main menu. You can now access dctrack from any client on the network. Perform Post Installation Steps Once you are done installing dctrack, perform the following post installation steps: Log In to dctrack for the First Time (on page 54) Add a License (on page 40) Change the Administrator Password (on page 42) Configure the System Clock (on page 59) Configure NTP Server Settings (on page 60) 110

119 Log In to dctrack for the First Time Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators dctrack supports the Windows 7 and Windows XP operating systems, as well as the Internet Explorer and Firefox browsers. If you are using Firefox running on the Windows 7 operating system, additional steps must be taken the first time you log in. See Firefox Users (on page 55). The first time you log in to dctrack, you download dctrack licenses. The steps outlined in this section walk you through the license installation. See Licensing (on page 39)for more license details. This information covers logging in to dctrack for the first time. Once all licenses and necessary add-ons are installed, the majority of steps do not need to be repeated. See Log In and Log Off (on page 39) for information on logging in to dctrack after the initial log in. Internet Explorer Users To log in using Internet Explorer: 1. Connect to dctrack using a web browser. 2. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address or name assigned to dctrack. 3. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 4. The first time you access dctrack, the Licensing page opens. Log in to the page. a. Click Add, then select your dctrack license file. Licenses are.lic files. Repeat this step to add incremental licenses if needed. Note: Your license file can be retrieved from the Raritan web site after you have activated your registration. To activate your registration, click the link in the "Thank you for registering" from Raritan and create your user account. Once you create your account, look for a "Your Raritan software license key is available" containing a link to your license file download page. b. Click Continue. If you see error messages and the Continue button is disabled, contact Raritan Technical Support. There may be a problem with your license file. c. Select Yes to the End User License Agreement and click Submit. 5. Log in to dctrack with the default username admin and password raritan. The dctrack dashboard opens. Note: For security reasons, be sure to change the admin password. See Change the Administrator Password (on page 42). 6. Click the Classic View link in the dctrack Web Client to open Classic View. You must have local administrator rights on the client machine in order to run and properly install the Classic View prerequisites. To install prerequisites, do one of the following: 111

120 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators If you have.net 3.5 components installed, clicking the Classic View link launches dctrack Classic View and no other steps are needed. Begin using the application. If the components are not found, dctrack walks you through the install (see steps below). Note: The.NET 3.5 component is built into the Windows 7 operating system, so dctrack launches without needing to install any components. If.NET 3.5 components are not installed, clicking Classic View displays a message letting you know. Install the.net components by following the wizard that is launched when you click Classic View or by clicking Administration > Install Classic View Prerequisites. a. Click Install on the first dialog of the install wizard. b. Optionally, select the "Set MS Access security mode to low" on the "Setting MS Access 2003 security mode" dialog. Click Next. Note: If you do not set the Microsoft Access security mode to low, dctrack still works but you see security warnings each time you launch dctrack. You must then answer 'No' to all questions about blocking unsafe expressions. If you set the security mode to low but want to change to a higher level later, see your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security. c. Click Finish on the last dialog. All of the components required to run dctrack are installed. Firefox Users To log in using Firefox as your browser: 1. If you are a Firefox user running the Windows 7 operating system, if Firefox.NET Assistant has not already been installed, set the Windows 7 User Account Control to Never Notify and restart Windows 7. See your Windows Help for information on changing this setting. 2. Connect to dctrack using a web browser. 3. In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address or name assigned to dctrack. 4. Answer yes to any security alerts and accept all certificates. 5. The first time you access dctrack, the Licensing page opens. Log in to the page. a. Click Add, then select your dctrack license file. Licenses are.lic files. Repeat this step to add incremental licenses if needed. 112

121 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Note: Your license file can be retrieved from the Raritan web site after you have activated your registration. To activate your registration, click the link in the "Thank you for registering" from Raritan and create your user account. Once you create your account, look for a "Your Raritan software license key is available" containing a link to your license file download page. b. Click Continue. If you see error messages and the Continue button is disabled, contact Raritan Technical Support. There may be a problem with your license file. c. Select Yes to the End User License Agreement and click Submit. 6. Firefox users running the Windows 7 operating system, restart Firefox and then reconnect to dctrack via its IP address. 7. Log in to dctrack with the default username admin and password raritan. The dctrack dashboard opens. Note: For security reasons, be sure to change the admin password. See Change the Administrator Password (on page 42). 8. Click the Classic View link in the dctrack Web Client to open Classic View. You must have local administrator rights on the client machine in order to run and properly install the Classic View prerequisites. To install prerequisites, do one of the following: If you have.net 3.5 components installed, clicking the Classic View link launches dctrack Classic View and no other steps are needed. Begin using the application. If the components are not found, dctrack walks you through the install (see steps below). Note: The.NET 3.5 component is built into the Windows 7 operating system, so dctrack launches without needing to install any components. If.NET 3.5 components are not installed, clicking Classic View displays a message letting you know. Install the.net components by following the wizard that is launched when you click Classic View or by clicking Administration > Install Classic View Prerequisites. a. Click Install on the first dialog of the install wizard. b. Optionally, select the "Set MS Access security mode to low" on the "Setting MS Access 2003 security mode" dialog. Click Next. Note: If you do not set the Microsoft Access security mode to low, dctrack still works but you see security warnings each time you launch dctrack. You must then answer 'No' to all questions about blocking unsafe expressions. If you set the security mode to low but want to change to a higher level later, see your Microsoft Access documentation on how to set Macro Security. 113

122 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators c. Click Finish on the last dialog. All of the components required to run dctrack are installed. 9. To complete the installation, do one of the following: If you are using Firefox on a Windows XP client, close and then reopen the browser to complete the installation. Log back in and launch dctrack. Firefox users running the Windows operating system, reset the User Account Control to its previous setting and reboot. Log back in and launch dctrack. Licensing dctrack is licensed based on the number of cabinets maintained by the application. Contact Raritan Sales for additional information. Add a License Licenses are added in the dctrack Web Client. If this is your first time logging in and you need to add a license file, see Log In to dctrack for the First Time (on page 54). Once you add a license file and log in for the first time, you can follow the instructions in this topic to add or remove license files as needed. To add a license file: 1. Click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Product Licensing in the Application Administration panel. 3. Click Add in the Licenses section. 4. Use the browse function to locate and add the license file. Licenses are.lic files. Repeat this step to add incremental licenses if needed. Note: Your license file can be retrieved from the Raritan web site after you have activated your registration. To activate your registration, click the link in the "Thank you for registering" from Raritan and create your user account. Once you create your account, look for a "Your Raritan software license key is available" containing a link to your license file download page. 5. If you see error messages AND you're unable to use dctrack or to add the total licensed number of cabinets, contact Raritan Technical Support. There may be a problem with your license file. 114

123 View Licenses Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators The licenses that you have uploaded to dctrack are available to view from either the dctrack Web Client or Classic View. Web Client Administrators can view and add dctrack licenses from the dctrack Web Client. To view licenses from the dctrack Web Client: 1. Click Administration > Settings to open the Settings page in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Product Licensing in the Appliance Administration panel. Licensing Summary contains information about how many cabinets your combined licenses allow you to add to dctrack. Customer Name Cabinet license capacity Cabinet licenses available Your company name. The total number of cabinets allowed by all your licenses. The number of cabinets remaining that you are allowed to add. The Licenses list contains all license files that you have uploaded to dctrack. Feature Type Count Licensee Classic View The feature that is allowed by this license. Initial: A required license to activate dctrack and set the initial cabinet capacity allowed. Incremental: A secondary license type that allows you to add to the initial license's cabinet capacity. The number of cabinets that you can add to dctrack under this license. Your company name. In dctrack Classic View, license information is available on the splash screen and in the dashboard at the bottom of the page. The splash screen provides a quick summary of licensed cabinets and total number of ports. It also provides a summary of the items, comm ports, power ports, and sensors associated with each cabinet. 115

124 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Change the Administrator Password The administrator password can only be changed by the administrator. It is important to change the default administrator account password as soon as possible. This helps prevent unauthorized administrator access to dctrack. To change the administrator password: 1. Select Administration > Settings to open the Settings window in a secondary browser. 2. Click User Accounts in the Authorization and Authentication panel. The Users page opens. 3. Click on the admin user. 4. Click Change Password on the "User Information for ADMIN" page. 5. Type a new password for the admin account in the Password field, then type it again in the Confirm Password field. 6. Click Save. Configure the System Clock dctrack uses the system clock to time-stamp events. Set the system clock as soon as possible to keep an accurate record of events. Using an NTP server is recommended to keep the system clock synchronized. Note: These steps are performed in the dctrack Web Client. To set the system clock: 1. Select Administration > Settings to open the Settings page in a secondary browser window. 2. Click the Time Settings link in the Appliance Administration panel. 3. Update each time setting as needed. Click Save. See Configure NTP Server Settings (on page 60) for additional time setting information. 116

125 Configure NTP Server Settings Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators NTP must be enabled before you can configure NTP server settings. The Configure Time Servers table lists the NTP servers the dctrack appliance contacts to get date and time information. The dctrack appliance attempts to retrieve the date and time from the first server on the list. If this attempt fails, it proceeds down the list and attempts to contact the second server, then the third, and so on. Note: The dctrack appliance uses NTP. The dctrack application does not. Note: These steps are performed in the dctrack Web Client. To enable NTP and configure NTP servers: 1. Select Administration > Settings to open the Settings page in a secondary browser window. 2. Click the Time Settings link in the Appliance Administration panel. 3. Select Yes in the Enable NTP drop-down and click Save. 4. Click Manage Time Servers to configure settings for the NTP servers. 5. Click Add. 6. Type the time server's IP address or DNS name in the Time Server field. If you are using the DNS name, it must be configured via the console. 7. Click Save Changes. Synch dctrack and Power IQ Data This process imports dctrack data into Power IQ. At a minimum, racks must exist in Power IQ to map data between Power IQ and dctrack. Power IQ does not track the make and model of racks. Since dctrack does track this information, the wizard prompts you to manually map the make and model of each item. If you have a large number of devices to import into Power IQ, mapping each item's make and model using the Power IQ Wizard may be time consuming. Raritan recommends the following steps to reduce the amount of mapping required: 1. Create a spreadsheet of your Power IQ items using a dctrack Import Wizard template. See Import Wizard Templates (on page 192) 2. Map the makes and models of your Power IQ items in the spreadsheet. See Data Formatting Requirements (on page 192) 3. Use the Import Wizard to import the mapped items into dctrack. See Importing Data (on page 121) 117

126 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 4. Click Update Power IQ in the Power IQ Wizard to import your dctrack items into Power IQ To import dctrack data into Power IQ: 1. Log in to dctrack. 2. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 3. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 4. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 5. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 6. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 7. Click Save. 8. Click the Classic View link to open Classic View. 9. In Classic View, click Administration > Wizards > Power IQ. 10. Review the information for each step. 11. Click Begin. 12. Proceed through each step of the wizard, adding and mapping Power IQ and dctrack items. Mapping may require you to add makes and models, and/or map similar but not identical information. For example, Power IQ may use the term 'Cisco' and dctrack uses 'Cisco Systems'. These two terms need to be mapped manually. 13. Once the import is completed, select an import session from the Select a Session drop-down, and map any items that are not mapped. 14. Once all data is mapped, click Approve to approve the imported items and add them to dctrack. 15. Delete the import by selecting it from the Select a Session drop-down and clicking Delete. 118

127 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Use Case 4: Integrating an Existing dctrack Installation with an Existing Power IQ Installation This use case assumes you are currently using dctrack 2.6 and Power IQ 3.1 or higher as separate applications, and are now integrating the two. Integrate the two applications using the Power IQ Import wizard accessed in Classic View. This ensures each level of the Power IQ data model is mapped to the dctrack model. See dctrack Data Model (on page 47) and Power IQ Data Model (on page 48) for more information on each data model. Before you begin: Review VM and Client Requirements (on page 44) and Preparing to Install dctrack (on page 43) Upgrade to the latest versions of Power IQ and dctrack Back up the Power IQ and dctrack databases Ensure that at a minimum Power IQ contains racks This use case includes the following steps: Back Up Your Database (on page 92) Upgrade to the Current Versions of dctrack and Power IQ (see "Upgrade to the Current Version of Power IQ" on page 107) Upgrade to the Current Version of Power IQ (on page 107) Add Remaining dctrack Items to Power IQ (on page 98) Once the dctrack data is imported into Power IQ, if dctrack contains more items (devices) than were being maintained in Power IQ, use the Power IQ Integration function to fully synch the applications. Important Maintaining Data Once dctrack and Power IQ are Synched In order to maintain data integrity, once Power IQ and dctrack data are synched, all items must be added and updated in dctrack. Do not add or update items in Power IQ once they are synched with dctrack. Back Up Your Database To back up your database: 1. In the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. 2. Click Data Backups in the Data Management section. 3. In the Backup Archives box, click Create. The file is created and added at the top of the list. 119

128 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Upgrade to the Current Version of Power IQ Before you integrate dctrack and Power IQ, upgrade to the current version of Power IQ. To upgrade Power IQ: 1. Log in to Power IQ. 2. In the Settings tab, click Software Upgrades in the Appliance Administration section. The Upgrade page opens. 3. Click Browse, select the firmware file (usually a *.bin file). 4. Click Upload. The new firmware uploads to dctrack. Synch dctrack and Power IQ Data This process imports dctrack data into Power IQ. At a minimum, racks must exist in Power IQ to map data between Power IQ and dctrack. Power IQ does not track the make and model of racks. Since dctrack does track this information, the wizard prompts you to manually map the make and model of each item. If you have a large number of devices to import into Power IQ, mapping each item's make and model using the Power IQ Wizard may be time consuming. Raritan recommends the following steps to reduce the amount of mapping required: 1. Create a spreadsheet of your Power IQ items using a dctrack Import Wizard template. See Import Wizard Templates (on page 192) 2. Map the makes and models of your Power IQ items in the spreadsheet. See Data Formatting Requirements (on page 192) 3. Use the Import Wizard to import the mapped items into dctrack. See Importing Data (on page 121) 4. Click Update Power IQ in the Power IQ Wizard to import your dctrack items into Power IQ To import dctrack data into Power IQ: 1. Log in to dctrack. 2. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 3. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 4. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 120

129 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 5. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 6. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 7. Click Save. 8. Click the Classic View link to open Classic View. 9. In Classic View, click Administration > Wizards > Power IQ. 10. Review the information for each step. 11. Click Begin. 12. Proceed through each step of the wizard, adding and mapping Power IQ and dctrack items. Mapping may require you to add makes and models, and/or map similar but not identical information. For example, Power IQ may use the term 'Cisco' and dctrack uses 'Cisco Systems'. These two terms need to be mapped manually. 13. Once the import is completed, select an import session from the Select a Session drop-down, and map any items that are not mapped. 14. Once all data is mapped, click Approve to approve the imported items and add them to dctrack. 15. Delete the import by selecting it from the Select a Session drop-down and clicking Delete. Importing Data Some fields are mandatory in dctrack. During the import process, dctrack prompts you to either add these fields to the source spreadsheet or to map them to existing cells in the source spreadsheet. You must either map or skip each field in order to move on to the next step of the Import Wizard. If corrections are needed, you can go back in the import process by pressing the Back button and moving one filed at a time. To import data from a spreadsheet or CSV file into dctrack: 1. Select Administration > Wizards > Import. 2. In the "Select a file to import from" section of the page, click Browse. Locate the source file and click Open in the "Select a file to import" dialog. Click Next. 3. In the Import Wizards section, select the type of import - Items with Ports as Quantities, Comm Circuits or Power Circuits. 4. From the Import all Items to this Site drop-down, select the site you are importing the data for. Click Next. 121

130 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators The data from the spreadsheet is displayed in the data table at the top of the page and each column, along with the dctrack field it is mapped to, is displayed in the field match panel at the bottom left of the page. If dctrack has successfully mapped each of the spreadsheet column headings to a field in dctrack, the "You've successfully mapped this field! Click Next." message is displayed at the bottom of the page. Additionally, all of the field values are listed in the "Available values in dctrack for field" box in the import panel on the bottom left of the page. Click Next. If dctrack could not map a spreadsheet column heading to a dctrack field, you must do one of the following: a. Skip the field by selecting the "Skip column" checkbox. OR b. Manually select and map the fields to a dctrack field listed in the "Map to dctrack field" drop-down. Use the Add function to add the field or Map to map the field. dctrack prompts you to enter related information for each field. Required information is indicated by a red asterisk (*). You are able select multiple items (with the exception of Models) using Ctrl and/or Shift. 5. After the last field is matched or mapped, click Next to open the data validation page. Click Validate to begin the process. Note: Large imports and/or use of hardware with specifications below the minimally recommended specifications can result in a processing time of up to several minutes. During validation, the format and integrity of the data is verified. Any rows (records) that do not meet the import criteria are displayed in the import panel of the page along with the specific reason for the validation failure. You can make corrections to data directly in the data table at the top of the page. To do this, first move back one column from the column you want to make changes to and then make changes. Once the changes are made, click Next to move forward until you reach the Validation page again. You can move back using the Back button, or you can click on the column name in the list of columns to the left. If the amount of conflicts and thus the corrections are involved, If the number of conflicts in need of correction is long, click the "Pop up Problems List" button to open a new window containing the list of conflicts in order to keep the information visible while you move back to the columns that require corrections. 6. Once data validation is complete and no more conflicts are displayed click Next > to open the Import page. 122

131 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 7. Before you begin the final import, it is recommended that you export the validated data to a new or existing spreadsheet using the Save As button so you have a copy of the most current version of the data. 8. Click on the Import button to begin the import process. The progress of the import as it happens is displayed on the page. You can stop the import at any time by pressing the Cancel button. Records imported up to the point before you canceled the process are retained in the database. At the end of the import process, a status message is displayed. For all records that are imported successfully, the time, date and other parameters of the import are saved as a separate import session in the Completed Import Session drop-down for future reference and additional functions. 9. Once the import is complete, all items are marked as New and are located on the respective item pages. You are advised to go to the item detail pages for each imported item in order to review and, if necessarily, revise or adjust imported items. All import sessions are contained in the Select an Import Session drop-down and can be referenced from there in the future. Note: In order for an import session to appear in the Select an Import Session drop-down, more than one record must imported as part of the session. Add Remaining dctrack Items to Power IQ After you have mapped all of the Power IQ items by importing Power IQ data into dctrack, if you were maintaining more items in dctrack than you were maintaining in Power IQ before you integrated the applications, these items must be added to Power IQ after synching the applications using the Power IQ wizard. For example, if you only maintained PDUs in Power IQ for Site A but maintained servers and so on for Site A in dctrack, those additional items must be added to Power IQ. Raritan recommends you perform this step as a best practice to better ensure data integrity. To add remaining dctrack items to Power IQ: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 2. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 3. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 4. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. 123

132 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 5. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 6. Click Save. 7. Once you are ready to begin the synch process, click Update Power IQ. A progress bar is displayed throughout the process. The process may take some time to complete depending on the amount of data being imported. 8. Click Cancel at any time to stop the synch process. All of the data up to the point you canceled the synch process is now in Power IQ. The remaining data can be synched at a later time, as needed. A message is displayed at the bottom of the page once the process is complete. 9. Check the Events tab for issues, such as missed items, items that were not mapped, and so on. Create Users Once you are ready to deploy dctrack to users, you must add them to the application. The level of access each user has to dctrack functions is based on the access level they are assigned when they are created. Access levels are default "roles" that cannot be edited. Roles and Privileges The roles and access levels described here are defaults and cannot be changed. Site Administrator The site administrator is responsible for installing and configuring dctrack, including creating users. They have permission to do every action in dctrack, no exceptions. The Site Administrators group is assigned this role by default, and contains the Admin user. This role is specific to the installation and configuration of dctrack and, in most cases, is separate from that of the Gatekeeper. 124

133 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Gatekeeper The Gatekeeper is responsible for user and team management, data center change management and keeping the data in dctrack in sync with actual conditions in the data center. The Gatekeeper can: Edit all items and connections, including "cleaning" data Approve, reject, mark as complete or archive requests Issue work orders, mark them as complete and archive them Update drop-downs Manage teams Mange the Models Library and import updates from Raritan Import and export data Manager Managers can view, add and edit items and connections so long as the team they belong to is listed under the Admin Team field for the currently selected item or if the Admin Team field is blank, in which case anyone except users with an access level of Viewer can make changes. A red lock icon is displayed when the current selected item is not editable. Member Members can view, add and edit items and connections so long as their name is listed under the System Admin field for the currently selected item or if the Admin Team field is blank, in which case anyone except users with an access level of Viewer can make changes. A red lock icon is displayed when the current selected item is not editable. Viewer Users with Viewer level access are able to access pages but cannot make changes to the data. Viewers can also access and view reports that can then be printed, and they have access to the Web Client Dashboard. Edit Privileges by Role The following restrictions exist for editing an item: If... The System Admin field is blank and the Admin Team field is blank... then... any user, with the exception of users with Viewer access, is allowed to make edits. 125

134 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators If... The System Admin field is blank and the Admin Team field is specified... The System Admin field is specified and the Admin Team is blank... The System Admin and the Admin Team fields are specified... then... any user who is a Member of the team listed in the Admin Team is allowed to make edits. only the System Admin user is allowed to make edits. only the user listed in the System Admin or the Manager of the team listed in the Admin Team can make edits Regardless of these rights, no edits can made to an item after the item request has been approved and until the item request is completed. The following chart summarizes all possible edit scenarios using user XYZ and Team as example names and teams. Username User's team User's access level Item's system admin Item's admin team XYZ Any or blank Viewer Any or blank Any or blank Can edit? XYZ Any Member Blank Blank Yes XYZ Any Member ABC Any or blank XYZ Any Member XYZ Any or blank No No Yes XYZ Team1 Member Blank Team1 Yes XYZ Team1 Member Blank Team2 No XYZ Team1 Manager Blank Blank Yes XYZ Any Manager XYZ Any or blank Yes XYZ Team1 Manager ABC Team1 Yes XYZ Team1 Manager ABC Team2 No XYZ Team1 Manager Blank Team1 Yes XYZ Team1 Manager Blank Team2 No XYZ Any Gatekeeper Any or blank Any or blank Yes 126

135 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Username User's team User's access level Item's system admin Item's admin team Any Any Any A request for the item is approved but not completed. Can edit? No Add, Edit and Delete Users User accounts are added, edited and deleted in the dctrack Web Client. You must have Site Administrator privileges to perform these tasks. Teams, which users are assigned to, are managed in the Classic View. See User Management in Classic View (on page 184). Note: It is recommended that teams be created before user accounts but this is not required in order to create user accounts. Adding a User To add a user: 1. Click Administration > Settings in the dctrack Web Client. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click User Accounts in the Authorization and Authentication panel. The User Configuration page opens displaying a list of all user accounts created for the system. 3. Click Add. A blank user information page opens. 4. Enter the Common User Information. a. Enter a username. User names must be at least 3 characters, but not more than 40 characters. For notification to function in the dctrack Classic View, the user name must match the user's account user name. Required b. Enter the user's first name. c. Enter the user's last name. Required d. Enter an address. Required e. Password and Confirm Password: Enter a password for this user. The password must be at least 8 characters, including one numerical character, one uppercase character, one lowercase character, and one of the following special characters: ~!@#$%^&*()_+{} :"<>?/.,';][=-`"). Required f. In the Description field, enter comments about the user. 5. Complete the Additional Fields. 127

136 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators a. Enter the user's mail server. For example, mail.company.com. b. Enter the mail server's SMTP port. Default is 25. Note: If the mail server field is left blank, the user cannot receive notifications. c. If a password is not required to access the SMTP, select the No Password checkbox. d. Select the team this user is on. Teams must be created in dctrack before you can assign them to users. See Teams (on page 184) in the dctrack User Guide. e. Select the user's access level from the Access Level drop-down. If the user is a Gatekeeper who should receive request notifications, select the Request s checkbox. 6. Click Add. Editing a User To edit a user: 1. Click Administration > Settings in the dctrack interface. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click User Accounts in the Authorization and Authentication panel. 3. Select a user and click Edit. The User Information page opens. Click Edit to change the name information. Click Save after making changes. Click Change Password to change the user's password. Enter the password, enter it again to confirm, then click OK. Deleting a User In the user list page, you can delete users who should no longer have access to the system. You cannot delete the admin user. To delete a user: 1. Click Administration > Settings in the Web Client. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click User Accounts in the Authorization and Authentication panel. The User Configuration page opens. 3. Click Delete in the row of the user you want to delete. 4. Click OK to delete the user. 128

137 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Configuring dctrack to Use LDAP Authentication As an alternative to using local user account management, configure dctrack to use an LDAP server or an Active Directory (AD) server for centralized authentication. An LDAP wizard guides you through this process, checking each configuration option. LDAP configuration includes four steps: Network connectivity settings Search and authentication settings Authorizing LDAP user accounts for dctrack Confirmation and enabling LDAP access Once enabled, all users must have an authorized account on the LDAP server to connect to dctrack. The exception is the local admin account. The admin account always has local access to make any necessary configuration changes. Gathering LDAP Configuration Settings The following is a list of configuration information you should know before enabling LDAP authentication in dctrack. If you are not familiar with these settings, ask your LDAP administrator to help you prepare this list. LDAP configuration settings: Type of LDAP Server used: Microsoft Active Directory or other LDAP server IP Address of the LDAP server Network port used by the LDAP server If using a custom port number, what type of encryption is used: TLS, SSL or No Encryption? Base DN of the server (used for searching for users) Bind type of the server Anonymous bind or standard binding The bind DN setting, if using standard bind The password, if using standard bind User ID attribute or the user attribute prefix for user DN User object class (if applicable) Additional object filters LDAP user access level within dctrack User roles 129

138 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Configuring LDAP Authentication To configure LDAP authentication: 1. Ensure all user accounts have been created on the LDAP server. 2. Gather the settings information. See Gathering LDAP Configuration Settings (on page 129). 3. Enable and configure LDAP in dctrack. See Configuring LDAP Authentication Settings (on page 130). 4. Create all user accounts in dctrack with identical credentials as on the LDAP server. This step must be completed AFTER you enable LDAP to ensure the users are created properly. See Add, Edit and Delete Users (on page 127). Configuring LDAP Authentication Settings SASL is not supported. To configure LDAP authentication in expert mode: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Enable LDAP Authentication. 3. Complete the fields with your LDAP information. LDAP Server: Enter the IP address or hostname. LDAP Port: Enter the port number. Port 389 is the standard, unencrypted LDAP communication port. Port 636 is the standard, SSL-encrypted LDAP communication port. Transport Security: Select Unencrypted, SSL Encryption, or TLS Encryption. 4. Authenticate via Search: Leave this checkbox selected to use searching. This is the recommended setting. Deselect the Authenticate via Search checkbox to use Distinguished Name Authentication. Enter the prefix and suffix that resolves to a valid distinguished name when combined with the user name. For example: DN == ${prefix}${username}${suffix} Base DN: The base distinguished name (DN) is the top level of the LDAP directory tree. It indicates where in the LDAP directory to begin searching for user credentials. For example: cn=users,dc=raritan,dc=com. Bind DN 130

139 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Binding Credentials: Enter the credentials to access the LDAP server. Confirm: Re-enter the credentials to access the LDAP server. User ID Attribute User Object Class Search Scope: Select One Level to search only the defined Base DN. Select Subtree to search the defined Base DN and all subtrees. Additional Object Filters 5. Click Save. To test the LDAP settings: LDAP must be enabled in order to test. 1. In the Settings tab, click User Accounts. 2. Enter a username and password of a user that has an authorized account in the LDAP server you configured. Click Add then click Test. Configuring LDAP: Connectivity The first part of the LDAP setup is identifying the LDAP server on your network. To configure LDAP connectivity: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Authentication Source in the Authorization and Authentication section. 3. Click Enable LDAP Authentication. To proceed using the wizard, follow the prompts in the page. To enter all settings in one page without validations, click the Expert Mode link. Expert Mode is intended for expert LDAP users who are very familiar with the settings. See Configuring LDAP Authentication Settings (on page 130). 4. Type the IP address or hostname of your LDAP server. 5. Click Check. dctrack verifies that it can find an LDAP server at the address. 6. Select the network port used by the LDAP server: Port 389 is the standard, unencrypted LDAP communication port. Port 636 is the standard, SSL-encrypted LDAP communication port. 131

140 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators If your LDAP server uses a custom port number select Custom Port Number and type the number in the provided field. Then select whether the server uses TLS Encryption, SSL Encryption or No Encryption. 7. Click Check. dctrack verifies that it can communicate with the server over the specified port. 8. If dctrack can connect successfully with these settings, click Continue, to proceed to the next step. 9. Configuring LDAP: Search and Authentication The LDAP server contains a directory of users. This step tells dctrack where to search for users, and how dctrack authenticates (or Binds) those users with the LDAP server. 1. In section 1, type the base DN in the Base DN field. The base distinguished name (DN) is the top level of the LDAP directory tree. It indicates where in the LDAP directory you want to begin searching for user credentials. For example: cn=users,dc=raritan,dc=com. 2. Click Check. 3. The options that appear in section 2 depend on the base DN entered. a. If your LDAP server uses anonymous binding, select Searching using anonymous binding. b. If your LDAP server uses a Bind DN and password combination, select Search using the following bind DN and password. Then type the bind DN and password in the provided fields. c. If you bind manually, select Enter the LDAP user parameters manually. 4. Click Check. 5. The user parameter options in section 3 depend on the choices made in section 2. a. If you chose to bind manually, type the user attribute prefix in the field provided. b. Otherwise: 132

141 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Select the user ID attribute used by the LDAP server. uid is generally used by Microsoft Active Directory servers, cn by other LDAP servers. You can also specify a custom user ID attribute. Select a user object class to filter by. You can choose between posixaccount, netorgperson, a value from the LDAP server, or a custom value. You can also choose "Do not filter by object class". Select the scope of the user credential search. Choose whether to search the entire subtree or just one level. If you are unsure, you can leave this set to subtree. Type any additional object filters in the field provided. 6. Click Check. 7. A list of LDAP users found using the configured parameters are displayed in section 4. Review the list. If the correct users are present, click Continue. If they are not, adjust the settings and try again. Note: If you chose to bind manually, no list of users can be displayed. 8. Click continue. Configuring LDAP: Authorizing LDAP Users Before LDAP users can connect to dctrack, they must be authorized and given a dctrack role. To authorize LDAP users: 1. Type an LDAP Username string in the provided field. This user name should come from the list provided in the previous page. For example: uighur=ben,ou=people,dc=company,dc=com 2. Select whether this user should be an Administrator. 3. Click Add. 4. Repeat to add more users. 5. When you are done creating the list of users, click Continue. Configuring LDAP: Confirmation The final step of the LDAP wizard is to enable LDAP access. You can click the links for Connectivity, Search Parameters and User Accounts to make changes to any of the previous steps. To proceed, click Enable LDAP Authentication. Once enabled, all non-admin users must have an authorized account on the LDAP server to connect to dctrack. 133

142 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Disabling LDAP Authentication Disabling LDAP returns dctrack to using the local authentication database. Users require an account on dctrack to connect. To disable LDAP authentication: 1. In the Settings tab, click Authentication Source in the Authentication and Authorization section. 2. Click Local User Authentication. 3. Click Enable Local Authentication. Launching dctrack Education and Training In order to get the most out of dctrack, training on the application is essential. See Training and Professional Services (on page 2) for more information on training available. Application Administration Establish Best Practices and Standardized Processes for Change Management The key to the success of any infrastructure management system is to introduce a clearly defined change management process. We suggest that you identify a single point of contact (a single person or department) to manage and administer all of the communications systems infrastructure and their subsystems and resources. All future change requests must be funneled through this single point of contact. In turn, this person/department initiates work orders to execute and document changes. We highly recommend that a person is assigned to audit the physical changes implemented within the data center space as a result of work orders issued in dctrack. This person should not be the same person who implements the work orders. To optimize your usage of dctrack, Raritan recommends the use of: dctrack s drop-down Lists dctrack s Change Management Process dctrack s User Roles and Responsibilities At this stage, dctrack has been installed and deployed. This section contains information on application maintenance, including upgrades, imports and so on. 134

143 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Administration in the dctrack Web Client The administration functions described here are all performed from the dctrack Web Client. See Administration in dctrack Classic View (on page 172) for information on administration functions performed in Classic View. Power IQ Integration Settings (Synching dctrack and Power IQ) This feature eliminates the need to enter dctrack data into Power IQ. This is done by synching dctrack and Power IQ so that data center items, such as PDUs, racks, power associations and so on, are shared between the two applications. After the synch, all dctrack items are added to Power IQ. Any items added to dctrack after the synch are automatically added to Power IQ, and can be viewed in Power IQ by refreshing the page. Important: In order to maintain data integrity, once Power IQ and dctrack data has been synched, all items must be added and updated in dctrack. Do not add or update items in Power IQ once they are synched with dctrack. Synching applies to Power IQ users who are adding dctrack. If you are an existing dctrack user who is adding Power IQ, follow the steps outlined in Use Case 2: Integrating Power IQ with an Existing dctrack Installation (on page 90). Users who are current dctrack and Power IQ users who now integrating the two applications follow the steps outlined in Use Case 4: Integrating an Existing dctrack Installation with an Existing Power IQ Installation (on page 119). Before you begin the synch process, see Prerequisites and Important Notes on Synching Power IQ and dctrack (on page 137). To synch Power IQ and dctrack: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 2. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 3. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 4. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 5. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 6. Click Save. 135

144 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 7. Once you are ready to begin the synch process, click Update Power IQ. A progress bar is displayed throughout the process. The process may take some time to complete depending on the amount of data being imported. 8. Click Cancel at any time to stop the synch process. All of the data up to the point you canceled the synch process is now in Power IQ. The remaining data can be synched at a later time, as needed. A message is displayed at the bottom of the page once the process is complete. 9. Check the Events tab for issues, such as missed items, items that were not mapped, and so on. 136

145 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Prerequisites and Important Notes on Synching Power IQ and dctrack In order to import PDUs, each PDU must have an IP addressed assigned to it. The synch process may take some time to complete depending on the amount of data being synched, your bandwidth, the number of PDUs being imported, and so on. Synching PDUs can take up to 30 seconds for each PDU because Power IQ must first poll each PDU, then send data back to dctrack. The synch continues even if you leave the Power IQ Integration page, but the screen locks and you cannot stop the synch once the page is locked. This prevents other users who may access the application from disrupting the synch process. If you have configured dctrack to automatically time out and log off, keep your session active during the synch or change the User Session Timeout period on the Other Security Administration Settings page to Never for the duration of the synch process. If a session does time out and you are logged off, you must restart the synch process. The data that was imported before the session timeout exists in dctrack, so the process does not need to import that data again once it is restarted. Retrieving dctrack System Health Information Using SNMP Use SNMP to retrieve dctrack system health information such as application up time, IP routing, system contacts and so on. To configure SNMP settings for system health: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. Initially, the Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 2. Click SNMP Settings in the panel on the right side of the page. The SNMP Settings page opens. 3. By default the Enable SNMP v1/v2c checkbox is selected. Leave it selected. 4. Enter the community string in the Read Community String field. 5. Enter the system contact, system name and system location. 6. Click Save. 137

146 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Upgrading dctrack When new firmware is released, you can upgrade dctrack to receive the latest in features and functionality. To upgrade dctrack: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Software Upgrades in the Appliance Administration section. 3. Click Browse, select the *.bin firmware file. If you are upgrading from dctrack 2.5 to 2.6.1, upload both bundle A and bundle B. If you are upgrading from to 2.6.1, upload only bundle B. 4. Click Upload. The new firmware uploads to dctrack. Note: When upgrading from dctrack to 2.6.1, an "Upgrade Bundle Cannot be Validated" error may occur. If you receive this error, retry uploading the same upgrade bundle to resolve it. Configuring Proxy Connections to dctrack If network restrictions prevent some users from connecting directly to dctrack, they may need access through a proxy server that is authorized to make the connection. Check your firewall and security settings to ensure that communications between the proxy server and dctrack is allowed. To configure proxy connections to dctrack: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Server Settings in the Application Administration section. 3. In the Proxy Configuration section, select the web protocol the proxy server communicates over, HTTP or HTTPS. 4. Enter the IP address of the proxy server in the Proxy Host field. dctrack only accepts proxy communication from this address. 5. Enter the communications port the proxy server uses in the Proxy Port field. 6. If the proxy server is required to authenticate with dctrack, select Yes in the Authentication Required field, and enter a Username and Password. These fields must use a valid dctrack username and password combination. 7. Click Save Proxy Settings. 138

147 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Configuring the System Clock Manually To configure the system clock manually: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Appliance Settings in the Application Administration section. 3. In the Time Settings box, select the Time Zone dctrack resides in from the Time Zone drop-down list. Select the date and time using the tools in the "Set time manually" fields. Select the date from the pop-up calendar. Select the 24-hour time from the drop-down list. 4. Click Save. Configuring Logging through Syslog External Syslog servers can be used to record events occurring on dctrack. Using a Syslog provides a separate external log of events. All servers listed under Current Syslog Destinations record events on dctrack. Recorded events include new users, configuration changes, and failed login attempts. To configure logging through Syslog: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Server Settings in the Application Administration section. 3. In the Syslog Destinations box, click Add, then type the IP address of a Syslog server in the "Syslog server address" field. This must be in the form of a numeric address. 4. Click OK. The server appears on the list of Current Syslog Destinations. To stop a syslog server from recording events: Select the checkbox next to the server you want to remove then click Remove. 139

148 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Configuring Remote Storage of Archive Files Configure a remote storage server to automatically store your archive files. All files that are not being actively written to will be automatically stored on the configured server. Sensor reading archives are often being actively written to, so their storage may be approximately one day delayed. System configuration archives, that is, system configuration backup files, including daily automatic backups and manually created backups, can be archived. Before using remote storage: Ensure the server date and time is correct. If the date and time is not correct, dctrack may fail to send the backup files If you are using Amazon's S3 account to store backup files, make sure dctrack is configured with the DNS server, otherwise dctrack cannot communicate with Amazon To configure remote storage of backup files: 1. In the Settings tab, click Remote Storage in the Data Management section. 2. Select the remote storage service type. None: to stop automatic remote storage Amazon Web Services SCP SFTP FTP If SCP or SFTP is uses a private key, create either a DSA or RSA public and private key on the host. Add the public key to ~/.ssh/authorized_keys. Add the private key in the DCT's dialog box. 3. Select the Store backup archives checkbox as the file type you want to automatically store on a remote server. 4. Complete the authentication and location information for your selected remote server. 5. Click Save. The remote storage backup file does not immediately appear in the remote storage location since the file is scheduled to be transferred when the nightly cron job runs. 140

149 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Automating Backups Backups of system data, users and configuration settings are automatically created every 24 hours. Optionally, you can setup an external program to download the latest file each day. For example, you could use either wget or curl as follows: wget --user [username] --password [password] curl -k --user [username]:[password] > latest-backup.dat The scripts will run on a Linux backup-server with the ability to execute curl or wget scripts since these are standard, Unix-like operating system scripts. This allows you to automate the backup using cron. This can either be a separate hardware server of a virtual machine. The resulting.dat backup files are approximately 1.2G to 1.5G since the Models library is included in the backup. The.dat files are compressed by approximately 60%. The script mechanism is independent of the share file system used. Example using a Windows 7 machine: 1. Mount a CIFs share drive onto the Windows 7 machine using Windows Explorer. 2. Open a Cygwin session on a Windows 7 machine. 3. Change directory to the mount share drive and directory 4. Execute: curl -k --user [user name]:[password] >latest.dat This will download the latest.dat (backup file) onto the share drive. 141

150 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Restoring a Database Your dctrack database can be restored from a backup by doing the following. Note: Raritan recommends that dctrack users with database backup files that exceed 2G should use either Internet Explorer 9 or Chrome to restore a database. To restore a database: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Data Backups in the Data Management section. The Data Backups page opens. 3. In the Restore a Backup Archive section, click Browse, then select a backup file. 4. Click Upload. dctrack reboots. dctrack is restored to the backup's configuration settings. Accessing Audit Logs dctrack Web Client audit logs can be viewed in a browser, or exported to a file for viewing or storage. Warning: Audit logs are automatically deleted from the system after 3 calendar months. If you need to maintain a complete audit trail, export logs regularly and store the files outside dctrack. To access audit logs: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. In the Appliance Services section, click Get Support. 3. Click View Audit Log in the Activities section on the right side of the page. The audit log entries are displayed. To download audit logs to a text file: 1. Click Download Audit Logs. 2. Save the audit log to the location of your choice. All audit log entries are exported to a text file. 142

151 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Installing an HTTPS Certificate A PEM file upload is required to replace the current certificate and private key. The PEM file needs to contain both an RSA private key and an X509 certificate. Note: dctrack does not provide a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). OpenSSL or any other utility can be used to generate CSR. dctrack does not use encrypted private keys. You must remove the password from the Private key before it can be used. To remove the encryption from the key, issue a command like: "openssl rsa -in server.key -out server2.key". Use "server2.key" when using openssl utility. It is not required to provide root certificate of CA signing dctrack certificate signing request (CSR). Step 1: Generate a private key This example procedure is for generating a private key using OpenSSL on a Linux server. 1. This command creates an RSA key with Triple DES 1024 byte encryption. openssl genrsa -des3 -out server.key Remember the key password from this command. 3. Generate a Certificate Signing Request. Be prepared to complete the following information: private key password two character country code full state or province name city name company name organizational unit or leave it blank servers common name or fully qualified domain name admin address other attributes can be left blank 4. Create the request. openssl req -new -key server.key -out server.csr 5. Display the CSR request. cat server.csr 6. Copy the CSR request and send it to the certificate authority to be signed. Make sure to copy everything between the first "-----" and the last "-----". 143

152 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 7. Submit CSR to certificate authority and receive signed X.509 certificate. 8. Modify the server key to remove the password cp server.key server.key.secure openssl rsa -in server.key.secure -out server.key Warning: The server.key file must be kept private and secure. If this key file is compromised, the certificate should be removed and then reissued. 9. Create PEM file. The PEM file should contain both the RSA private key without password and the X.509 certificate. Concatenate the unprotected private key to the signed X.509 certificate file from the top level certificate authority. Use this file in the upload in Step 2. Step 2: Upload the PEM file to dctrack: 1. In the Settings tab, click HTTPS Certificate in the Security and Encryption section. 2. If uploaded, the currently HTTPS certificate displays. To replace it or add a new certificate, click Browse and select the PEM file. 3. Click Upload. Restricting Web and Shell Access Based on IP Address To increase security, dctrack can be configured to restrict web interface and SSH access by IP address. When trusted hosts are specified, dctrack blocks attempts to connect from addresses not specified. When no hosts are specified, ports 22, 80, 443, 5432 are open to all hosts. To restrict web and shell access: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. The global options will override any options that allow access to the SSH and ODBC service. Allow ICMP ping responses Block all SSH access Block all ODBC access: See Configuring ODBC Access to dctrack (on page 146). 3. Identify the hosts to allow access to in the Trusted Hosts fields. 144

153 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators You can enter an IP address, or a subnet using CIDR notation such as / For each address, select how it is permitted to access dctrack. Select the Enable SSH to allow SSH access checkbox. Select the Enable HTTP/HTTPS checkbox to enable access through the web interface. Select Enable ODBC to allow third party access. 5. Click Save. Changing the Login Page Message You can change the default message that displays on the login page to a customized message for all dctrack users. To change the login page message: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. Click Other Security Settings in the Security and Encryption section. 3. In the Authorization Warning Message section, enter the message you want to display on the login page. You can use html tags for formatting. Header: Text entered in this field displays on the login page in a bold font, as the heading to the message Body: Text entered in this field displays in a normal font, as the main content of the message. 4. Click Save. Log out of dctrack to return to the login page and view the message. Changing Web User Session Timeouts You can set dctrack to log out web users who have been inactive for a certain period of time. To change web user session timeouts: 1. From the Web Client, click Administration > Settings. The Settings page opens in a secondary browser window. 2. In the Security and Encryption section, click Other Security Settings. 3. In the User Session Timeout box, select a time from the "Log users out" list. The time indicates how long users can remain idle on the dctrack web interface before being logged out. Select Never to disable this feature. 4. Click Save Timeout. 145

154 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Configuring ODBC Access to dctrack dctrack provides you with the ability to access ODBC views of dctrack data, such as requests, work orders, items, ports, circuits, custom fields and so on, that are contained in the dctrack database. This allows you to then create custom reports using ODBC compliant applications such as Crystal Reports or Microsoft Access. See Descriptions of ODBC Views (on page 149) for a list of views available. Note: Views that are specific to Power IQ are blank. All dctrack ODBC views begin with 'dc'. All other views are specific to Power IQ and do not contain any data. To enable ODBC access to dctrack: 1. In the Settings tab, click ODBC Access in the Data Management section. The ODBC Access page opens. 2. Click Add, then double-click the addresses to enter edit mode and type a Network Address and a Network Mask into the fields. Repeat to add new addresses as needed. Select an address and click Remove to remove authorization from the address. The Network Mask value can be used to specify a single address or a range of addresses. Use netmask to allow access from all IP addresses. 3. Click Save when all authorized addresses have been added. The Power IQ database restarts. 4. After the restart, ODBC compliant applications are allowed to access the database from the authorized IP addresses. Note: If you are using a Microsoft Windows 64-bit operating system, you must install the PostgreSQL 64-bit driver in order to access the database from Microsoft Office 2007 or later applications. ODBC Client Configuration Note: The PC you use to access the dctrack ODBC views is referred to here as the ODBC client. Note: If the ODBC client was used to successfully run dctrack Classic View, then the PC already has the 32-bit PostgreSQL drivers installed. 1. ODBC Client must install and configure a suitable PostgreSQL driver. PostgreSQL drivers are available at 2. ODBC Client must configure dctrack as a ODBC Data Source with the following credentials: 146

155 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Database Name raritan User ID odbcuser Password raritan Port Number 5432 Server dctrack IP Address Timezone Configuration for ODBC Data ODBC tables use the dctrack system time setting, which is EST/EDT. This setting is converted to your selected timezone when you are using the dctrack web interface, but this conversion is not applied to ODBC connections. See Configuring the System Clock Manually (on page 139) for details on setting the timezone for the dctrack web interface. The time data available via the ODBC connection can by changed on a per session basis. By using a specific SQL statement to adjust the client session, you can run reports and view information in the desired timezone. This link contains documentation on setting the timezone for the database using an SQL statement. Use the "SET SESSION..." syntax, because dctrack ODBC users do not have super user privileges. Advanced Reporting with Database and Reporting Programs Create advanced reports and charts with reporting programs such as SQL report writer, Crystal Reports, and Microsoft Access. Follow these instructions to use Microsoft Access. ODBC Access must be enabled. See Configuring ODBC Access to dctrack (on page 146). You must install a PostgreSQL driver first. See Install and Configure a PostgreSQL Driver (on page 147) Install and Configure a PostgreSQL Driver You must install and configure a PostgreSQL driver before you can use an ODBC compliant application to create reports of your dctrack data. To install and configure a PostgreSQL driver: 1. Configure dctrack to allow ODBC access from your client IP address. See Configuring ODBC Access to dctrack (on page 146). 2. Go to and download the latest driver.zip file. Run the.msi file contained in the.zip to install the driver on your client. 3. Go to Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data Sources (ODBC). 147

156 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 4. Click Add then select the driver, PostgreSQL Unicode, and click Finish. 5. In the dialog that appears, enter the dctrack database information: Database: raritan Server: dctrack IP address User Name: odbcuser Data Source: Use this name to reference this data source from your ODBC compliant application. SSL Mode: disable Port: 5432 Password: raritan 6. Click Test. If the test is successful, click Save. 7. Click OK. Using Microsoft Access to Connect to dctrack ODBC Views Use Microsoft Access to create links to the dctrack database ODBC views you want to query. These instructions refer to Microsoft Access Other versions may vary. To link tables in Microsoft Access: Note: You only have to link tables once in Microsoft Access, and the links are retained. You do not have to repeat this task each time you want to create queries or run reports. 1. Choose File > New then select Blank Database. 2. Name the file and click Create. 3. In the dialog that appears, Tables is selected by default in the Object list. Click New. 4. Select File > Get External Data > Link Tables and click OK. 5. In the dialog that appears, select ODBC Databases in the "Files of type" list. 6. In the dialog that appears, click the Machine Data Source tab, select the ODBC data source you created earlier, and click OK. 7. A list of all ODBC views appears. Select the view you want to link and click OK. In order not to have to repeat these steps, it is recommended you select all dctrack views (that is, all view names that begin with 'dc'). 8. Select the unique record identifier for the view and click OK. The unique record identifier is the view's primary key, which will always end in 'ID'. For example, ItemID. It is typically the first item in the list. See Descriptions of ODBC Views (on page 149). 148

157 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 9. The linked tables appears in the list. Repeat these steps to add other tables you want to query. 10. Build a query. a. Click on the Queries object in the database window. b. Use the Microsoft Access Wizard to create a query. c. Select one or more linked tables (dctrack ODBC views) to build a query. When selecting multiple linked tables, you must define a relationship between the tables by joining the primary key field of one table to the foreign key field of another table. To see which foreign key relates to which primary key, see the Descriptions of ODBC Views (on page 149). For example, you can relate the dcdataports view to the dcallitems view by joining the item_id fields from each view. Or you can join the SLAID field in the dcallitems table to the UserLookupID field from the dcuserlookups view. Descriptions of ODBC Views The following dctrack views are available in ODBC. Note: Views that are specific to Power IQ are blank. All dctrack ODBC views begin with 'dc'. All other views are specific to Power IQ and do not contain any data. View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcallitems ItemID Decimal 16 View containing all items in the database Unique ID for item assigned by the database (Primary Key) ItemName Text 64 The item name. Always in uppercase ItemAlias Text 64 A secondary name for the item Class Text 255 Subclass Text 255 RoomID Decimal 16 CabinetItemID Decimal 16 UPosition Decimal 16 Class name of the items (Device, Network, etc) Applies to Device, Network and Floor PDU classes only The ID of the Room (i.e. Site) that this items belongs to The ID of the Cabinet that this item belongs to. Cabinets are in this view The bottom U position where the item sits in the cabinet. -9 = null, -1 = Below, -2 = Above. 0 is not valid SlotPosition Decimal 16 The slot position for a blade in the chassis. 149

158 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size RailsUsed Text 255 Orientation Text 255 ChassisItemID Decimal 16 MasterStackItemID Decimal 16 CADHandle Text 50 Description Valid values are >= = null ItemType Text 255 Item type value ItemFunction Text 255 Item function value Front, Rear or Both for rackable item, Left Side, Right Side for 0U item North, South, East, West for Floor Standing item; Front, Back for 0U; Faces Front, Faces Rear for Rackable The ID of the Chassis item that this blade belongs to The ID of the master stack item that this stackable item belongs to The AutoCAD Handle or unique reference that this item is associated with in the floor map ModelID Decimal 16 The ID of the Model in dcmodels view. Make Text 64 The manufacturer name of the model of this item Model Text 64 The model name for this item RUHeight Long Integer 4 The Height of the item model in Rack Units Height Decimal 16 The height of the item model in inches Width Decimal 16 The width of the item model in inches Depth Decimal 16 The depth of the item model in inches Weight Decimal 16 The weight of the item model in pounds SerialNumber Text 100 The serial number of the item AssetTag Text 100 The Asset Tag value assigned to this item ElectronicAssetTag Text 25 The electronic asset tag value coming from Raritan's Asset Management Strip PurchaseDate Date/Time 8 The date the item was purchased PurchasePrice Decimal 16 The price of the item when it was purchased SLAID Decimal 16 The ID of the SLA value from the dcuserloopup view ContractNumber Text 50 The item's maintenance contract number ContractAmount Decimal 16 The item's maintenance contract amount in $ 150

159 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type ContractBeginDate Date/Time 8 InstallDate Date/Time 8 ExpireDate Date/Time 8 Field Size SysAdminID Decimal 16 SysAdminTeam Text 255 UserDepartment Text 255 Description The date the item's maintenance contract begins The date the item was installed in the Data Center The date the item's maintenance contract ends The ID of the user in dcusers that is the System Admin of this item The Team that is assigned to be the System Admin of this item The user department name or customer that owns this item CabGridLocation Text 20 For a Cabinet, this is the Grid Location value CabRowLabel Text 10 CabPositionInRow Long Integer 4 CabinetGroup Text 255 For a Cabinet, this is the row label where the cabinet is located For a Cabinet, this is the position number in the row For a Cabinet, this is the logical group that the cabinet belongs to LineVolts Decimal 16 For a Floor PDU, PDU Panelboard or UPS PhaseVolts Decimal 16 For a Floor PDU, PDU Panelboard or UPS RatingVolts Decimal 16 For a Floor PDU, PDU Panelboard or UPS RatingAmps Decimal 16 For a Floor PDU, PDU Panelboard or UPS RatingkW Decimal 16 For a Floor PDU, PDU Panelboard or UPS RratingkVA Decimal 16 For a Floor PDU, PDU Panelboard or UPS UPSBankItemID Decimal 16 SystemRedundancy Text 10 CRACGroupItemID Decimal 16 CRACThrowDirectio n Decimal 16 CRACThrowDistanc e Decimal 16 The item ID of the UPS Bank that this item is connected to The system redundancy of a UPS Bank in the form of N+x The CRAC Group item ID that this CRAC unit belong to For a CRAC item, the direction that cold air is delivered with reference to the Room North For a CRAC item, the distance in feet that cold air is assumed to reach BreakerPanelPoles Long 4 Number of Poles in a Floor PDU Panelboard 151

160 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Integer Field Size OutletBreakerPanelI temid Decimal 16 PerfTileXY Text 50 PerfTilePercentOpe n Long Integer 4 Description The item ID of the Floor PDU PanelBoard to which this Power Outlet is connected to The X,Y Coordinate of the perforated tile with reference to the 0,0 location in the floor map The percentage of the surface area that is open for cold area delivery for a tile Domain Text 255 The Domain a Device belongs to OperatingSystem Text 255 OSILayer Integer 2 GroupingName Text 100 GroupingNumber Text 100 VMCluster Text 255 DataStoreItemID Decimal 16 DataStoreVolume Text 100 PowerSupplyRedun dancy Text 10 Status Text 255 The operating system a Device or Network item runs The OSI layer number (1 through 7) that a Network Item operates in primarily Field used to store various data for each class of item Field used to store various data for each class of item The Virtual Machine Cluster that this Virtual Machine Device belongs to The ID of the item that contains the Data Store for this VM Device The Volume name that this VM Device is stored in The Redundancy value for the item's power supplies (applies to Device, Network and Probe items) The status value for the item (New, Installed, Discarded, etc) CreatedBy Text 100 The user that created this item initially CreationDate Date/Time 8 The date this item was created Comment Memo - A field for any user comments for the item View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcapplicati ons AppInstanceID Decimal 16 View containing all applications running in Devices Unique ID for an application instance assigned by the database (Primary Key) 152

161 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type ItemID Long Integer 4 Field Size Description The ID of the item in dcallitems view where the application runs AppName Text 255 The name of the application instance Criticality Text 255 SysAdminID Text 255 AppUserDepartmen ts Memo - AppUsedBy Memo - CreatedBy Text 25 The criticality value assigned to this instance of the application The ID of the user in dcusers that is the System Admin of this application instance A list of the customers using this application instance A list of the sites using this application instance The user name who created this application instance record CreationDate Date/Time 8 The date this application instance was created View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcaudittrail AuditTrailID Decimal 16 RoomID Long Integer 4 Screen Text 50 ItemID Long Integer 4 View containing all audit trail entries for items and ports changes Unique ID for an Audit Trail entry assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the Room (i.e. Site) that this items belongs to The name of the screen where this change was made The ID of the item in dcallitems on which the change was made Field Text 50 The field name which was changed ChangedFrom Memo - The value of the field before the change ChangedTo Memo - The value of the field after the change ChangedBy Text 25 The user that made the change ChangedDate Date/Time 8 The date the change was made 153

162 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Field Size Description Description odbc.dccustomfields ID Decimal 16 ItemID Decimal 16 ItemName Text 64 ItemClass Text 255 View containing all custom fields and the items they belong to Unique ID for the custom field entry assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the item in dcallitems to which the custom field belongs The item name to which the custom field belongs The item class to which the custom field belongs CustomFieldName Text 255 The custom field title CustomFieldValue Text 255 The custom field value FieldAppliesTo Text 255 FieldSortOrder Long Integer 4 The class that this custom field applies (Either one class or all classes) The sort order of the custom field when displayed with other custom fields of an item View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcdatacircuitports CircuitID Decimal 16 StartingConnection Decimal 16 EndingConnection Decimal 16 Endpoint1PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint2PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint3PortID Decimal 16 View containing a list of the Port ID's in Data Circuits Unique ID for the Circuit assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the first Connection in the circuit from dcdataconnections The ID of the last Connection in the circuit from dcdataconnections The port ID from dcdataports for Endpoint 1 (Node 1) of the circuit The port ID from dcdataports for Endpoint 2 (Node 2) of the circuit The port ID from dcdataports for Endpoint 3 (Node 3) of the circuit Endpoint4PortID Decimal 16 The port ID from dcdataports for Endpoint 4 154

163 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Endpoint5PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint6PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint7PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint8PortID Decimal 16 Description (Node 4) of the circuit The port ID from dcdataports for Endpoint 5 (Node 5) of the circuit The port ID from dcdataports for Endpoint 6 (Node 6) of the circuit The port ID from dcdataports for Endpoint 7 (Node 7) of the circuit The port ID from dcdataports for Endpoint 8 (Node 8) of the circuit View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcdatacircuits CircuitID Decimal 16 StartingConnection Decimal 16 EndingConnection Decimal 16 Connection1ID Connection2ID Connection3ID Connection4ID Connection5ID Connection6ID Connection7ID Connection8ID Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 View containing a list of the Connection ID's in a Data Circuit Unique ID for the Circuit assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the first Connection in the circuit from dcdataconnections The ID of the last Connection in the circuit from dcdataconnections The Connection ID from dcdataconnections for Endpoint 1 (Node 1) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcdataconnections for Endpoint 2 (Node 2) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcdataconnections for Endpoint 3 (Node 3) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcdataconnections for Endpoint 4 (Node 4) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcdataconnections for Endpoint 5 (Node 5) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcdataconnections for Endpoint 6 (Node 6) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcdataconnections for Endpoint 7 (Node 7) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcdataconnections for Endpoint 8 (Node 8) of the circuit 155

164 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Field Size Description Description odbc.dcdataconnections DataConnectionID Decimal 16 SourcePortID Decimal 16 DestinationPortID Decimal 16 CordLabel Text 64 CordColor Memo - CordType Text 255 ConnectionType Text 255 View Containing data connections between two ports Unique ID for the Connection assigned by the database (Primary Key) The port ID from dcdataports for the left side of the connection The port ID from dcdataports for the right side of the connection The label of the patch cord used in this connection (optional) The Color of the patch cord used in this connection (optional) The Type of the patch cord used in this connection (optional) IMPLICIT = made by application for infrastructure components. EXPLICIT = made by user CreatedBy Text 50 The user that created this Connection initially CreationDate Date/Time 8 The date this connection was created UpdateDate Date/Time 8 The date this connection was updated Comments Memo - Not used in the GUI View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcdataports DataPortID Decimal 16 ItemID Decimal 16 View containing all data ports with a reference to the item they belong to PortName Text 64 The name of the port Unique ID for the data port assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the item in dcallitems to which the port belongs Used Text 1 True if this port is used in a connection Subclass Text 255 The subclass of the port identifying its type 156

165 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type SortOrder Long Integer 4 Field Size Description The order within the item when an item has many ports and order is important such as Data Panel MACAddress Text 64 The MAC Address of the port if applicable ConnectorName Text 64 The Connector name of the port ColorCode Text 255 The color code of the port Media Text 255 The media of the port Speed Text 255 The speed or data rate of the port Protocol Text 255 The protocol the port uses VLAN Text 255 CableGrade Decimal 16 The name of the VLAN that this port supports if applicable The grade of the cable leading to this port for Data Panel items only CreationDate Date/Time 8 The date this port was created FEDataPanelPortID Decimal 16 SNMPCommunity Text 50 The Port ID on the Far End Data Panel that is connected to this port with Structured Cabling The SNMP Community String for this Port if applicable Comments Memo - A field for any user comments for the port View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dceventdetails EventDetailID Decimal 16 EventID Decimal 16 EventSummary Memo - The event summary View of Event detail entries for each event Unique ID for the an Event Detail entry assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the Event from dcevents View that this details entry belongs to EventDetailSysNam e Memo - The system name for this event EventDetailName Memo - The Title of this event detail entry EventDetailValue Memo - The value of this event detail entry EventDetailValueSy slookup Text 255 Displayable Text 1 The value of this event detail entry from the system lookup if applicable Whether this entry is displayed in the dctrack GUI or not 157

166 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Field Size Description Description odbc.dcevents EventID Decimal 16 View containing all events EventResult Text 255 Result of the event EventType Text 255 Type of the event EventStatus Text 255 Status of the event EventSeverity Text 255 Severity of the event CreatedAt Date/Time 8 Unique ID for the an Event assigned by the database (Primary Key) The Date the event was created in the database ClearedAt Date/Time 8 The Date the event was cleared ClearedByUserNam e Text 255 The user that cleared the event ClearingEventID Decimal 16 The ID of the event that cleared this event if applicable EventSummary Memo - The summary description of the event EventSource Text 255 The source that produced the event RoomID Decimal 16 LocationCode Text 20 CabinetItemID Decimal 16 CabinetName Text 64 UPosition Decimal 16 ItemID Decimal 16 ItemName Text 64 The ID of the Room (i.e. Site) that this event is about if applicable The Location code of the Room (i.e. Site) that this event is about if applicable The item ID of the cabinet that this event is about if applicable The cabinet name that this event is about if applicable The U position of the item that caused the AMS event if applicable The item ID in dcallitems of the item that caused the AMS event if applicable The item name of the item that caused the AMS event if applicable 158

167 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Field Size Description Description odbc.dcipaddresses IPAddressID Decimal 16 DataPortID Decimal 16 PortName Text 64 IPAddress Text 50 The IPv4 Address Mask Text 50 CIDR Double 8 View containling all IP Addresses assigned to Ports Unique ID for the IP Address assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the Data Port in dcdataports that this IP Address belongs to The name of the port that this IP Address belongs to The IP Address mask in octets (ex ) The IP Address mask in decimal (ex. 24 as in /24) DefaultGateway Text 50 The default Gateway IP Address DNS Text 50 Domain Text 255 NetworkID Long Integer 4 Comments Memo - The DNS name associated with this IP Address. FQDN = DNS.Domain The Domain name associated with this IP Address ending in.com or the like. FQDN = DNS.Domain The ID of the network in dcipnetworks to which this IP Address belongs A field for any user comments for the IP Address View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcipnetworks IPNetworkID Decimal 16 RoomID Long Integer 4 NetworkPrefix Text 15 View containing all IP Networks Unique ID for the IP Network assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the Room (i.e. Site) that this network belongs to The octets that form the prefix part of the network address SubnetStart Text 15 The first IP address in the network 159

168 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description SubnetEnd Text 15 The last IP address in the network Mask Text 50 The network mask for this network DefaultGateway Text 15 VLANNumber SubnetFullName Text 50 The default Gateway IP Address used by this network Long Integer 4 The VLAN number assigned to this network The full name of the network (LogicalName+LocationType+Location) LogicalName Text 255 The logical name of the network LocationType Text 20 Location Text 50 DNSsuffix Text 50 Color1 Text 10 Color2 Text 10 Color3 Text 10 Color4 Text 10 The location type for where this network is to be used in the data center The location where this network is to be used in the data center The Suffix that is appended to the item name to make the DNS when the IP Address is assigned The first color code associated with this network The second color code associated with this network The third color code associated with this network The fourth color code associated with this network View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcmakes MakeID Decimal 16 View containing all manufacturers of models Unique ID for the make assigned by the database (Primary Key) Make Text 64 The name of the manufacturer URL Text 255 A URL link to the manufacturer's web site CustomerServiceTel Text 20 The customer service telephone number for this manufacturer TechSupportTel Text 20 The tech support telephone number for this 160

169 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size AccountNumber Text 20 Description manufacturer The account number for you with this manufacturer Notes Memo - A field for any user comments View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcmodels ModelID Decimal 16 ModelName Text 64 MakeID Decimal 16 View containing all models in the dctrack library Unique ID for the model assigned by the database (Primary Key) The name of the model as called by the manufacturer The ID of the manufacturer of this model from the dcmakes view Make Text 64 The name of the manufacturer Mounting Text 50 The mounting type for this model FormFactor Text 50 The form factor for the model RUHeight Long Integer 4 The Height of the model in Rack Units Height Decimal 16 The height of the model in inches Width Decimal 16 The width of the model in inches Depth Decimal 16 The depth of the model in inches Weight Decimal 16 The weight of the model in pounds HasFrontImage Text 1 HasRearImage Text 1 CreationDate Date/Time 8 UpdateDate Date/Time 8 CreatedBy Text 255 True if this model has an image for the front face True if this model has an image for the rear face The date this model was created in the database The date this model was updated in the database The user name that created the model. Raritan is used for models delivered from Raritan LibraryVersion Decimal 16 The version number of the library that this 161

170 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description model was last issued in View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcpowercircuitports CircuitID Decimal 16 StartingConnection Decimal 16 EndingConnection Decimal 16 Endpoint1PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint2PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint3PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint4PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint5PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint6PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint7PortID Decimal 16 Endpoint8PortID Decimal 16 View containing a list of the Port ID's in Data Circuits Unique ID for the Circuit assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the first Connection in the circuit from dcpowerconnections The ID of the last Connection in the circuit from dcpowerconnections The port ID from dcpowerports for Endpoint 1 (Node 1) of the circuit The port ID from dcpowerports for Endpoint 2 (Node 2) of the circuit The port ID from dcpowerports for Endpoint 3 (Node 3) of the circuit The port ID from dcpowerports for Endpoint 4 (Node 4) of the circuit The port ID from dcpowerports for Endpoint 5 (Node 5) of the circuit The port ID from dcpowerports for Endpoint 6 (Node 6) of the circuit The port ID from dcpowerports for Endpoint 7 (Node 7) of the circuit The port ID from dcpowerports for Endpoint 8 (Node 8) of the circuit View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcpowercircuits CircuitID Decimal 16 StartingConnection Decimal 16 View containing a list of the Connection ID's in a Data Circuit Unique ID for the Circuit assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the first Connection in the circuit from dcpowerconnections 162

171 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size EndingConnection Decimal 16 Connection1ID Connection2ID Connection3ID Connection4ID Connection5ID Connection6ID Connection7ID Connection8ID Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Description The ID of the last Connection in the circuit from dcpowerconnections The Connection ID from dcpowerconnections for Endpoint 1 (Node 1) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcpowerconnections for Endpoint 2 (Node 2) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcpowerconnections for Endpoint 3 (Node 3) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcpowerconnections for Endpoint 4 (Node 4) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcpowerconnections for Endpoint 5 (Node 5) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcpowerconnections for Endpoint 6 (Node 6) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcpowerconnections for Endpoint 7 (Node 7) of the circuit The Connection ID from dcpowerconnections for Endpoint 8 (Node 8) of the circuit View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcpowerconnections PowerConnectionID Decimal 16 SourcePortID Decimal 16 DestinationPortID Decimal 16 CordLabel Text 64 CordColor Memo - CordType Text 255 ConnectionType Text 255 View Containing Power connections between two ports Unique ID for the Connection assigned by the database (Primary Key) The port ID from dcpowerports for the left side of the connection The port ID from dcpowerports for the right side of the connection The label of the patch cord used in this connection (optional) The Color of the patch cord used in this connection (optional) The Type of the patch cord used in this connection (optional) IMPLICIT = made by application for infrastructure components. EXPLICIT = made by user 163

172 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description CreatedBy Text 50 The user that created this Connection initially CreationDate Date/Time 8 The date this connection was created UpdateDate Date/Time 8 The date this connection was updated Comments Memo - Not used in the GUI View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcpowerports PowerPortID Decimal 16 ItemID Decimal 16 View containing all Power ports with a reference to the item they belong to PortName Text 64 The name of the port Unique ID for the Power port assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the item in dcallitems to which the port belongs Used Text 1 True if this port is used in a connection Subclass Text 255 The subclass of the port identifying its type SortOrder Long Integer 4 The order within the item when an item has many ports and order is important such as Rack PDU ConnectorName Text 64 The Connector name of the port ColorCode Text 255 The color code of the port Phase Text 255 The Phase type for this power port Volts Text 255 The voltage of this power port PowerFactor Decimal 16 The power factor used for power supplies WattsNameplate WattsBudget Long Integer 4 The nameplate value in watts Long Integer 4 The budget value in watts AmpsNameplate Decimal 16 The nameplate value in amps AmpsBudget Decimal 16 The budget value in amps AmpsActual Decimal 16 AmpsActualA Decimal 16 The actual amps value when measured from an intelligent Rack PDU or other means The actual amps of Phase A value when measured from an intelligent Rack PDU or other means 164

173 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size AmpsActualB Decimal 16 AmpsActualC Decimal 16 CableGrade Text 255 BreakerPortID Decimal 16 Description The actual amps of Phase B value when measured from an intelligent Rack PDU or other means The actual amps of Phase C value when measured from an intelligent Rack PDU or other means The AWG grade of the cable leading to this port for a Power Outlet The port ID in this view of the Breaker port that connects to this Power Outlet port PhaseLegs Text 255 The Phase legs to which this port connects to BuswayItemID Decimal 16 InputCordItemID Decimal 16 BreakerOrFuse Text 255 The item ID of the Busway that this port is port of The input cord port ID in this view that this Rack PDU output is wired to The Name of the Breaker or Fuse that this Rack PDU output is wired to Comments Memo - A field for any user comments View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcrequesthistory RequestHistoryID Decimal 16 RequestID Decimal 16 RequestNumber Text 15 RequestDescription Text 255 RequestType Text 30 RequestStageID Long Integer 4 RequestStage Text 255 View containing the history for all Requests with reference to the Request Unique ID for the Request History assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the Request in dcrequests to which the history entry belongs The Request Number assigned by the system that is seen in the GUI Describes the action of the Request and for which item and port The action to be performed (Item Move, Connect, Disconnect, etc) The ID of Stage of the Request from dcsystemlookups The name of the Stage of the Request (Request Issued, Request Approved, etc) ActionBy Text 50 The username that performed the action on 165

174 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type ActionDate Date/Time 8 ItemID Long Integer 4 Field Size Description this Request The date the action was performed on this Request The ID of the item in dcallitems view that this Request is for ActionComment Memo - A field for any user comments View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcrequests RequestID Decimal 16 RoomID Long Integer 4 RequestNumber Text 15 RequestDescription Text 255 RequestType Text 30 ActionBy Text 50 ActionDate Date/Time 8 RequestStageID Long Integer 4 RequestStage Text 255 IsArchived Text 1 WorkOrderID ItemID Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 View containing all the Requests in the system Unique ID for the Request assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the Room (i.e. Site) that this Request belongs to The Request Number assigned by the system that is seen in the GUI Describes the action of the Request and for which item and port The action to be performed (Item Move, Connect, Disconnect, etc) The username that performed the last action on this Request The date the last action was performed on this Request The ID of latest Stage of the Request from dcsystemlookups The name of the latest Stage of the Request (Request Issued, Request Approved, etc) True/False indicating if this Request has been archived The ID of the Work Order that this Request belong to The ID of the item in dcallitems view that this Request is for ActionComment Memo - A field for any user comments 166

175 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Field Size Description Description odbc.dcreservationdetails ReservationDetailID Decimal 16 ReservationID Decimal 16 CabinetItemID Decimal 16 CabinetName Text 64 View containing all Reservation details with a reference to the Reservation Unique ID for the Reservation Detail assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the Reservation that this reservation detail entry belongs to The ID in dcallitems of the cabinet item that this reservation detail entry is located in The name of the cabinet item that this reservation detail entry is located in ModelID Decimal 16 The ID of the Model in dcmodels view. ModelName Text 64 RUHeight UPosition The name of the model as called by the manufacturer Long Integer 4 The Height of the model in Rack Units Long Integer 4 The bottom U position of the item where the reservation is located. Mounting Text 25 The mounting type for this model Class Text 255 The class that this reservation belongs to View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcreservations ReservationID Decimal 16 ReservationNumber Text 15 ReservationName Text 64 ReservationPurpose Memo - View containing all Reservations in the system Unique ID for the Reservation assigned by the database (Primary Key) The reservation number assigned by the system and displayed in the GUI The name of the reservation entered by the user The purpose of the reservation entered by the user ReservationStatus Text 255 Always set to New. Not used ReservationDate Date/Time 8 The date the reservation was made 167

176 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description ExpirationDate Date/Time 8 The date the reservation is set to expire ReservedBy Text 25 The username that made the reservation UpdatedDate Date/Time 8 The date when the reservation was updated IsExpired Text 1 True/False indicating if this reservation is expired View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcrooms ID Decimal 16 View containing a list of all the Rooms (i.e. Sites) in the system Unique ID for the Room assigned by the database (Primary Key) LocationCode Text 20 The shorthand code for the room LocationName Text 50 A longer name or description of the room LocationType Text 255 AddressFloor Text 50 The floor number AddressStreet Text 30 The street name AddressCity Text 30 The city AddressState Text 20 The state AddressZip Text 10 The zip Code AddressCountry Text 50 The country The type of the room (Main, Regional, Local, Disaster Recovery) LocationArea Decimal 16 The area of the Room saved in square feet RFHeight Decimal 16 The raised floor height in inches FlrClgHeight Decimal 16 PlenumHeight Integer 2 The distance between the finished floor and the finished ceiling in the room in inches The height of the space above the finished ceiling in inches RmLength Integer 2 The length of the room in inches RmWidth Integer 2 The width of the room in inches LocationPicturePath Text 255 LocationCADPath Text 255 The shared drive file path where this room's picture is stored The shared drive file path where this room's AutoCAD drawing file is stored 168

177 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description DrawingNorth Memo - 1=North, 3=East, 5=South and 7=West OrientationNorthSo uth Text 1 OrientationEastWes t Text 1 XAxisNumbers Text 1 True if cabinets order goes from North to South (top to bottom in drawing) False if cabinets order goes from East to West (right to left in drawing) True if the X Axis displays the numbers for the tiles and Y Axis displays the letters View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcsensorports SensorPortID Decimal 16 ItemID Decimal 16 View containing all Sensor ports with a reference to the item they belong to PortName Text 64 The name of the port Unique ID for the Sensor port assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the item in dcallitems to which the port belongs Used Text 1 True if this port is used in a connection Subclass Text 255 The subclass of the port identifying its type SortOrder Long Integer 4 The order within the item when an item has many ports and order is important ConnectorName Text 64 The Connector name of the port ColorCode Text 255 The color code of the port Protocol Text 255 The protocol the port uses CabinetID Decimal 16 LocationXYZ Text 20 LocationInCab Text 255 ValueActual Decimal 16 ValueActualUnit Text 10 The ID in dcallitems of the cabinet item that this sensor head is located in Sensor head location in x,y,x coordinates with reference to the room's 0,0,0 point in the floor map A textual location description for the sensor head inside a cabinet The actual value of the sensor as measured from the equipment The Unit for the measurement such as Celsius, Percent, etc CreationDate Date/Time 8 The date the port was created 169

178 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description Comments Memo - A field for any user comments View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcsnmptrack ReadingID Decimal 16 ItemID Long Integer 4 View containing all the row data collected by snmptrack Unique ID for the reading assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the item in dcallitems that this reading is from ReadingName Text 50 This describes what the reading is for ReadingValue Decimal 16 The is the value that was read ReadingUnit Text 50 This is the unit for the value (Amps, Degree C, Percent, etc) ReadingTimeStamp Date/Time 8 The time when the reading was received PollCycleTimeStam p Date/Time 8 The time when the poll cycle was started in which this reading falls View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcsystemlookups SystemLookupID Decimal 16 LookupType Text 255 LookupCode Decimal 16 View containing the list of all System Lookup values Unique ID for the system lookup assigned by the database (Primary Key) The type of lookup which groups several lookup entries The code assigned to the lookup that will never change and used as a programming reference LookupValue Text 255 The value of the lookup entry Attribute Text 255 SortOrder Long Integer 4 ParentSystemLooku pid Decimal 16 An field to include additional information for this lookup entry Used to sort all the entries that belong to the same LookupType The ID of the parent of this lookup from this view 170

179 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Field Size Description Description odbc.dcuserlookups UserLookupID Decimal 16 LookupType Text 255 View containing the list of all user defined lookup values Unique ID for the user lookup assigned by the database (Primary Key) The type of lookup which groups several lookup entries LookupValue Text 255 The value of the lookup entry Attribute Memo - SortOrder Long Integer 4 SystemLookupID Decimal 16 An field to include additional information for this lookup entry Used to sort all the entries that belong to the same LookupType The ID of the system lookup in the dcsystemlookups view that this entry belongs to View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Description odbc.dcworkorderdetails ID Decimal 16 WorkOrderID ItemID DataCircuitID PowerCircuitID DisconnectedDataP ortid DisconnectedPower PortID Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 Long Integer 4 View containing details about what's included in a work order Unique ID for the Work order Detail assigned by the database (Primary Key) The ID of the work order in dcworkorders that this entry belongs to The ID of the item in dcallitems that this work order entry is for The ID of the data circuit in dcdatacircuits that this work order entry points to The ID of the power circuit in dcpowercircuits that this work order entry points to The ID of the data port in dcdataports that this disconnect work order entry points to The ID of the power port in dcpowerports that this disconnect work order entry points to 171

180 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators View Name Field Name Field Type View Name Field Name Field Type Field Size Field Size Description Description odbc.dcworkorders ID Decimal 16 WorkOrderNumber Text 50 WorkOrderType Text 255 WorkOrderDueDate Date/Time 8 AssignedTo Text 50 View containing a list of all work orders Unique ID for the Work order assigned by the database (Primary Key) The work order number assigned by the system and is seen in the GUI The type of Work Order (Item Move, New Connection, Disconnect, etc) The date when this work order is due to be completed The user name that is assigned to complete this work order IsComplete Text 1 True if the Work Order is completed IsArchived Text 1 True if this Work Order is Archived Administration in dctrack Classic View Libraries dctrack provides you with default, prepopulated libraries that are used by the application for such things as server models, connector types, equipment manufacturer names, and so on. These libraries can be edited by Gatekeepers to customize them as per your needs. Updates to the Models library and Connectors library can be made manually by adding and editing items, or items can be imported into dctrack. See Managing the Models and Connectors Libraries (on page 174) for more information. Within libraries, depending on the items they contain, images of the items can be added to make item identification easier. The following libraries are available in dctrack: Models library Connectors library SNMP library 172

181 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Filter and Sort Libraries Both the Models library and the SNMP library can be filtered and sorted based on criteria you select in the Filter by and Sort by drop-downs. In addition to these criteria, you can define an = variable to the filter and sort criteria. The available = variable selections vary based on the sort by and filter by criteria you select. The selections you apply to the filter and sort criteria are reflected on the page once they are made. Navigating through Library Items To navigate through the items in the library: Use the First, Previous, Next and Last navigation icons. 173

182 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Managing the Models and Connectors Libraries Models Library The Models library contains all of the models associated with each item class and information on the manufacturers who make the models. For example, all of the network types available in dctrack, such as CISCO routers, are contained in the Models library. From the Models library you can view model item details such as item class, manufacturer, item type and so on in the Model Details section of the page. You can also add, edit and view images of the model item, view screw hole locations, comm port and power port details for the item, and view front and rear item image detail information. Model information can be added manually or imported into dctrack. Once images are added for items, Test View can be used to review the image in a secondary browser window. Items in the library can also be copied and pasted into other applications. See Copying Model and Connector Library Items (on page 177). To access the Models library: Select Administration > Libraries > Models. To view model details: Select a model in the left section of the page and the details are displayed in the Model Details section of the page on the right. To view front and rear image details: 1. Select the model item you want to view image details for. 2. Click the Info buttons in the Front and Rear section of the page. 174

183 Connectors Library Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators The Connectors library in dctrack contains all of the connector types that can be used by items in the data center. From the Connectors library you can view connector details such as type (comm or power), attribute (male, female, plug, receptacle, or jack), and so on in the Connector Details section of the page. Connectors can be added to the library and existing connectors can be edited or deleted. See Adding, Editing and Deleting Model and Connector Library Items (on page 175). You can also add, edit and view images of connectors. Once images are added for connectors, they can be copied and pasted into other applications. See Copying Model and Connector Library Items (on page 177). dctrack also allows you to define and edit connectors that are compatible with each other, as well as define and edit connection cords that work with a connector. To access the Connectors library: Select Administration > Libraries > Connectors. To view connector details and images: Select a connector in the left section of the page. The details and an image of the connector (if available) are displayed in the Connector Details section of the page on the right. To define compatible connectors: 1. From the first drop-down in the Connector Compatibility List section of the page, select the connector you want to define a compatible connector for. 2. In the second drop-down, select the compatible connector. 3. Select the cord used to make the connection. 4. Click Add. The compatible connection information is added to the list of compatible connectors. To define connection cords for connectors: 1. From the first drop-down box in the Connection Cords section of the page, select the type of connection, either comm or power. 2. Select the color of the cord in the second drop-down. 3. Enter a description of the cord in the text box next to the drop-downs. 4. Click Add. The cord is added to the cord list. Adding, Editing and Deleting Model and Connector Library Items To add an item: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > [Library Name]. 175

184 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 2. In the library, click Add. The Detail section of the page is now active. 3. Enter or select the model details. The details and required fields for the item vary depending on the model item class or connector item type that is selected. 4. If applicable, use the Paste command to insert front and rear images of the model or connector. To do this: a. On your local machine or server, locate the image you want use. Images must be in BMP format. b. Copy the image to the Windows Clipboard. c. In dctrack, click Paste in either the Front or Rear sections of the Add library item page. The Paste Special dialog appears. Click OK. 5. Click Save. To edit an item: 1. Click on the item to be edited. 2. Click Edit. The Detail section of the page is now active. 3. Make changes as needed and/or update images as needed. 4. Click Save. To delete an item: 1. Click on the item to be deleted. 2. Click Delete and then click Yes on the confirmation message. Importing Model Libraries You are able to import additional models into the Models library. Models are imported from existing libraries stored on your network and provided by Raritan. Note: The import may take some time to complete depending on the size of the import. To import models into the Models library: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > Models. 2. Click Import. 3. Use the Browse feature on the Library Import dialog to locate the master library file the model(s) are imported from. Alternatively, select the "Re-import models that I deleted from My Library" checkbox to import only previously deleted models. 4. Click Begin. 176

185 Identifying Models Missing from the Library Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators You can identify items that do not exist in the Raritan library by following the beginning steps of the import process. This allows you to identify models based on your spreadsheet that do not exist in the library. To identify missing library models: 1. Download and import the latest available library. See Importing Model Libraries (on page 176). 2. Select Administration > Wizards > Import to run the dctrack Import Wizard. Import the spreadsheet that contains your latest inventory of data center assets including, at a minimum, their make and model. Note: Use the Raritan provided import templates if you do not have a spreadsheet of your assets. 3. Proceed through the field mapping process and skip all the spreadsheet columns until you reach the Make and Model columns in your spreadsheet. Map each field accordingly. Once the Model field is mapped, a list of models that do not match models in the library is displayed. 4. Review the items in the list on the left by selecting each model and find a close match to it from the library list on the right. If you find a model that is a close match in the library, click Match button and that model is removed from the list on the left. Once you complete the matching process, the models from your spreadsheet that don t exist in the library remain. 5. Click Export to export these remaining models to a.csv file. A message shows you the file path where this has been saved. Use the file as a guide to add these items into your library or send the.csv file to Raritan to request that the models to be added to the master library. Copying Model and Connector Library Items Items in the Models library and Connectors library can be copied and pasted into other applications such as MS-Word, PhotoShop, and so on. To copy an image: 1. Click on the model you want to copy. 2. Click Copy. 3. Paste the image into the application of your choosing, such as MS-Word, PhotoShop, and so on. 177

186 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Test Viewing Model Item Images Once you add images of items to the Models library, use the Test View feature to review the item image. To use test view: 1. Add an image for an item or select an item that already has an image associated with it. 2. Click the Test View button. The image opens in a secondary browser window. Managing the SNMP Library Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standardized network protocol used to monitor devices, such as PDUs, that are attached to a network. The SNMP library contains a list of items currently monitored by dctrack via SNMP. The SNMP library also contains information on the MIB browsers that are used by the SNMP network to query the items on the network, as well as MIB library manufacturer information. You are able to unlink and link items to MIB libraries from the SNMP library. You are also able add, edit and delete MIB library information in addition to adding and editing MIB library, browser and object details. SNMP Library To access the SNMP library: Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. To view MIB library browser and object details: In the MIB Library section of the page, click on the library you want to view details for. Browser and object details are displayed in the MIB Browser and Object Details section of the page. Linking and Unlinking Items to MIB Libraries To unlink or link items to a library: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. 2. Select a model from the list on the left side of the page. 3. In the MIB Library section of the page, click on the library you want to link the model to or unlink it from. 4. Click Link to MIB to link the item to the MIB library or Unlink from MIB to unlink the item from the MIB library. Viewing Item Details in the MIB Library To view MIB library browser and object details: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. 178

187 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 2. In the MIB Library section of the page, click on the library you want to view details for. Browser and object details are displayed in the MIB Browser and Object Details section of the page. Adding, Loading, Editing and Deleting MIB Library Items To add a MIB item to a library: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. 2. In the MIB Library section of the page, click on the item you want to add to the MIB library. 3. Select the item class, enter a name for the MIB and select the item's manufacturer. 4. Click Add. The item is added to the MIB library. To load a MIB library: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. 2. In the MIB Library section of the page, click Load. 3. Locate the.txt or.mib library, select the it and click Save. To edit a MIB library item: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. 2. In the MIB Library section of the page, click on the item you want to edit. 3. Click Edit. 4. Edit the item class, name for the MIB or the item's manufacturer. 5. Click Update. To delete a MIB library item: 1. Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. 2. In the MIB Library section of the page, click on the item you want to delete. 3. Click Delete. 4. Click Yes to confirm the deletion. 179

188 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Lists Lists are maintained by administrators and work in conjunction with libraries as a tool to manage the information collected in and maintained by dctrack. Items can be added to lists and edited as needed to fulfill your specific requirements. dctrack provides you with a warning when list items are being used by the application in order to avoid corrupting data if you intend to edit the item. However, you are still able to edit items, if needed. Items can be deleted if they are not being used by the application. If the item is being used, a message is displayed in the Add/Edit List Item section of the page and the Delete button is disabled. In order to delete the item, you must first remove it from every application record that is currently using it. To select a list and view its list items: 1. Select Administration > Lists. 2. In the Lists section of the page, click on the list you want to view. The list items are displayed in the List Contents section of the page. The Add/Edit List Item section displays the number of times the item is used by the application and a description of the item. List Types List type Application Criticality, Application Names and Application Sites Cabinet Groupings Colors DNS Suffix List Domains Item Function Description Used in the IT Items\Device page for Application tracking. For making logical groups of cabinets. Used in the IT Items\Cabinets, Visualize\Elevations and IP Subnets pages. For color coding of ports and IP Subnets. Used in all Item pages for color coding ports. Used in IP Subnets page for color coding subnets. Is a suffix added to the Name of a server to create the DNS name for that server. Used in the IP Subnets page. Used in the IT Items\Device page to identify the Domain of a server. Used to identify the function of an Item. Used in all Item pages. 180

189 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators List type Item Type Media/AWG Operating System Port Protocol, Port Speed Rack PDU Fuses Service Level Agreement Subnets/VLANs T/H Probe Locations User Departments Custom Field Headings Virtual Machine Clusters Description Used to identify the Type of an Item. Used in all Item pages. Used to tag Comm ports with the communications cabling grade or Power Outlet ports with the electrical cable gauge. Used to identify the OS of a server in the IT Items\Device page. Used to identify a Comm port's Protocol and Data Rate. Used in the Comm Ports section of all Item pages. Used to identify the Fuse or Circuit Breaker within a Rack PDU. Used in the Power Item\Rack PDU page. For identifying the SLA of a particular item. Used in all Item Detail 2 pages. Used to identify logical names of subnets and to build the full name of a subnet. Used in the IP Subnets page and for tagging all Comm Ports. Used to identify the approximate location within a cabinet for the Temperature or Humidity Probes. Used in the Power Item\Rack PDU and Environmental Item\Probe pages. To identify the ownership of a Device Item or an application usage. Used for creating custom fields for use with all items or applied to specific item classes. Appears on item Detail 2 pages. See Working with Custom Fields (on page 182). For identifying the Cluster that a VM or a VM host belongs to. Used in the IT Items\Device page. Adding, Editing and Deleting List Items To add an item to a list: 1. Click Administration > Lists to open the Lists page. 2. In the Lists section of the page, click on the list you want to add the item to. 3. Click Add. 4. In the Add/Edit List Item section of the page, enter a name for the item. Required 181

190 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 5. Enter a description of the item. 6. Enter any additional information as needed and where applicable. The information that can be entered varies depending on the list you are adding it to. 7. Click Save. To edit a list item: 1. In the Lists section of the page, click on the list that contains the item you want to edit. 2. In the List Contents section of the page, click on the item you want to edit. 3. Click Edit. 4. In the Add/Edit List Item section of the page, edit the name or description as needed. 5. Edit any additional as needed and as allowed by the application. 6. Click Save. To delete a list item: 1. In the Lists section of the page, click on the list that contains the item you want to delete. 2. In the List Contents section of the page, click on the item you want to delete. 3. If the item is being used by an application record, the Delete button is disabled and you cannot delete it until you remove the item from each record that is using it. 4. If the item is not being used by an application record, click Delete. Working with Custom Fields You are able to create custom fields to associate with item classes and appear on the Detail 2 page for those items. For example, you can create a custom field called Patch Level to capture the patch level information for a server device. Since custom fields are associated with specific item classes, they appear on the Detail 2 pages of the item classes they are associated with. So, if you have a custom field called Firmware that is applied to Networks, that field only appears on Network item Detail 2 pages. Custom fields that launch web browsers or open Windows Explorer can also be created for the Detail 2 pages. This feature functions much like using the Windows Start\Run command line. 182

191 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Creating Custom Fields To create a custom field: 1. Click Administration > Lists to open the Lists page. 2. In the Lists section of the page, click Custom List Fields. 3. Click Add. 4. In the Add/Edit List Item section of the page, enter a name for the field. Up to 25 characters can be used for the field name. Required 5. Select an item class to associate the field with. 6. Click Save. 7. If needed, click Apply to All to apply the field to all of the item Detail 2 pages for the selected class. Reordering Custom Fields on Detail 2 Pages From the Custom Fields Heading list, you can change the order in which the fields appear on the item class Detail 2 pages. Since custom fields are associated with a specific item class, you can only change their order within that item class. For example, if Patch Level and OS Version custom fields are applied to the Device item class and a field called Firmware is associated with the Network item class, you are only able to move the Device class fields up or down in the order they appear. Clicking on and trying to move the Firmware custom field does not work because it is not associated with the same class and, thus, won't appear on the Device item class Detail 2 pages. To change the order in which custom fields appear on a Detail 2 page: 1. Click Administration > Lists to open the Lists page. 2. In the Lists section of the page, click Custom List Fields. 183

192 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 3. Using the Move Up and Move Down buttons for this list, define how custom fields are ordered on the dctrack Item pages. Deleting Unused Custom Fields Deleting unused custom fields is different from deleting the custom field from the application permanently. See Adding, Editing and Deleting List Items (on page 181). This function removes the fields from the Detail pages on which they appear but are not being used. For example, if you created a custom field called Patch Version and applied to both device items and network items but wanted to delete it from the network items since it is not being used, this function allows you to so. To delete unused custom fields: 1. Click Administration > Lists to open the Lists page. 2. In the Lists section of the page, click Custom List Fields. 3. Click Delete Unused Custom Fields. User Management in Classic View dctrack users are created and maintained in the dctrack Web Client. See Add, Edit and Delete Users (on page 127) for more details. The teams users are assigned to are created in Classic View. See Teams (on page 184). Since users must be assigned to a team to use dctrack, it is recommended that teams be created before user accounts but this is not required in order to create user accounts. If you need to edit user information, aside from changing the user's unit of measure and clearing their sort history, you must do so in the Web Client. See Create Users (on page 124). Teams Teams are used to organize users within dctrack. Teams are defined and maintained by Gatekeepers in the dctrack Classic View and are assigned to users during the user creation process in the dctrack interfacedctrack Web Client. Note: It is recommended that teams be created before user accounts but this is not required in order to create user accounts. Adding Teams To add a team: 1. In the dctrack Windows Client, select Administration > Users to open Users page. 2. In the Teams section, enter a name for the team in the first field and description of the team in the second field. Required 3. Click Update. The team is added to the list and is available in the Team drop-down in the User Details section of the page. 184

193 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Editing and Deleting Teams To edit a team: 1. In the dctrack Windows Client, select Administration > Users to open Users page. 2. Click on the gray record box of the team you want to edit. 3. Edit the name or description of the team as needed. 4. Click Update. To delete a team: 1. Click on the gray record box of the team you want to delete. 2. Click Delete and then click Yes on the confirmation. Managing User Settings and Clearing a User's Sort Order User settings refers to the unit of measure and the default site the user is associated with. Units of measure can be either U.S. or metric measurements and apply to all measurements captured in dctrack such as cabinet height, item weight, and so on. U.S. is the default setting. The default site is the site that is automatically selected each time dctrack is launched. Users can switch to any other site in the database at any time. If this default site setting is not set for a user, the default application site is automatically selected each time dctrack is launched. You can also clear a user's sort order from the User Settings section of the page. To change user settings: 1. In the dctrack Classic View, click Administration > Users. 2. On the User page, click on the name of the user you want to modify settings for. 3. Click Edit. 4. In the User Settings section of the page, define the following settings: a. Units displayed in - US measurements or metric measurements. b. Default Site - the default site the user is associated with. c. If needed, click Clear to clear the user's sort order. 5. Click Save. To clear a user's sort order: 1. Click Administration > Users. 185

194 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 2. On the User page, click on the name of the user you want to modify settings for. 3. Click Edit. 4. In the User Settings section of the page, click Clear. 5. Click Save. Viewing User Activity Reports To view an activity report for a user: 1. In the dctrack Windows Client, select Administration > Users to open Users page. 2. Click on the name of the user for whom you want to view an activity report. 3. In the User Activity Report section of the page, select the type of report you would like to view: a. Summary Report - the user's session start and end times, as well as the duration of the session. b. Detailed Report - the user's session start and end times, the duration of the session, and the action the user performed in the application. 4. Select the user or users you want to include in the report: a. Selected User - only information on the currently selected user is included in the report. b. All Users - all users are included in the report. 5. Click Preview. The report opens in a secondary browser window. Right click and select Print to print the report. 186

195 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Using snmptrack Poller snmptrack Poller polls SNMP-capable items in your data center, collects data from them, and stores the data in a historical database. snmptrack Poller collects the following item data: Current Temperature Humidity CPU utilization Disk usage This information is used in the snmptrack report (Reports > snmptrack) to plot the readings for the polled items over a defined time period. See snmptrack Report (on page 311). Additionally, the data that is captured is used to update the item's Detail page. In order for an item to be polled, the following criteria must be met: A comm port with a valid IP address and a SNMP community string must be defined for the item A MIB must be defined and mapped to the item model You must dedicate a client installation to run snmptrack Poller because you are not able to use any other dctrack features when snmptrack Poller is running. In order to ensure there are no gaps in the collected data, do not stop the snmptrack Poller once it has begun. snmptrack Poller collects data from the site that is selected from the Poller Site drop-down on the snmptrack page. If you are collecting data for other sites, install dctrack on a client for those sites and use that installation to run snmptrack Poller. If an error occurs during the snmptrack polling process, it is logged in the snmptrack.log file without affecting the polling process. This log file is found in your C:\program files\dctrack folder on the machine where the poller is running. If there are errors, a message is shown in the snmptrack Poller page. To begin the snmptrack Poller process: 1. Select the site you want to poll from the Poller Site drop-down. 2. In the Polling Interval section, enter the polling interval measured in seconds. 3. In the Poller Readings section, select the data readings you would like fetched during the snmptrack polling. 187

196 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 4. Click Start Poller. The progress of the poll is displayed using the Poll Cycle Progress bar. Creating a SNMP MIB Definition For each item model you want to collect data from via SNMP, you need to create an SNMP MIB definition. Note: All equipment from a manufacturer that uses the same MIB can share the same dctrack MIB definition. To create an SNMP MIB Definition: 1. From the SNMP library: a. Select Administration > Libraries > SNMP. b. Add a MIB definition in the MIB Library section of the page. c. Load a MIB file that is provided by the item manufacturer. d. Once the MIB is loaded, you can browse in the MIB Browser and Object Details section of the page. e. Identify the MIB OID that contains the data you want and select it in the browser. The details of this OID branch are shown in the lower right section of the page. f. From the Link OID to dctrack drop-down, select the dctrack field that corresponds to the OID value. 188

197 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Note: If you want to select a custom field, type the name of the custom field into the drop-down. If the custom field already exists, it is added. If the field is not found, you are prompted by the application to create it. Create the field if needed. g. Select a value in the Index Start drop-down. The index is a value that is added to the end of the OID to create the full OID used to query the item. For example, if querying amps for all receptacles of a rack PDU, then the Index Start would be the last digit in the OID for the first receptacle. dctrack then increments the index for each receptacle that exists for that particular rack PDU. h. Select a multiplication factor to correct the unit. For example, the amps value in MIB is stored in milliamps and must be multiplied by to store the value as amps in dctrack. i. Once all fields are mapped, link the MIB definition with all the models that use it by selecting the MIB in the MIB Library section and then selecting all the models you want to link to the MIB (use Ctrl and Shift keys for multiple selections). Click Link. Repeat the process for other MIBs. 2. From an item page such as a Rack PDU page: a. Add a Comm Port. b. Provide the IP address and SNMP Community Name. c. Click Get Readings to get a new SNMP reading. 189

198 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Import Wizard The Import Wizard imports items, comm circuit connections and power circuit connections into the dctrack database from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or a.csv file. Imports can be done for new installations, and to bulk update items and connections that already exist in dctrack. It is recommended that you import cabinets into dctrack before you import the items that are contained in the cabinets. The import works by mapping spreadsheet column headings to dctrack fields and pulling in the item data that appears in the cells of the spreadsheet under each column. You can save the data in Excel format at any time during the import process using the Save As feature. This ensures that there is no data loss or wasted effort if you need to stop the import process before it completes. You can resume the import later by selecting the saved spreadsheet as the new import source file. There are data formatting requirements that need to be applied to your spreadsheets in order to ensure the data is imported successfully with minimal intervention required. Raritan provides you with spreadsheet templates that you can download in order to ensure you follow the correct format. See Import Wizard Templates (on page 192). However, you can import spreadsheets that are not based on the Raritan templates. These spreadsheets must follow certain formatting requirements in order to ensure they are successfully imported. See Data Formatting Requirements (on page 192). 190

199 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Import Wizard Interface Access the Import page by selecting Administration > Wizards > Import. The Import page is made up of three areas divided by function - a data table, a field match panel and an import panel. Import Page 191

200 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Diagram key Data table - This section contains spreadsheet data that is being imported. This section remains visible throughout the wizard steps,, allowing you to refer to it in order to ensure any changes made during the import do not affect the data in the source file. Data can be sorted by each column. To do this, place the cursor in any cell under the desired column and click the Sort Order icon in the upper right corner of the page. Field match panel - Contains a list of the items being imported and the items they are matched to in dctrack. Import wizard panel - Opens once the source spreadsheet is selected and contains the pages of each wizard step as you move through each step. Import Wizard Templates Raritan, Inc. has spreadsheet templates available that you can download from the Raritan FTP site. These templates can be used to ensure you correctly format data for import into dctrack. Contact Raritan Sales if you have not already been given access to this FTP site to download the templates. Data Formatting Requirements Following are Microsoft Excel and CSV file data formatting requirements that must be followed in order to successfully import the spreadsheet data into dctrack. Note: dctrack does not support.xlsx file formats for Microsoft Excel It is recommended you first import cabinets into dctrack and then import the items and connections associated with the cabinets. It is also recommended that you name the spreadsheet columns the same as they are listed in the tables contained in this section of help in order to avoid being prompted during the import process to manually map headings-to-fields. 192

201 General Spreadsheet Requirements The following rules apply to all spreadsheets. Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators The first row cannot be empty and must contain the column headings that are mapped to dctrack fields. If the first row is empty, dctrack generates generic column heading names such as Heading 1, Heading 2 and so on. These headings then have to be mapped manually to corresponding dctrack fields. Each spreadsheet can contain up to 50 columns. If the spreadsheet has more than 50 columns, split the additional columns into another file. Cabinet Import Requirements It is recommended that you first import only the cabinet information so you have a structure in place in which to populate the items that are contained in each cabinet. If you do not have the cabinets imported first, you must manually add them. Note: In order to avoid being prompted to manually map columns-to-fields during the import process, make sure your spreadsheet columns are named in the same way as they appear in this table. Column name/item Class Description Required column. When importing cabinets, this column always contains the value Cabinet/Rack. If class is not included, a cabinet item is created using the name listed in the Cabinet column. Item Name Required column. This column contains the cabinet name. If the item name is not included, a cabinet item is created using the name listed in the Cabinet column. Alias Optional column. 193

202 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Cabinet Description Required column. Leave this column blank. Rail or Slot Position Required column. Front Direction Make Model RU Height Type Leave this column blank. Optional column. Use the values North, South, East and West to indicate the direction that the cabinet front points to with respect to the data center room's North point. Required column. This column contains the cabinet make. If the make is not included, a cabinet item is created using the name listed in the Cabinet column. Required column. Model names must be unique. If the model is not included, a cabinet item is created using the name listed in the Cabinet column. For example, if you have two types of cabinets made by Dell from the same product family but one is 40 U and the other is 42 U, create two model names such as Dell Cabinet 40U and Dell Cabinet 42U. The number of rack units in the cabinet. Optional column. Use the values Cabinet or Rack. Function System Admin System Admin Team User Department Cabinet Grouping Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Used to manage cabinets in logical groups. Enter the name of the group that a cabinet belongs to. 194

203 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Description Cabinet Grid Location Optional column. Cabinet Row Label Cabinet Position in Row Serial Number Asset Tag Purchase Price Purchase Date Installation Date Contract Number Contract Amount Contract Begins On Warranty Expiration Date SLA Profile Comment Custom Field The grid location that the cabinet falls in when using raised floor tiles as a grid consisting of letters on one axis and numbers on the other. Optional column. The label of the row that the cabinet is in. If using numbers, precede it with zeros so all row numbers have the same number of digits. Optional column. Indicates the position of the cabinet within the row. Position 1 should begin from the same end for all rows with the same orientation. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. This column can be mapped repeatedly for as many custom fields as you need up to a maximum of 50 columns. If the spreadsheet has more than 50 columns, split the additional custom fields into another file and include the required columns in red above. 195

204 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Item Import Requirements Once cabinets exist in dctrack, you can import the items that are contained in each cabinet. Note: In order to avoid being prompted to manually map columns-to-fields during the import process, make sure your spreadsheet columns are named in the same way as they appear in this table. Note: Power Supply fields identified with an asterisk must all be mapped together. You cannot map a subset of these columns. Column name/item Applies to... Description Class All items Required column. The class must be one of the following: Device Network Comm panel Power outlet Rack PDU PDU UPS CRAC Passive chassis Device class includes all servers, disks, tapes, blade devices, blade server 196

205 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Applies to... Description chassis and all other hosts. Network class includes all switches, routers, firewalls, KVM switches and other network appliances. Comm panel class includes any patch panel for communications cabling. Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. Power outlet class includes outlets under a raised floor or above the cabinets. Passive class are horizontal wire managers. Item Name All items Required column. Alias All items Optional column. Cabinet All items Required column. If it is easier, you can use a separate spreadsheet for each Item Class. This is the name of the cabinet that contains the item. Note: Cabinets must exist in dctrack in to map items to them. Rail or Slot Position All items Required column. The number of the rail position the item is installed on. The position is based on the bottom most rack unit of the item. Make All items Required column. For a zero-u rack PDU, enter the rail position that is nearest to the bottom of the rack PDU. The item's manufacturer. Model All items Required column. The item's model name or number. Use 197

206 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item RU Height Applies to... Front Direction Floor-standing items Orientation in Cabinet Side in Cabinet Description the full name of a model and include a product family name. For example, for an HP server, use Proliant DL380 G5, rather than just DL380 G5. Network items Optional column. Rackable items ZeroU items Chassis Name Device and network items Network Stack Name The number of rack units of the item (that is, the item's height in the cabinet in rack units). If the model doesn't already exist in dctrack's Model library, you need to provide the RU height for each model you have to add. Optional column. Use the values North, South, East or West to indicate the direction the cabinet front points to in respect to the data center room's North. Optional column. Use the values Item Front Faces Cabinet Front or Item Rear Faces the Cabinet Front. Optional column. Use the values Left or Right to indicate the location of a vertically mounted item in the rear of the cabinet. Optional column. When dealing with blade devices or chassis style switches, indicate the name of the chassis that contains the blades. Use this column to enter the name of the chassis. You must also enter a separate row for the chassis, keeping this column blank for chassis' entry. A row for the chassis must be included even if the chassis already exists in the database. Network items Optional column. If you have a situation where several switches are connected together in a 198

207 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Network Stack Number Applies to... Description network stack or subnet, use this column. Enter the name of the stack or subnet in this column for each switch. Unlike chassis based switches, you do not need a separate row for the name of the stack. Network items Optional column. Type All items Optional column. Function All items Optional column. System Admin All items System Admin Team User Department All items All items Serial Number All items This is the number given to each stack and is appended to the end of the network stack name to form a unique item name. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Asset Tag All items Optional column. Purchase Price Purchase Date Installation Date Contract Number Contract Amount Contract Begin Date Warranty Expiration Date All items All items All items All items All items All items All items Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. SLA Profile All items Optional column. 199

208 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Operating System Applies to... Device and network items Description Optional column. Domain Device items Optional column. OSI Layer Network items Optional column. VM Cluster Device items Optional column. VM DataStore Location VM DataStore Volume Rack PDU Group Name Number in the Group Device items Device items Rack PDU class Rack PDU class Network items that identify the OSI layer as the primary function of the item. Virtual machines or virtual machine hosts into a VM cluster. Required column (when importing virtual machines) The physical machine on which the VM's datastore file is located. Required column (when importing virtual machines) The volume on the physical machine on which the VM's datastore file is located. Optional column. Use this field to group many rack PDUs that exist in a cabinet. Optional column. Custom Field All items Optional column. Comm Port Quantity Comm ports Use this field to assign a Rack PDU a number to identify it among others in the group. This column can be mapped repeatedly for as many custom fields as you need (up to the maximum number of 50 columns supported by the import process). Optional column. Use this field for all items (except for comm panel items) that can have a comm port. This field indicates the number of communications ports to be created. During the import process, you specify 200

209 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Applies to... Description the attributes of the port such as the connector, media and speed. Create additional columns for each type of comm port and fill the column with the quantity of ports. Power Supply Name Prefix* Power Supply Quantity* Power Supply Connector* Power Supply Input Phase* Power Supply Voltage* Power Supply Nameplate Watts* Power Supply Budget Watts* Power ports Power ports Power ports Power ports Power ports Power ports Power ports Optional column. Contains the power supply ports for the items. The typical value is PS. For example, if the quantity column contains the value of 2, two Power ports are created and named PS1 and PS2. Optional column. The total number of the item's power supplies. Optional column. Optional column. Enter either Single-Phase, Three-Phase (Wye) or Three-Phase(Delta). Optional column. The voltage capability of the item. If the item can operate on both 120 and 240 volts, enter 120~240V. Otherwise enter either 120V or 240V. Note: This is not the actual voltage the power supply is running at. The voltage is determined by what the item is connected to. Optional column. The power supply nameplate rating as found on the manufacturer's data sheet for the item. Optional column. The estimated power value the item is expected not to exceed (that is, the derated power). dctrack reserves this much power for 201

210 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Applies to... Description the item from the power supplied to the cabinet. Typically, this value can be derived from the nameplate power using a derating factor of 50% to 70%. Power Supply Power Factor* Power Supply Redundancy Power ports Power ports Optional column. If not specified in the manufacturer's data sheet, enter 1. Optional column. Comment All items Optional column. Indicates the redundancy level of the power supplies for an item. Enter this as N+x, where x is a number from 1 to N-1 that indicates the number of extra or redundant supplies. N is the total number of power supplies. Most servers with two power supplies require only one supply to operate, so you would enter N+1. If extra or redundant power supplies are required or the item has only one, enter N. Create more columns to track additional data about the item as needed up to the maximum of 50 total columns per spreadsheet. These columns are imported as custom fields. * All column names with an asterisk indicate that the columns must be included together in the spreadsheet. 202

211 Comm Circuit Import Requirements Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators For comm circuits, each row after the first row in a spreadsheet must correlate to a dctrack comm circuit consisting of up to 8 endpoints: 2 endpoints one at the beginning of the connection and one at the end, plus 3 hops of 2 endpoints each. The data must include columns for the item name and port name for each endpoint. Optionally, you can include the connection type and label for the connection between endpoint pairs. The item and port name columns should contain the name of items and ports that match existing item and port names in dctrack. Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. 203

212 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators When you are creating a hop for comm circuits, you only need to define the near end since the circuit's port defines what it is connected to. For example, CommPanelA in CabinetA terminates at CommPanelB in CabinetB. When you are defining this hop in Import Wizard, you only need to define CommPanelA and the port. CommPanelB is implicit. Note: You cannot use a single file that includes a variety of hop quantities for each circuit. Make one file for all circuits that use no cabling hops, one file for those that have only one hop, one file for those with 2 hops and one file for those with 3 hops. Note: In order to avoid being prompted to manually map columns-to-fields during the import process, make sure your spreadsheet columns are named in the same way as they appear in this table. Column name/item Description Starting Item Required column. The name of the item at the beginning of the circuit. A comm circuit can only begin with the following classes: Device Network Probe Rack PDU PDU UPS CRAC Starting Port Name Required column. Cord 1 Type Circuits can only end with a device or network item. If a circuit begins with a network item, it must also end with a network item. When a circuit involves a device and a network item, always begin with the device and end with the network item. The name of the port that is used in the circuit. Optional column. Column for tracking the type of patch cord used between the starting port and the next hop. For example, cord type can be Red Patch Cord and Cross-over Patch Cord. 204

213 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Description Cord 1 ID Hop 1: Near End Panel Name Optional column. Column for the patch cord label/id. Optional column. If structured cabling is used, enter the name of the patch panel that connects to the starting port. If there are no patch panel names, create a name. Use the name of the cabinets followed by a number or letter to indicate the panel number in the cabinet. You can separate the two with a dash for readability. For example, the second patch panel in a cabinet that is called C33 would be C33-2. If the port numbers in the panel are not unique within the data center, the panel name in combination with the port name makes the port name unique. You must provide a panel name even though port names are unique. Note: Each cable hop consists of two panel pairs with a permanent cabling between them. The other panel is referred to as the far end panel when the perspective is the starting item. The far end panel name is not required because the structured cabling layout must be pre-entered into dctrack before importing connections. Do not confuse the far end panel with the Hop 2 column. Hop 2 is used when a second pair of panels is involved in a circuit. Hop 1: Port Name Optional column. The patch panel port name is typically the cable ID. If there are no cable IDs or the panel ports are not labeled, use the manufacturer port numbers of the panel. For example, for a 48-port patch panel, number the ports 1 through 48. Make sure you distinguish the port numbering sequence. Port order may go from left to right for the first row of ports, then go to the next row below it (following the shape of the letter Z). Alternately, they may go from the top port to port below it then over to the next top port and the one below that and so on (following the shape of a reverse letter N). Cord 2 Type Optional column. This is an optional column for tracking the type of 205

214 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Description patch cord used between the hop 1 port and the next hop. Cord 2 ID Hop 2: Near End Panel Name Optional column. Optional column. See hop 1 above in the table. Hop 2 is rarely used, but if the circuit travels through several panels, enter it using the Hop 2 panel name and port column pair. Note: This is not the far end panel of hop 1. Hop 2: Port Name Cord 3 Type Cord 3 ID Hop 3: Near End Panel Name Hop 3: Port Name Cord 4 Type Cord 4 ID Ending Item Name Ending Port If no circuit has a second or third hop, you can delete those columns along with their Cord Type and Cord ID columns to make the spreadsheet easier to work with. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Optional column. Required column. The name of the item at the end of the circuit. A comm circuit can end with a device or network item only. If a circuit begins with a network item, it must also end with a network item. Required column. 206

215 Power Circuit Import Requirements Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators For power circuit spreadsheets, each row after the first row must correlate to a dctrack power circuit consisting of only two endpoints. Endpoints are the power supply on the item, and the existing power outlet or rack PDU. It is important to designate the power supply as the starting item/port, and the power outlet or rack PDU as the ending item/port. The wizard imports power connections between the item's power supply port (starting item) and what it connects to, either a rack PDU or a power outlet (ending item). The remainder of the electrical circuit, for example the rack PDU to power outlet to breaker, must already be defined in dctrack. The data must include columns for the item name and port for each of the two endpoints. Optionally, you can include the connection type and label for the connection between the two endpoints. The Item and Port Name columns should contain the name of the items and ports that match the existing item and port names in dctrack. Note: In order to avoid being prompted to manually map columns-to-fields during the import process, make sure your spreadsheet columns are named in the same way as they appear in this table. Column name/item Starting Item Name Starting Port Name Cord Type Description Required column. The name of the item at the start of the circuit. A power circuit can only begin with the following classes: Device Network Probe Required column. The name of the port used by the circuit. For example, the name of the power supply such as PS1 or PS2. Optional column. 207

216 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Cord ID Ending Item Name Ending Port Name Description This is an optional column for tracking the type of power cord used between the starting port and the next hop. For example, the cord type is IEC-309-C13/IEC-309-C14 Generic Power Cord. Optional column. An optional column for the patch cord label. Required column. The ending item can be either a rack PDU or a power outlet. Specify this in the last column, which is Ending Item Type. If the item is connected through a rack PDU, enter the rack PDU name and the rack PDU socket number in the next column. If the item is connected to a power outlet under the floor or overhead directly, skip the rack PDU columns. Typically, the sockets on a rack PDU are not numbered, so it is important to develop a numbering convention for the sockets. For example, call the socket that is nearest to the input cord Socket 1. Another convention is to number the sockets based on an orientation. For example, from top to bottom or from bottom to top when the rack PDU is vertically mounted, or from left to right when it is horizontally mounted. If the item is connected directly to a power outlet, this column indicates the name of the power outlet that is typically under the raised floor or above the cabinet. The outlet is typically named based on the power panel and breaker poles that feed it. For example, an outlet fed from panel PP2 in PDU 1A and uses the breaker in Poles 5,7 is called PDU1A/PP2-5,7. Required column. This is the name of the receptacle in the rack PDU or in the power outlet. Typically, it is called Output01 for a Rack PDU or Socket1, Recp1 or R1 for a power outlet. In most data centers, a power outlet has only one 208

217 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Column name/item Description receptacle. Ending Item Type Required column. Specifies whether the end item is a rack PDU or a power outlet. 209

218 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Probe and Rack PDU Import Requirements Use the Import wizard to import rack PDUs and probes in you data center into dctrack. This is useful if you are importing a large number of PX2s (as rack PDUs) or EMXs (as probes), and the asset sensors they are connected to. Note: It is recommended that you import cabinets into dctrack before you import the items that are contained in the cabinets. Once added, dctrack allows you to monitor your devices and provide location information on each asset at the rack level using asset management sensors. See Integrating dctrack with Asset Sensors, EMX and PX2 (see "Integrating dctrack with Asset Management Sensors via EMX or PX2" on page 377) for additional information. The following information is required in order to bulk import PX2 and EMX devices, and their asset management sensors to dctrack: Class Item Name Cabinet Rail or Slot Position RU Height Make Model IP addresses - these are required in order for the device and asset management sensor information to synch with PowerIQ once they are added to dctrack. The IP address is also used to locate the device on the network. Proxy Index - this is needed only if the IP address is used more than once. 210

219 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Importing Data Some fields are mandatory in dctrack. During the import process, dctrack prompts you to either add these fields to the source spreadsheet or to map them to existing cells in the source spreadsheet. You must either map or skip each field in order to move on to the next step of the Import Wizard. If corrections are needed, you can go back in the import process by pressing the Back button and moving one filed at a time. To import data from a spreadsheet or CSV file into dctrack: 1. Select Administration > Wizards > Import. 2. In the "Select a file to import from" section of the page, click Browse. Locate the source file and click Open in the "Select a file to import" dialog. Click Next. 3. In the Import Wizards section, select the type of import - Items with Ports as Quantities, Comm Circuits or Power Circuits. 4. From the Import all Items to this Site drop-down, select the site you are importing the data for. Click Next. The data from the spreadsheet is displayed in the data table at the top of the page and each column, along with the dctrack field it is mapped to, is displayed in the field match panel at the bottom left of the page. If dctrack has successfully mapped each of the spreadsheet column headings to a field in dctrack, the "You've successfully mapped this field! Click Next." message is displayed at the bottom of the page. Additionally, all of the field values are listed in the "Available values in dctrack for field" box in the import panel on the bottom left of the page. Click Next. If dctrack could not map a spreadsheet column heading to a dctrack field, you must do one of the following: a. Skip the field by selecting the "Skip column" checkbox. OR b. Manually select and map the fields to a dctrack field listed in the "Map to dctrack field" drop-down. Use the Add function to add the field or Map to map the field. dctrack prompts you to enter related information for each field. Required information is indicated by a red asterisk (*). You are able select multiple items (with the exception of Models) using Ctrl and/or Shift. 5. After the last field is matched or mapped, click Next to open the data validation page. Click Validate to begin the process. Note: Large imports and/or use of hardware with specifications below the minimally recommended specifications can result in a processing time of up to several minutes. 211

220 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators During validation, the format and integrity of the data is verified. Any rows (records) that do not meet the import criteria are displayed in the import panel of the page along with the specific reason for the validation failure. You can make corrections to data directly in the data table at the top of the page. To do this, first move back one column from the column you want to make changes to and then make changes. Once the changes are made, click Next to move forward until you reach the Validation page again. You can move back using the Back button, or you can click on the column name in the list of columns to the left. If the amount of conflicts and thus the corrections are involved, If the number of conflicts in need of correction is long, click the "Pop up Problems List" button to open a new window containing the list of conflicts in order to keep the information visible while you move back to the columns that require corrections. 6. Once data validation is complete and no more conflicts are displayed click Next > to open the Import page. 7. Before you begin the final import, it is recommended that you export the validated data to a new or existing spreadsheet using the Save As button so you have a copy of the most current version of the data. 8. Click on the Import button to begin the import process. The progress of the import as it happens is displayed on the page. You can stop the import at any time by pressing the Cancel button. Records imported up to the point before you canceled the process are retained in the database. At the end of the import process, a status message is displayed. For all records that are imported successfully, the time, date and other parameters of the import are saved as a separate import session in the Completed Import Session drop-down for future reference and additional functions. 9. Once the import is complete, all items are marked as New and are located on the respective item pages. You are advised to go to the item detail pages for each imported item in order to review and, if necessarily, revise or adjust imported items. All import sessions are contained in the Select an Import Session drop-down and can be referenced from there in the future. Note: In order for an import session to appear in the Select an Import Session drop-down, more than one record must imported as part of the session. 212

221 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Viewing Import Sessions After a successful import and review of the imported data, the import session information can be viewed on the Import page by selecting the session from the Select an Import Session drop-down. The import sessions are identified by the Imported On (date), Imported By, Import Type, Quantity and Into Site fields. Deleting Imported Data Deleting all imported records can be useful if there is a global problem (or multiple problems) with the imported data in a previous session. This is equivalent to an undo function. Note: If the import was done in multiple sessions due to needed corrections, you must go to each session and select Delete. To delete previously imported data: 1. Select Administration > Wizards > Import. 2. On the Import page, select the import session from the Select an Import Session drop-down. 3. Click Delete. Approving Import Sessions After reviewing imported data and determining the data is correct, the status of all items can be changed at once to Installed. Note: If the import was done in multiple sessions due to needed corrections, you must go to each session and select Approve. To approve a previous import session: 1. Select Administration > Wizards > Import. 2. On the Import page, select the import session from the Select an Import Session drop-down. 3. Click Go. Note: Once a session is approved, that session no longer appears in the Select a Session drop-down, at which point those items cannot be returned to New status and they cannot be Deleted. Export Wizard The data center items being maintained in dctrack can be exported to a spreadsheet using the Export wizard. To export items: 1. In Classic View, click Administration > Wizards > Export. 213

222 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 2. In the 'What information?' section, select the information you want to export. Leaving Items selected exports all items. Narrow down what is exported by selecting from the other options available in the section. 3. Select the 'Exclude columns and classes not required or supported by the Import Wizard' if you want????? 4. In the 'What sites?' section, select the site(s) you want to pull the information from. 5. In the 'What class?' section, select the item class(es), such as PDUs, devices and so on, that you want to include in the export. 6. Click Export. The Save Spreadsheet As dialog opens. 7. Enter a name for the spreadsheet and specify the location to save it to. Click Save.The time it takes to generate the spreadsheet depends on the amount of data being exported. Once the export is complete, the spreadsheet opens. Power IQ Wizard Before you begin, review the information in Important Notes on Importing Data Using the Power IQ Import Wizard (on page 90). Use the Power IQ Wizard to map and/or add data from dctrack to Power IQ. Use this wizard if you are a current Power IQ user who has added dctrack, and now needs to add your dctrack to Power IQ. Before mapping an EMX on PowerIQ to EMX on dctrack, make sure that EMX on dctrack is assigned to a Cabinet/Rack. Important: In order to maintain data integrity, once Power IQ and dctrack data has been synched, all items must be added and updated in dctrack. Do not add or update items in Power IQ once they are synched with dctrack. ODBC access must be granted to dctrack in Power IQ in order to use the Power IQ Wizard. At a minimum, racks must exist in Power IQ to map data between Power IQ and dctrack. Power IQ does not track the make and model of racks. Since dctrack does track this information, the wizard prompts you to manually map the make and model of each item. If you have a large number of devices to import into Power IQ, mapping each item's make and model using the Power IQ Wizard may be time consuming. Raritan recommends the following steps to reduce the amount of mapping required: 1. Create a spreadsheet of your Power IQ items using a dctrack Import Wizard template. See Import Wizard Templates (on page 192) 214

223 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 2. Map the makes and models of your Power IQ items in the spreadsheet. See Data Formatting Requirements (on page 192) 3. Use the Import Wizard to import the mapped items into dctrack. See Importing Data (on page 121) 4. Click Update Power IQ in the Power IQ Wizard to import your dctrack items into Power IQ To import dctrack into Power IQ data: 1. Log in to Power IQ. 2. In the Settings tab, click ODBC Access in the Data Management section. The ODBC Access page opens. 3. Click Add, then double-click the addresses to enter edit mode and type a Network Address and a Network Mask into the fields. Repeat to add new addresses as needed. Select an address and click Remove to remove authorization from the address. The Network Mask value can be used to specify a single address or a range of addresses. Use netmask to allow access from all IP addresses. 4. Click Save when all authorized addresses have been added. The Power IQ database restarts. After the restart, ODBC compliant applications are allowed to access the database from the authorized IP addresses. 5. Log in to the dctrack Web Client. 6. From the Web Client, click Administration > dctrack Settings. The Power IQ Integration Settings page opens. 7. Check the Enable Power IQ Integration checkbox to enable the synch function. 8. In the Power IQ Appliance Address field, enter the IP address or hostname of your Power IQ appliance. 9. Enter your Power IQ username and password in the Web Services Username field and Web Services Password field, respectively. Note: You must belong to the admin group or be the configured web_api user. 10. Test your connection from dctrack to the Power IQ appliance by clicking Test Connection. Optional 11. Click Save. 12. In Classic View, click Administration > Wizards > Power IQ. 13. Review the information for each step. 14. Click Begin. 215

224 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators 15. Proceed through each step of the wizard, adding and mapping Power IQ and dctrack items. Mapping may require you to add makes and models, and/or map similar but not identical information. For example, Power IQ may use the term 'Cisco' and dctrack uses 'Cisco Systems'. These two terms need to be mapped manually. 16. Once the import is completed, select an import session from the Select a Session drop-down, and map any items that are not mapped. 17. Once all data is mapped, click Approve to approve the imported items and add them to dctrack. 18. Delete the import by selecting it from the Select a Session drop-down and clicking Delete. Note: The item names that are added to Power IQ from dctrack are displayed in all caps in Power IQ. Important Notes on Importing Data Using the Power IQ Import Wizard Following are notes on synching dctrack and Power IQ using the Power IQ Import Wizard in Classic View. Important: Once you begin the import process, data is immediately written to the dctrack database and the process cannot be stopped once it has begun. Before You Begin Raritan recommends you do the following before you begin the process: Make a backup of your database Review the data to be imported, and make sure it is accurate and current Create a rack under the data center in Power IQ. Without this, Power IQ will not be available in the Import Wizard General Information The best practice is do as stated so that the action can be reversed by deleting the session. Sessions are only created if 2 or more items are added at a time. You can import one item at a time but you cannot delete through the wizard only via normal means of deleting unapproved item from item screen As a best practice: First add all racks at the rack level, then import all IT items at the device level. By doing this, you can delete the session if needed. Make sure the import job contains two or more items at the same level. 216

225 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Make sure two or more racks are imported as part of the import job. dctrack does not rename Power IQ data centers when they are imported into dctrack. dctrack renames racks and items that are added to dctrack from Power IQ. dctrack uses ALL CAPS for item names. Data center names, floors and room names that exceed 20 characters are truncated. For example, Data Center - Headquarters - Somerset, NJ becomes Data Center - Headqu If two items have the same name and exceed 20 characters, the second item is made up of the first 17 characters followed by a number in parenthesis. For example, Cisco MDS 9222i Multiservice Modular Switch becomes CISCO MDS 9222I M(1) All items that are imported are in a New state. Move the items to an Installed by selecting an import session and clicking Approve. If a make and model are not applied to a rack, those racks remain in a New state and cannot be move to Installed until makes and models are mapped to the racks. Power IQ PDU outlets are not imported using the Power IQ Import Wizard. You must add them manually once you have imported all your racks and items. PDU IP addresses are imported using the Power IQ Import Wizard, but IT device IP address and community strings are not imported using the wizard. If a Power IQ PDU or IT device is mapped to a dctrack rack PDU, device, network or probe, the Power IQ item name is used. Timestamp and site are used to indicate individual import jobs. Each import is tracked by timestamp, so it is important to remember what you have done sequentially. dctrack does not display specific changes that occurred for each import. dctrack asks if you want to delete items/racks from both Power IQ and dctrack, or only from dctrack. Import multiple items in one import vs. importing items one at a time. Adding items one at a time is not recommended since if a mistake is made during the process, nothing is imported. 217

226 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Settings Connecting to a Database The Database tab in the Administration section of the application shows the ODBC connection information that the Classic View uses to connect to the dctrack database on the appliance. You do not need to modify the information on this tab. It is set automatically when the client is downloaded from dctrack. Application Settings The Application Settings tab allows Gatekeepers to: Set warranty expiration reminder dates for the currently selected site. Set the default SNMP port for all sites and users. This is the port used by the client to send SNMP messages. The destination port is always UDP 161. Note: If you are not using port 161 as your default on your servers, dctrack is not able to communicate with your SNMP capable items. Setting Expiration Date Reminders Use this option to set warranty expiration reminder dates for the currently selected site. To set expiration date reminders: 1. In Classic View, select Administration > Settings, then click on the Application Settings tab. 2. Select the date of the reminder. Leave it blank if you do not want to use expiration reminder dates. 3. Click Save. Setting SNMP Options Set the default SNMP port for all sites and users. This is the port used by the client to send SNMP messages. The destination port is always UDP 161. Note: If you are not using port 161 as your default on your servers, dctrack is not able to communicate with your SNMP capable items. To set SNMP options: 1. In Classic View, select Administration > Settings, then click on the Application Settings tab. 2. To change the port, enter it in the SNMP UDP Port field. 218

227 3. Click Save. Configuring Floor Map Options Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Use the floor map grid labeling option to change the way the floor map grid letters are incremented. Grid labeling is applied on a per site basis. Use the floor map drawing units options to select the units of measure applied to floor maps, such as feet, meters and so on. These units of measure are applied on a per site basis. To change the floor map tile grid options: 1. In Classic View, select Administration > Settings, then click on the Application Settings tab. 2. Select the site the grid options apply to. 3. Select the labeling schema. 4. Click Save. 5. Repeat these steps for other sites if needed. To change the floor map units of measure: 1. In Classic View, select Administration > Settings, then click on the Application Settings tab. 2. Select the site the units of measure apply to. 3. Select the units of measure to be applied. 4. Click Save. 5. Repeat these steps for other sites if needed. Configuring Purge Item and Port Settings If you do not want anyone other than the Administrator to be able to purge items from the Items & Ports page, enable this feature. See Items & Ports (on page 222) for more information on using the Items & Ports page. To allow only Administrators to purge items: 1. In Classic View, select Administration > Settings, then click on the Application Settings tab. 2. In the Settings for Admin User Only section, select the "Limit Purge in Administration\Items & Ports Screen to Administrators only" checkbox. 219

228 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Enabling and Disabling Request Bypass for All Items By default, the request bypass feature is enabled for Gatekeepers. When the Request Bypass feature is enabled, every type of request is immediately completed and passed through all steps of the Change Control process. The full request history and work orders are created as if the request was normally processed. If you want all users to have the option of bypassing the Change Control process, enable the request bypass feature for all users. Disabling this feature applies to all users with the exception of the Gatekeeper. The feature remains enabled for Gatekeepers unless the "Prevent Gatekeepers from toggling the RB setting" is also selected. Administrators are the only users who can enable or disable the feature once it is removed from the Gatekeeper. Once the feature is disabled, the Request Bypass icon on the item pages is grayed out. To disable the request bypass feature for all users: 1. In Classic View, select Administration > Settings, then click on the Application Settings tab. 2. If you do not want Gatekeepers to be able to use the request bypass feature, select the "Prevent Gatekeepers from toggling the RB setting" checkbox. Leave this checkbox deselected if you want Gatekeepers to be able to use the feature. 3. In the Request Bypass (RB) Options section, click Disable RB for All, then click OK to close the confirmation message. The request bypass feature is disabled. To enable the request bypass feature for all users and not just the Gatekeeper: 1. In Classic View, select Administration > Settings, then click on the Application Settings tab. 2. In the Request Bypass (RB) Options section, click Enable RB for All, then click OK to close the confirmation message. All users can now use the request bypass feature. 220

229 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Library Updates The Library Updates tab provides you with the ability to connect to Raritan's dctrack FTP site where you can check for and download a new version of the Models library as well as download other relevant files such as spreadsheet templates. See Import Wizard Templates (on page 192). In order to access the FTP site, you need a FTP username and password. Contact your administrator for this information. You are also able to access Raritan's Training website from this tab. You need a username and password, provided to you by Raritan's Training Department, in order to access the website. In addition to dctrack courses, you can also access the dctrack user group from the training website. 221

230 Chapter 5: Help for System Administrators Items & Ports Gatekeepers can use the Items & Ports page to directly make changes to the item and port data in dctrack. This is an alternative to using the item and port edit functions to make changes. It is critical that any changes made to the data be accurate to avoid corrupting the data in the application. There are no data integrity checks on this page. Changes you make here are reflected on the item and port pages. If you do not want anyone other than the Administrator to be able to purge items from the Items & Ports page, enable this feature. Warning: Since data integrity checks are not present in this page, the Gatekeeper must exercise extreme care while editing the data. The Gatekeeper should be aware that changes made here may have an impact on related data. If you do not want to be prompted to save the changes you make on this page each time you make a change and move out of the data cell, select the Disable Save Confirmation checkbox. To access the items and ports: 1. Select Administration > Items & Ports. 2. Read the warning and click OK to close it. 3. Make changes as needed. 222

231 Chapter 6 Help for Data Center Managers In This Chapter Overview dctrack Privileges Needed for Data Center Managers Starting from Scratch - Building a New Data Center in dctrack Managing New Items Managing Existing Items Reports Overview The information contained in this section of Help covers typical dctrack tasks performed by data center managers. Data center managers, also known as site administrators, are the primary leads at a specific data center location. Users in this role may perform some of the same tasks in dctrack as system administrators, but typically do not perform the initial installation of dctrack and do not manage the server dctrack is installed on. Date center managers are mainly responsible for user and team management, data center change management, and keeping the data in dctrack in sync with actual conditions in the data center. This includes: Adding and editing data center items and connections Managing work orders Managing requests Managing teams Managing dctrack libraries and drop-downs Importing and export data Monitoring data center conditions Note that some data center managers may perform dctrack installations and/or integrations and other tasks typically performed by a system administrator. See Help for System Administrators (on page 43) for additional information as needed. 223

232 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers dctrack Privileges Needed for Data Center Managers Following are the privileges needed to perform the tasks outlined in this section: Gatekeeper The Gatekeeper is responsible for user and team management, data center change management and keeping the data in dctrack in sync with actual conditions in the data center. Manager Managers can view, add and edit items and connections so long as the team they belong to is listed under the Admin Team field for the currently selected item or if the Admin Team field is blank, in which case anyone except users with an access level of Viewer can make changes. A red lock icon is displayed when the current selected item is not editable. Starting from Scratch - Building a New Data Center in dctrack Once dctrack is installed, data centers can be built in it. This is a task that is generally left to System Administrators, and includes steps such as adding users, creating lists, importing items from spreadsheets and so on. For information on these and other steps in building a data center in dctrack, see the dctrack Administrators Help. Managing New Items Note: This section does not cover importing items into dctrack from an existing spreadsheet. The information in this section is specific to creating new item in dctrack either by adding it individually or through cloning. See dctrack Administrator Help for details on importing items using a spreadsheet. This section of Help walks you through how to: Reserve cabinet space for items Optional This step allows you reserve space for an item that will be placed in the data center in the future, not an item the you are placing imminently. For example, you have ordered a new server and want to reserve the space for the server in the data center before it arrives on site. This step is optional and performed in the Web Client. 224

233 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Locate a space for an item in the data center Optional Locating space for an item means you are searching the existing cabinets in the data center for a cabinet that has enough open space to install the item. For example, you need to find a cabinet in the data center that has enough available space to house a new server. This step is optional and performed in the Web Client. Add items to dctrack and, if necessary, add ports to the item Adding an item means that the item currently does not exist in dctrack and must now be added to it. Ports can be created for an item, if needed, when it is added or at a later time. This step assumes you are adding ports when you add the item. For example, you received a new server to install in the data center and must now add it to dctrack and create ports for it. This step is performed in Classic View. Tip: Rather than add multiple items one at a time, dctrack allows you to clone items and then edit the item details as needed. Create network and power connections for an item As you are adding the item to dctrack, you need to create network and power connections for it so the physical connections can be made when the item is installed in the data center. Network and power connections can be created when you add the item or at a later date, but this section assumes you are creating the connections when you are adding the item. This step is performed in the Web Client or Class View using different methods. The Web Client provides the easier interface, however. Manage requests and work orders for the newly added item Once you add the item and save it in dctrack, a request is generated to physically install the item in the data center. That request, if approved, then generates the work order that is distributed to the data center technicians to perform the installation. See Change Control Processes (see "Change Control Process" on page 339) for details on the change control process. 225

234 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Reserving Cabinet Space for an Item - Optional Note: This feature is optional. It allows you reserve space for an item that will be placed in the data center in the future, not an item the you are placing imminently. For example, you have ordered a new server and want to reserve the space for the server in the data center before it arrives on site. Use the Reservations feature to reserve space for an item in a cabinet within a data center. A reservation holds the cabinet space you specify versus immediately creating a request to add and place the item using the Search and Place feature. If you know the details of the item you want reserve space for and place, you can create, edit and add it directly in the Reservations tab without using the Search and Place. See About Search and Place (on page 359) for information on creating reservations using Search and Place. Reservations do not create a change request. Reservations are placeholders for items within cabinets. In order to create the actual request to physically place the item in the cabinet in the data center, you must place the reservation using the Place Reservation feature. See Creating and Placing Reservations for Items from the Reservations Tab (on page 226). Once a reservation is created, it is displayed on the Reservations page. The newest reservation is always at the top of the list and each prior reservation is listed below it. Only Gatekeepers and the person who creates the reservation can place it. By default, reservations are sorted by reservation number, which is made up of the letter RN for reservation number, the year the reservation was created, and the number of the reservation itself. However, reservations can be sorted by any of the column headers on the page by clicking on that column. Every reservation has an expiration date. The reservation expires on the next day of the expiration date. When a reservation expires, the Expiration Date is shown in red and the cabinet space is no longer reserved. To view reservations: In the Web Client, click Change Management > Reservations. The Reservations tab opens and displays existing reservations. Creating and Placing Reservations for Items from the Reservations Tab To create a reservation: 1. In the Web Client, click Change Management > Reservations. The Reservations tab opens. 226

235 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 2. Click Create Reservation on the Reservations tab. The Create New Reservation dialog opens. 3. Enter the Reservation Name. Since the reservation name is displayed in the cabinet elevation, short names are recommended. Reservation names do not have to be unique. Required 4. Enter the Reservation Purpose to include details about the reservation. Required 5. Select the date on which the reservation expires. By default, it is the current date plus one month. Required Note: Once this date expires, the cabinet space you reserved with the original reservation is freed up. 6. Select the location where the item belongs. Required 7. Select the make and model of the item. If a make and model are selected, the RU Height field is automatically populated based on the make and model selections. Note: The make and model are not required fields in order to create a reservation, but they are required in order to place the reservation. 8. Enter the RU height if you have not selected a make and model. If you want to increase the RU height to reserve additional space, update it as needed. Required The Cabinet drop-down is populated with cabinets that contain free space matching the RU height requirements you enter. 9. Select the cabinet where the reservation is to be made. Required Once you select a cabinet, a graphical representation of the cabinet is displayed on the right side of the dialog. Use the drop-down above the cabinet display to change the view of the cabinet from the default Text view to either viewing the front or back of the items in the cabinet. The U Position drop-down is populated with U positions available in the cabinet you selected based on the RU selected. 10. Select the U position where the reservation is to be made. Required 11. Click Save to save the information and close the dialog, or click Save and New to save the information and refresh the Create New Reservation dialog so that you can create another reservation. Once the reservation is created, it is displayed on the Reservation tab and that space is removed from the list of available space displayed using search and place or the reservation function. If you open the reservation, the space you have reserved is blocked off in the cabinet in red and the name of the reservation is displayed. To place a reservation: 1. Select the reservation from the list on the Reservations page. 227

236 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 2. Click Place Reservation. 3. If you have entered all required information, the Place dialog opens. 4. If the make and model were not previously entered, you are prompted to enter the information. Once the make and model are selected, click and save. The Place dialog is opened. 5. A status of New is automatically applied to the item. 6. At a minimum, enter a name for the item. Required 7. Complete the remaining fields or make changes as needed. 8. Do one of the following: Click Place to place the reservation and remove it from the reservation list. This does not generate a request. Click Place and Issue Request to place the item and create a request. 9. If there are any validation issues, dctrack prompts you to correct them. The reservation is removed from the Reservation page once it is placed. 10. To view requests, go to Classic View and select Change Control > Requests. The request is reviewed or rejected by the Gatekeeper based on their assessment and a work order is issued after approval. See Change Control Process (on page 339) for more information. Locating Cabinet Space for an Item - Optional This step is optional and is performed in the Web Client. This feature provides you with the ability to use Search and Place to locate a cabinet and U position for an item you wish to add to the data center. Searches are done from the Search and Place page. If you already know the cabinet the item is going to be placed in and know rack unit space for the item is available, proceed to adding the item. See About Search and Place (on page 359) for details on this feature, or skip to one of the following topics for details on performing the search that best fits your needs: Search by Rack Unit (RU) Height and Reserve Cabinet Space (on page 229) Search and Place by Make and Model and Reserve Cabinet Space (on page 234) Search by Make and Model, Place the Item and Build Circuits (on page 239) 228

237 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Search by Rack Unit (RU) Height and Reserve Cabinet Space When you search by rack unit (RU) height, you can reserve cabinet space but cannot place an item in the cabinet. Search by make and model in order to search for and then place an item. Following are the steps taken to first search for an item based on rack unit height, and then reserve cabinet space. To search and place by RU height, and reserve cabinet space for the item: 1. In the Web Client, select Capacity Management > Search and Place. The Search and Place tab opens. 2. Uncheck the Search by Model checkbox. The RU height search criteria loads on the page. 3. In the RU height field, enter the rack unit height you want to search for. Required 4. From the Search In drop-down, select the location(s) you want to search. You can select more than one location at a time. 5. If you want to search based just on these criteria, click Search. Alternatively, enter additional criteria to narrow your results: 229

238 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers a. Click the Cabinet Criteria arrow to expand the panel and then select the grouping, type and function. b. Click the Data Connectivity Criteria arrow to expand the panel, then click on the Maximize button to open the Data Connectivity Criteria [Advanced] dialog. Select data connectivity criteria to be included in the search by clicking on a row in the table. If you are adding connectivity criteria, the Connect, Connector and Media fields are required. To remove criteria after it is added, select Delete from the drop-down. 6. Click the Power Connectivity Criteria arrow to expand the panel and select the power criteria to include in the search. a. Enter the Basic information first and provide the power supply quantity and parameters. Required Note: All basic information fields are required in order to open the Per Port Options table. b. Select a quantity. Note: Click on the blank space in the Quantity drop-down if you want to clear the selections in this panel. c. Select the redundancy. Required 230

239 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers The Redundancy values are in the format of N+x. Selecting a value from this drop-down indicates that you wish to search for a cabinet that can support N quantity of power supplies connecting to one power source and x power supplies to the other source. The power source implies two different UPS banks or, when not present, two different floor PDUs. d. Enter the wattage for the name plate. Required e. The budgeted watts are automatically populated with the name plate watts. Use the slider to increase or decrease the budgeted watts as needed. Required By default, the budget power is set to 60% of the nameplate watts value. Note that the budgeted power cannot be greater than the name plate power. f. Select the power phase. Required g. Select the voltage. Required h. Select a power connector. Required Once you select a connector from the Connector drop-down, the search looks for cabinets that contain available ports with the selected connector or a compatible connector as defined in the Connectors library. 231

240 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers i. Click the Per Port Options link to display the ports table. Select the item that the port connects to and, if needed, the color applied to the connection. By default, the port is connected to a rack PDU and no color is applied to the connection. 7. Click Search. The results of the search are displayed on the page. Click on a result to select it. You can now place items or reserve space for them. 8. Click Reserve to reserve space in that cabinet for the item. The Create New Reservation dialog opens. 9. Enter the Reservation Name. Since the reservation name is displayed in the cabinet elevation, short names are recommended. Reservation names do not have to be unique. Required 10. Enter the Reservation Purpose to include details about the reservation. Required 11. Select the date on which the reservation expires. By default, it is the current date plus one month. Required Note: Once this date expires, the cabinet space you reserved with the original reservation is freed up. 12. Select the location where the item belongs. Required 232

241 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 13. Select the make and model of the item. If a make and model are selected, the RU Height field is automatically populated based on the selection. Note: The make and model are not required fields in order to create a reservation but they are required in order to place the reservation. 14. The RU height is automatically entered based on the make and model selections. Enter the RU height if you have not selected a make and model. If you want to increase the RU height to reserve additional space, update it as needed. Required The Cabinet drop-down is populated with cabinets that contain free space matching the RU height requirements you enter. 15. Select the cabinet where the reservation is to be made. Required Once you select a cabinet, a graphical representation of the cabinet is displayed on the right side of the dialog. Use the drop-down above the cabinet display to change the view of the cabinet from the default Text view to either viewing the front or back of the items in the cabinet. The U Position drop-down is populated with U positions available in the cabinet you selected based on the RU selected. 16. Select the U position where the reservation is to be made. Required 17. Click Save to save the information and close the dialog, or click Save and New to save the information and refresh the Create New Reservation dialog so that you can create another reservation. 18. Once the reservation is created, it is displayed on the Reservation tab and that space is removed from the list of available space displayed using search and place or the reservation function. If you open the reservation, the space you have reserved is blocked off in the cabinet in red and the name of the reservation is displayed. 233

242 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Note: dctrack uses the terms rail position and U position interchangeably. Search and Place by Make and Model and Reserve Cabinet Space This scenario assumes you are searching for an item based on make and model, and are reserving space in a cabinet for the item but not placing it or building circuits for it. See Search by Make and Model, Place the Item and Build Circuits (on page 239) for information on those additional steps. To search and place by make and model: 1. Select Capacity Management > Search and Place. The Search and Place tab opens. 2. Leave the Search by Model checkbox selected 3. From the Make and Model drop-downs, select the make and model of the item you want to place. Required An image of the model is displayed on the page. Use the Front Image and Back Image links to view the front and rear of the item respectively. The RU height and the data and power ports for the selected make and model are automatically added based on your make and model selection. 4. If needed, change the RU height to search for a cabinet with additional space. Required 5. From the Location Criteria panel, select the location(s) you want to search for a cabinet. Required 6. Click the Cabinet Criteria arrow to expand the panel and then select the grouping, type and function for the item if you want to search by those criteria. 7. The Data Connectivity Criteria panel automatically expands once a make and model are selected, and the relevant fields are populated based on your selection. If needed, update the data connectivity criteria to be included in the search. If you are adding connectivity criteria, the Connect, Connector and Media fields are required. a. Add connections by clicking on a blank cell in the table and selecting from the drop-down. b. Remove a connection after it is added by selecting Delete from the drop-down. This clears all of the connection fields for that row. c. When 'Don't connect' is selected, the ports are created but dctrack does not check for data port connectivity. 234

243 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 8. Click the Power Connectivity Criteria arrow to expand the panel and select the power criteria to include in the search. The power information is automatically entered based on the make and model you selected. If you edit or add power connectivity criteria, all fields are required. a. Enter the Basic information first and provide the power supply quantity and parameters. Required Note: All basic information fields are required in order to open the Per Port Options table. b. Select a quantity. Note: Click on the blank space in the Quantity drop-down if you want to clear the selections in this panel. c. Select the redundancy. Required The Redundancy values are in the format of N+x. Selecting a value from this drop-down indicates that you wish to search for a cabinet that can support N quantity of power supplies connecting to one power source and x power supplies to the other source. The power source implies two different UPS banks or, when not present, two different floor PDUs. d. Enter the wattage for the name plate. Required e. The budgeted watts are automatically populated with the name plate watts. Use the slider to increase or decrease the budgeted watts as needed. Required By default, the budget power is set to 60% of the nameplate watts value. Note that the budgeted power cannot be greater than the name plate power. f. Select the power phase. Required g. Select the voltage. Required h. Select a power connector. Required 235

244 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Once you select a connector from the Connector drop-down, the search looks for cabinets that contain available ports with the selected connector or a compatible connector as defined in the Connectors library. i. Click the Per Port Options link to display the ports table. Select the item that the port connects to and, if needed, the color applied to the connection. By default, the port is connected to a rack PDU and no color is applied to the connection. 9. Click Reserve to reserve space in that cabinet for the item. The Create New Reservation dialog opens. 236

245 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 10. Enter the Reservation Name. Since the reservation name is displayed in the cabinet elevation, short names are recommended. Reservation names do not have to be unique. Required 11. Enter the Reservation Purpose to include details about the reservation. Required 12. Select the date on which the reservation expires. By default, it is the current date plus one month. Required Note: Once this date expires, the cabinet space you reserved with the original reservation is freed up. 13. Select the location where the item belongs. Required 14. Select the make and model of the item. If a make and model are selected, the RU Height field is automatically populated based on the selection. Note: The make and model are not required fields in order to create a reservation but they are required in order to place the reservation. 15. The RU height is automatically entered based on the make and model selections. Enter the RU height if you have not selected a make and model. If you want to increase the RU height to reserve additional space, update it as needed. Required The Cabinet drop-down is populated with cabinets that contain free space matching the RU height requirements you enter. 16. Select the cabinet where the reservation is to be made. Required Once you select a cabinet, a graphical representation of the cabinet is displayed on the right side of the dialog. Use the drop-down above the cabinet display to change the view of the cabinet from the default Text view to either viewing the front or back of the items in the cabinet. The U Position drop-down is populated with U positions available in the cabinet you selected based on the RU selected. 17. Select the U position where the reservation is to be made. Required 237

246 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 18. Click Save to save the information and close the dialog, or click Save and New to save the information and refresh the Create New Reservation dialog so that you can create another reservation. Once the reservation is created, it is displayed on the Reservation tab and that space is removed from the list of available space displayed using search and place or the reservation function. If you open the reservation, the space you have reserved is blocked off in the cabinet in red and the name of the reservation is displayed. Note: dctrack uses the terms rail position and U position interchangeably. 238

247 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Search by Make and Model, Place the Item and Build Circuits Following are the steps to take when you search for an item by make and model, then proceed to place the item in a cabinet and build circuits for the item. See in Data and Power Connections (on page 361) for details on circuits in dctrack. Circuits do not have to be created in order to place an item. Conversely, circuits can be built for an item without placing the item. Leaving the Issue Request checkbox selected when placing an item creates a request to physically place the item in the cabinet. If you built circuits when placing the item, a request to physically build the circuits is made by leaving the Issue Request checkbox selected on the Manage Circuits tab. To view requests, go to Classic View and select Change Control > Requests. The request is reviewed or rejected by the Gatekeeper based on their assessment and a work order is issued after approval. See Change Control Process (on page 339) for more information. To search by make and model, place the item and build circuits for the item: 1. Select Capacity Management > Search and Place. The Search and Place tab opens. 2. Leave the Search by Model checkbox selected 3. From the Make and Model drop-downs, select the make and model of the item you want to place. Required An image of the model is displayed on the page. Use the Front Image and Back Image links to view the front and rear of the item respectively. The RU height and the data and power ports for the selected make and model are automatically added based on your make and model selection. 4. If needed, change the RU height to search for a cabinet with additional space. Required 5. From the Location Criteria panel, select the location(s) you want to search for a cabinet. Required 6. Click the Cabinet Criteria arrow to expand the panel and then select the grouping, type and function for the item if you want to search by those criteria. 7. The Data Connectivity Criteria panel automatically expands once a make and model are selected, and the relevant fields are populated based on your selection. If needed, update the data connectivity criteria to be included in the search. 239

248 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers If you are adding connectivity criteria, the Connect, Connector and Media fields are required. a. Add connections by clicking on a blank cell in the table and selecting from the drop-down. b. Remove a connection after it is added by selecting Delete from the drop-down. This clears all of the connection fields for that row. c. When 'Don't connect' is selected, the ports are created but dctrack does not check for data port connectivity. 8. Click the Power Connectivity Criteria arrow to expand the panel and select the power criteria to include in the search. The power information is automatically entered based on the make and model you selected. If you edit or add power connectivity criteria, all fields are required. a. Enter the Basic information first and provide the power supply quantity and parameters. Required Note: All basic information fields are required in order to open the Per Port Options table. b. Select a quantity. Note: Click on the blank space in the Quantity drop-down if you want to clear the selections in this panel. c. Select the redundancy. Required The Redundancy values are in the format of N+x. Selecting a value from this drop-down indicates that you wish to search for a cabinet that can support N quantity of power supplies connecting to one power source and x power supplies to the other source. The power source implies two different UPS banks or, when not present, two different floor PDUs. d. Enter the wattage for the name plate. Required e. The budgeted watts are automatically populated with the name plate watts. Use the slider to increase or decrease the budgeted watts as needed. Required By default, the budget power is set to 60% of the nameplate watts value. Note that the budgeted power cannot be greater than the name plate power. f. Select the power phase. Required g. Select the voltage. Required h. Select a power connector. Required 240

249 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Once you select a connector from the Connector drop-down, the search looks for cabinets that contain available ports with the selected connector or a compatible connector as defined in the Connectors library. i. Click the Per Port Options link to display the ports table. Select the item that the port connects to and, if needed, the color applied to the connection. By default, the port is connected to a rack PDU and no color is applied to the connection. j. 9. Click Search. The results of the search are displayed on the page. Click on a result to select it. You can now place items or reserve space for them. 10. Click Place. The Place dialog opens. 241

250 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 11. At a minimum, enter a name for the item. Required 12. Complete the remaining fields or make changes as needed. 13. Leave the the Issue Place Request checkbox checked if you want to create a request to place the item. The item is created but no request is generated if the checkbox is deselected. Circuits can still be built if you uncheck this option. 14. Leave 'Continue to building circuits' checked to build circuits. If the item you are placing has no ports, this checkbox is disabled. See Data and Power Connections (on page 361) for more information on circuits. 15. Click Place. If there are any validation issues, dctrack prompts you to correct them. The Manage Circuits tab opens if the 'Continue to building circuits' checkbox was selected. A circuit tab in the Manage Circuits page is loaded for each port of the item you just placed. For example, if the item had 4 data ports and 2 power ports, 6 circuit tabs is shown in the Manage Circuits page. Proceed to each tab to build and save a circuit. The first node in each circuit is automatically selected for you and locked. Select the next node for that circuit. If you do not wish to build a circuit for a port, simply close that tab. a. From the Item drop-down, select the item from which the circuit is initiated. Required b. Select the port the node will connect to. dctrack validates the port selection to make sure there are no issues. Required If there is an issue between the node item or port you selected and the item and port of the previous node, a Caution icon ( ) is displayed at the bottom right of the node. Click on the node to view the conflict details. Make changes if needed. Note: If you make changes and have already added additional nodes, the nodes that follow are deleted. dctrack displays a warning when this will occur. c. New nodes are added to the circuit automatically. Click anywhere on the page to stop adding nodes. Edit a node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key. 16. Select the Issue Request checkbox selected to create a request to build the circuit. 17. Click Save to add the circuit to the item. dctrack validates the circuit. If needed, make changes to the circuit. Add additional circuits as needed. 242

251 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers To quickly open a tab to create a new circuit, click New Circuit at the bottom left of the page. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key Adding Cabinets to a Data Center in dctrack Note: This section of Help assumes that a data center location (site) exists in dctrack. If you have not, see Create Locations (Sites) and Link Drawings (on page 76). Cabinets must exist in dctrack before you can add items to dctrack. To add cabinets: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > Cabinets. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar At a minimum, complete all of the required fields on the Detail 1 page. Complete additional fields as needed. a. Enter the cabinet ID. Required 243

252 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers b. Select a make and model. Required c. Enter cabinet placement information. d. If needed, select cabinet wire management information. e. Assign a system admin/admin team to the cabinet. 6. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 7. Click Save. The saved is tagged with a status of New. 8. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. Cloning Items and Their Ports Cloning allows you to copy items that already exist in the application to use as a template to create new items versus having to create an item from scratch. You can then make changes to the cloned item to customize it. All items can be cloned with the exception of cabinets and comm panels, and you cannot clone ports from a PDU. New, cloned items have names similar to the item they were cloned from but add a ^^ suffix followed by a sequential number such as Device1^^01. Edit each cloned item name as needed. dctrack allows you to clone ports without cloning the items they are associated with. For example, you can clone the ports associated with a device without cloning the device itself. This is done from the Create Ports dialog. See Creating Ports (on page 266). Note: For cloned items, unique fields such as serial number, location, asset tag, and so on are not cloned. Also, if ports were cloned, IP and MAC addresses are not cloned. To clone items: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > [Item Class]. For example, IT Items > Device. 2. Select Add from the page mode drop-down. 3. Click Clone. The Clone Items dialog opens. 4. Select the item to be cloned from the 'Cloned from' drop-down. The model is selected based on this selection. 244

253 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 5. Select the 'Include Ports in Cloning process' checkbox to clone the item's ports along with the item. 6. Select the Include Custom Fields Data checkbox to clone the custom fields, if any, which are associated with the item. 7. Enter the number of cloned items to be created based on the original. Up to 24 items can be created based on an existing item. 8. Click Clone Item. Adding New Items Items are added in essentially the same way in dctrack but the details and required fields vary based on the item type. This section of Help shows you how to add each type of item and, if applicable, how to create ports and connections for the item. Note: The location and cabinet the item is being added to must exist in dctrack before an item can be added. Physical Server Following are the steps when adding a physical server to dctrack, creating ports for it, then creating network and power connections. Note: Once a status of Installed is applied to a server, placement fields cannot be edited in Edit mode. This means that rail positions cannot be changed once the item is installed. As a workaround, administrators can edit items from the Items & Ports page in Classic View. To add a dctrack: 1. In Classic View, select IT Items > Devices from the Explorer Menu. 245

254 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar. 4. Select Physical as the server type from the available radio buttons in the Device Information section of the page. 5. In the Device Information section of the page: a. Enter a name for the server. Required b. Enter the C name for the server. c. Change the type field, if needed. Required d. Select the function the server is used for. e. Select the system administrator of the server. f. Select the administrative team assigned to the server. g. Select the user department that is using the server. h. Select the operating system installed on the server. Optional i. Select the domain assigned to the server. Optional 246

255 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 6. If the dctrack is a virtual machine host, select the Virtual Machine Host checkbox. The VM Cluster drop-down appears. 7. Select a virtual machine cluster from the VM Cluster drop-down. This is required if the server is a virtual machine. See Virtual Machine (on page 248). 8. In the Device Hardware section of the page: a. Select the make. Required b. Select the model. Required c. The weight and rack units are populated based on your make and model selection. d. Add disk volumes by entering the disk volume's name and then clicking Add. 9. Select the cabinet and the rail position to house the server by selecting from the Cabinet and Rail Position drop-downs. Required An elevation view of the cabinet is displayed once the cabinet is selected. Review the elevation to locate open the U position and rails for the server. 10. Select the direction the server will face in the cabinet - the server faces the front of the cabinet or the back of the cabinet. 247

256 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 11. Enter notes for the server in the Device Notes text box. 12. Create communications ports and power ports, if needed. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 13. Enter IP addresses, if needed. See Assigning IP Addresses (on page 282). 14. If needed, add applications. See Adding Applications to a Device Item (on page 293). 15. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 16. Click Save. The saved server is tagged with a status of New. Since the server has a status of new, it appears in red on the cabinet elevation. 17. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the server in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. Virtual Machine For a server to be treated as a VM host, the Virtual Machine Host checkbox on the device's Detail 1 page must be checked and a VM Cluster must be selected from the drop-down that appears. Any physical device or blade can be marked as a VM host. To add a virtual machine: 1. In Classic View, select IT Items > Devices from the Explorer Menu. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar. 248

257 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 4. Select VM as the virtual machine type from the available radio buttons in the Device Information section of the page. 5. In the Device Information section of the page: a. Enter a name for the virtual machine. Required b. Enter the C name for the virtual machine. c. Change the type field, if needed. Required d. Select the function the virtual machine is used for. e. Select the system administrator of the virtual machine. f. Select the administrative team assigned to the virtual machine. g. Select the user department that is using the virtual machine. h. Select the guest operating system installed on the virtual machine. Optional i. Select the domain assigned to the virtual machine. Optional 6. Select any virtual machine clusters from the VM Cluster drop-down. See Adding Virtual Machine (VM) Clusters to a Device Item. Required If needed, create a new cluster: a. Click the Clusters button. This opens the Clusters and Virtual Machines dialog. b. In the Virtual Machine Clusters list, click Add. 249

258 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers c. Add a new cluster name and close the dialog. 7. In the DataStore Device section, select the physical server the virtual machine is stored on. 8. If applicable, select the volume the virtual machine is stored in. 9. Create communications ports and power ports, if needed. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 10. Enter IP addresses, if needed. See Assigning IP Addresses (on page 282). 11. If needed, add applications. See Adding Applications to a Device Item (on page 293). 12. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 13. Click Save. The saved virtual machine is tagged with a status of New. 14. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the virtual machine in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. 250

259 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Blade Chassis Before adding blade devices, a blade chassis must be created. The only variation from creating a physical server is selecting the chassis in which the blade server is mounted. Note: To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the blade chassis in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. Note: In the List page, a chassis and its blade devices are all listed as individual items in the list. To add a blade chassis: 1. In Classic View, select IT Items > Devices from the Explorer Menu. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar. 4. Select Blade Chassis as the blade chassis type from the available radio buttons in the Device Information section of the page. Once you select Blade Chassis, blade chassis is automatically selected from the Type drop-down. 5. In the Device Information section of the page: a. Enter a name for the blade chassis. Required b. Enter the C name for the blade chassis. c. Change the type field, if needed. Required d. Select the function the blade chassis is used for. e. Select the system administrator of the blade chassis. 251

260 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 6. f. Select the administrative team assigned to the blade chassis. g. Select the user department that is using the blade chassis. Blade Server Before adding blade devices, a blade chassis must be created. The only variation from creating a physical server is selecting the chassis in which the blade server is mounted. See Blade Chassis (on page 251). Note: To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the blade server in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. Note: In the List page, a chassis and its blade devices are all listed as individual items in the list. To add a blade server: 1. In Classic View, select IT Items > Devices from the Explorer Menu. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar. 4. Select Blade as the blade server type from the available radio buttons in the Device Information section of the page. Once you select Blade, blade server is automatically selected from the Type drop-down. 5. In the Device Information section of the page: a. Enter a name for the blade server. Required b. Enter the C name for the blade server. c. Change the type field, if needed. Required d. Select the function the blade server is used for. e. Select the system administrator of the blade server. 252

261 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers f. Select the administrative team assigned to the blade server. g. Select the user department that is using the blade server. h. Select the operating system installed on the blade server. Optional i. Select the domain assigned to the blade server. Optional 6. If the dctrack is a virtual machine host, select the Virtual Machine Host checkbox. The VM Cluster drop-down appears. 7. Select a virtual machine cluster from the VM Cluster drop-down. This is required if the blade server is a virtual machine. See Virtual Machine (on page 248). 8. In the Device Hardware section of the page: a. Select the make. Required b. Select the model. Required c. The weight and rack units are populated based on your make and model selection. 253

262 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers d. Add disk volumes by entering the disk volume's name and then clicking Add. 9. Select the chassis the blade is to be placed. Once selected, the cabinet housing that chassis is automatically selected and displayed in the Cabinet field. Required 10. Select the slot where the blade server is to be placed. Required 11. Enter notes for the blade server in the Device Notes text box, if needed. 12. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 13. Click Save. The saved blade server is tagged with a status of New. Since the blade server has a status of new, it appears in red on the cabinet elevation. 254

263 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 14. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the blade server in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. Networks You can add chassis-based or stackable-based network items. When creating blades in a chassis, the blade item name is automatically generated. The blade item name consists of the chassis item name followed by a dash and a number that indicates the blade's slot position in the chassis. Note: While each blade is an item, it cannot be selected individually from the List page or the Record Locator in the toolbar. You must first select the chassis item from the List page or Record Locator. All stackable network items share a logical name and each stackable network item is named using the logical name followed by a dash and a number that indicates its position in the stack. Note: Each stackable network item can be selected from the List page or the Record Locator in the toolbar. To add network items: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > Network. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar Enter a logical name for the chassis or stack. 6. After you enter the logical name, the cursor moves to the "Network Equipment Logical Information of" drop-down. Select either Chassis or Stack. You must make a selection before you can move on to other fields. 255

264 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers When deciding between Chassis or Stack for this selection, choose Chassis when the item has individual blades that are physically placed inside of it. Chose Stack for all other network items that don't fit the Chassis criteria. Once this selection is made for a network item it cannot be changed. If it was made incorrectly, you have to delete the item and add a new one. 7. For a chassis and blades: a. In the Network Equipment Physical Information box, select the Make and Model and complete the remaining information for the chassis. b. Click Add to add the blades. After adding a blade, you can select any blade in the list and modify its asset information. 8. For a stackable network item: a. In the Network Equipment Physical Information box, make the appropriate selections from the Make and Model drop-downs and complete the other information for first network item in the stack. b. Click the Add button to add additional network items to the stack. After adding a network item, you can select any item in the stack from the list and modify its asset information to the right. 9. Use the Create Ports button to create the ports. See Creating Ports (on page 266). If the ports are for a chassis, select chassis rather than a blade. 10. Select Layer 2 from the OSI drop-down if you want the item to appear on the Subnet and VLAN Management dialog in the list of network items. See Subnets (on page 284) for more details. 11. If needed, add Subnets and VLANS. See Subnets (on page 284). 12. Enter the cabinet and rail placement information for the network. Required 13. Enter IP addresses, if needed. See Assigning IP Addresses (on page 282). 14. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information if needed: a. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). b. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 15. Click Save. The saved item is tagged with a status of New. The item appears in red on the cabinet elevation, which indicates that the item is new or is an outstanding request. 16. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. 256

265 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Adding Subnets to Network Items In order to add a subnet to a network item, it must first exist in dctrack. See Subnets and VLANs (see "Subnets" on page 284) for information on adding subnets to dctrack. As many subnets as are needed can be added. Subnets can be added to network items either when the network item is initially added or after it has been added. Subnets can be added from the Detail 1 page or from the Subnets and VLAN Management dialog accessed from the Subnets page. See Adding Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog) (on page 286). Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To add a subnet to a network item: 1. Open the Detail 1 page of the network item you want to add a subnet to. 2. Select Edit from Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click the Subnets & VLANs button. The Subnet and VLAN Management dialog appears. You can associate equipment and subnets in one of two ways: add subnets to selected equipment (network items) or add equipment to specific subnets. Either method results in the same association. 4. Add subnets to equipment: a. Leave the "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" radio button selected. b. In the Network Equipment in OSI Layer 2&3 list, select the equipment you want to add the subnet to. If other subnets are already applied to the equipment, they are displayed in the "Subnets in" list. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. c. From the All Subnets list, select the subnet you want to add to the equipment and then click the < Add button. The subnet is added to the equipment and displayed in the "Subnets in" list. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. 5. Add equipment to subnets: a. Select the "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" radio button. b. From the All Subnets list, select the subnet you want to add to the equipment. The equipment the subnet is currently associated with (if any) is displayed in the "Equipment serving Subnet" list. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. 257

266 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers c. In the Network Equipment in OSI Layer 2&3 list, select the equipment you want to add the subnet to and then click the < Add button. The subnet is added to the equipment and displayed in the "Equipment serving Subnet" list. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. 6. Close the dialog and click Save on the item's Detail 1 page to add the subnet. Comm Panel Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. To add comm panels: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > Comm Panels. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar At a minimum, complete all of the required fields on the Detail 1 page. Complete additional fields as needed. a. Enter a comm panel ID. Required b. Select a comm panel type. c. Select the make and model of the comm panel. Required d. Enter the cabinet and rail placement information for the comm panel. Required Note: Once a status of Installed is applied to a, placement fields cannot be edited in Edit mode. This means that rail positions cannot be changed once the item is installed. As a workaround, administrators can edit items from the Items & Ports page in Classic View. e. If needed, enter notes for the comm panel. 258

267 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers f. Create comm ports. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 6. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 7. Click Save. The saved is tagged with a status of New. Since the has a status of new, it appears in red on the cabinet elevation. 8. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. UPS To add an UPS: 1. From the Explorer menu, select Power Items > UPS. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar At a minimum, complete all of the required fields on the Detail 1 page. Complete additional fields as needed. a. Enter a name for the UPS. The item is tagged with a status of New as soon as you enter a name and move to the next field. Required b. Select a make and model for the UPS. Required c. Complete the UPS Specifications fields in order to add a UPS bank. Required d. To add a UPS bank: Note: All UPS units in the bank must have the same electrical specifications. Click Add. 259

268 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Enter a name for the bank. Click Save. Select the UPS bank and click Edit to make changes as needed. 6. Select the UPS bank the UPS belongs to or add a new bank for it. Required 7. Create ports as needed. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 8. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information if needed: a. Enter notes b. Enter maintenance and support information c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable) 9. Click Save. 10. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. PDU A floor PDU must be assigned to a UPS bank to represent the electrical feed for the floor PDU. The Input Voltage and Input Wiring fields for the floor PDU are derived from the UPS bank selection. See UPS (on page 259). To add a PDU: 1. From the Explorer menu, select Power Items > PDU. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar Enter a name for the PDU. Required 6. Select the make and model of the PDU. Required 7. Select the UPS bank the PDU belongs to. Required 260

269 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 8. In the PDU Specification section of the page, enter the kva rating and enter the amps of the input breaker. 9. Click Create in the Breaker Board Information section of the page. The Create Ports dialog appears. a. Select or enter the location of the board. Once selected, the label is applied automatically. The label must be unique to the PDU if the location is "local", or if it must be unique to the data center site if the location is "remote" or "busway". b. Select the phase. Once selected, a diagram of the selected phase displays in the dialog. c. Select the phase voltage. d. Select or enter the maximum amps. e. Select the number of poles and the pole numbering to create for the panel. f. Click Create Panel. Create additional panels as needed and click Close. 10. Once the breaker panel is added, it is displayed in the Breaker Board Information section of the page. 11. To add branch circuit breakers: a. Click "Click to add" at the required pole position. b. Select the breaker poles and the amps rating for the breaker from the two corresponding drop-downs. c. Click another available pole position to add the next breaker. 12. Create ports as needed. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 13. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 14. Click Save. The saved is tagged with a status of New. Since the has a status of new, it appears in red on the cabinet elevation. 15. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. Outlet To add an outlet: 1. From the Explorer menu, select Power Items > Outlets. 261

270 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar A default power outlet ID is applied but can be changed by entering a new power outlet ID. 6. Select a make and model. 7. Assign the outlet to a cabinet. 8. Create ports as needed. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 9. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 10. Click Save. The saved is tagged with a status of New. Since the has a status of new, it appears in red on the cabinet elevation. 11. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. Rack PDU To add a rack PDU: 1. From the Explorer menu, select Power Items > Rack PDU. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 262

271 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar. 4. At a minimum, complete all of the required fields on the Detail 1 page. Complete additional fields as needed. 5. Enter the rack PDU ID. 6. Select the make and model. 7. Assign the rack PDU to cabinet and rail position. Note: Once a status of Installed is applied to a, placement fields cannot be edited in Edit mode. This means that rail positions cannot be changed once the item is installed. As a workaround, administrators can edit items from the Items & Ports page in Classic View. 8. Select the cabinet side if the rack PDU is vertically mounted. Note: Twelve vertically mounted rack PDUs are supported per cabinet. Horizontally mounted/rack mounted rack PDUs do not apply to this step since there is no side to select. 9. If you are adding a Raritan PX2 device for asset sensor management purposes, see Adding a PX2 to dctrack (on page 387) for information on adding this item as a rack PDU. 10. Create ports as needed. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 11. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 12. Click Save. The saved is tagged with a status of New. Since the has a status of new, it appears in red on the cabinet elevation. 13. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. 263

272 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers CRAC Unit To add a CRAC unit: 1. From the Explorer menu, select Environ. Items > CRAC. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar At a minimum, complete all of the required fields on the Detail 1 page. Complete additional fields as needed. a. Enter a name for the CRAC. b. Select the make and model of the item. c. Enter the capacity of the CRAC unit. d. Select the CRAC group the unit belongs to. All CRACs in the group must match the specifications. The CRAC group gets its specification from the first unit in the group. If empty, the specs of the single unit are used. 6. Create ports as needed. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 7. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 8. Click Save. The saved is tagged with a status of New. Since the has a status of new, it appears in red on the cabinet elevation. 9. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. 264

273 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Probe To add a probe: 1. From the Explorer menu, select Environ. Items > Probe. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down in the toolbar. 3. Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop-down in the toolbar. 4. At a minimum, complete all of the required fields on the Detail 1 page. Complete additional fields as needed. 5. Enter the probe name. Required 6. Select the make and model. Required 7. Select the cabinet and rail position of the probe. Required Note: Once a status of Installed is applied to a, placement fields cannot be edited in Edit mode. This means that rail positions cannot be changed once the item is installed. As a workaround, administrators can edit items from the Items & Ports page in Classic View. 8. If you are adding a Raritan EMX device for asset sensor management purposes, see Adding an EMX to dctrack (on page 380) for information on adding this item as a probe. 9. Create ports as needed. See Creating Ports (on page 266). 10. Complete all relevant Detail 2 information (if needed): a. Enter notes (if applicable). b. Enter maintenance and support information (if applicable). c. Complete custom user fields (if applicable). 11. Click Save. The saved is tagged with a status of New. Since the has a status of new, it appears in red on the cabinet elevation. 12. To submit a request for approval, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. 265

274 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Creating Ports When you add ports, you are adding them to a specific item. Ports can be added to an item when the item is initially added to dctrack, or after it has been added. The information you enter when creating a port depends on the type of port you are creating - comm or power. Comm Ports In addition to creating ports from scratch, you are able to clone existing ports and apply them to the item. See Cloning Ports (without Cloning Items) (on page 276). The information in this topic refers to creating data/comm ports for all items except network items and comm panels. See Network Comm Ports (on page 269) and Comm Panel Comm Ports (on page 270). Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To create a port for an existing item: 1. Select the item from the List page. 266

275 2. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 3. Click Create Ports in the Comm Ports section of the page. The Create Ports dialog appears. 4. Select Comm from the Port Type drop-down. 5. Create the port manually or by selecting it from the port library: Manually, select or enter the port name in the Port Name drop-down, then select the connector, media, protocol and speed. Required Or If the port is available in the Port Library, it is displayed in the "Create from the Model's Port Definition in the Library" list at the bottom of the dialog. Select the appropriate port and click Use Selected. 6. If needed, add an IP address or team the port with another existing port: a. To assign an IP address, select a subnet. This automatically assigns the first available address from the selected subnet. You can change the address by manually typing another address in the subnet, or using the drop-down to view all the available addresses in that subnet. See Assigning, Editing and Deleting Port IP Addresses. Or b. Select the server and port associated with the port you want to team the port you are creating with. 7. If needed, enter comments pertinent to the port. 8. If needed, enter the SNMP community name the port is associated with. For power items, comm ports require SNMP community string or you cannot create the port. 9. Click Create Port. If needed, continue creating additional ports. 10. Click Port Placement to open the dialog containing the front and rear view of the device you are adding the port to. From this dialog, you can define the location of the ports on the equipment. See Port Placement (on page 274) for more details on this function. 11. Once all ports are created, click Close. 267

276 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Power Ports In addition to creating ports from scratch, you are able to clone existing ports and apply them to the item. See Cloning Ports (without Cloning Items) (on page 276). Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To create a port for an existing item: 1. Select the item from the List page. 2. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click Create Ports in the Comm Ports section of the page. The Create Ports dialog appears. 4. In the Create Ports dialog, select the Power from the Port Type drop-down. 5. Create the port manually or use a port from the Model's Port Definition Library: 268

277 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Create a port manually by selecting or entering the port name in the Port Name drop-down. Next, select the connector, phase, voltage, nameplate and budget watts. Alternatively, you may enter the nameplate watts and a percentage, and the budget watts are calculated. Required Or If the port is available in the Port Library, it is displayed in the "Create from the Model's Port Definition in the Library" list at the bottom of the dialog. Select the appropriate port and click Use Selected. 6. Click Create Port. 7. Continue adding additional ports, if needed. 8. Click Port Placement to open the dialog containing the front and rear view of the device you are adding the port to. From this dialog, you can define the location of the ports on the equipment. See Port Placement (on page 274) for more details on this function. 9. Once all ports are created, click Close. Network Comm Ports This information applies only to creating comm ports for network items. For information on creating ports for all other items, see Comm Ports (on page 266). Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. To create data/comm ports for network items: 1. Select the item from the List page. 2. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click Create Ports in the Comm Ports section of the page. The Create Ports dialog appears. 4. Create the port manually or select it from the Model's Port Definition Library list: a. Select Comm from the Port Type drop-down. Required b. Enter the number of ports to create. Required c. Select the connector type from the "Connection for all ports" drop-down. Once selected, an image of the connector is displayed. d. Select the media, protocol and speed. 269

278 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers e. Select the port name. f. Enter the number you want to begin numbering ports at. Or If the port is available in the Port Library, it is displayed in the "Create from the Model's Port Definition in the Library" list at the bottom of the dialog. Select the appropriate port and click Use Selected. If additional information needs to be entered that was not entered when the port was selected from the library, enter it as needed. 5. Click Create Port. If needed, continue creating additional ports. 6. Click Port Placement to open the dialog containing the front and rear view of the device you are adding the port to. From this dialog, you can define the location of the ports on the equipment. See Port Placement (on page 274) for more details on this function. 7. Once all ports are created, click Close. Comm Panel Comm Ports This information applies only to creating comm ports for comm panels. For information on creating ports for all other items, see Comm Ports (on page 266). Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. When creating ports for comm panels, you are also be defining the comm panel cabling between two comm panels. Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To create comm ports for comm panels: 1. Select the item from the List page. 2. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click Create Ports in the Comm Ports section of the page. The Create Ports dialog appears. 4. Enter the required information to create the port. a. Enter the number of ports/cables you want to create. b. Select the media type of the cables. 270

279 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers c. Select the connector. Once selected, an image of the connector is displayed in the dialog. d. Select the far end cabinet the cable connects to from the near end cabinet. The near end cabinet is selected by default but can be changed. The near end and far end cabinets cannot be the same. The far end can be in another site and a comm port can go directly to an existing network item. Note: When creating comm ports, you can use an existing comm panel or you can create it while creating the ports. This allows you to create the entire data center's cabling infrastructure without having to close the dialog. 5. Complete the remaining fields in the dialog as needed. 6. Click Create Ports and Cables. If needed, continue creating ports or ports for other comm panel pairs. 7. Click Port Placement to open the dialog containing the front and rear view of the device you are adding the port to. From this dialog, you can define the location of the ports on the equipment. See Port Placement (on page 274) for more details on this function. Port placement can also be changed by clicking Port Placement in the Comm Ports section of the Comm Panel page. 8. Once all ports are created, click Close. Humidity and Temperature Ports Humidity ports and temperature ports are added to the following item types as needed: UPS PDUs Rack PDUs CRAC units Probes Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To add humidity/temperature ports: 1. Select the item from the List page. 2. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click Create Ports. The Create Ports dialog appears. 4. Complete all required fields. a. Select the port type and port name. b. Enter/select the probe location information. 271

280 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 5. If needed, enter comments. 6. Click Create Ports. If needed, continue creating additional ports. 7. Once all ports are created, click Close. Power Outlet Ports The following steps apply only to creating ports for power outlets. Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To create power outlet ports: 1. Select the item from the List page. 2. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click Create Ports in the Power Ports section of the page. The Create Ports dialog appears. 4. Enter the required information to create the port or select it from the Model's Port Definition Library list. a. The circuit is selected by default. b. Enter or select a port name. c. Select a connector. Once selected, an image of the connector appears in the dialog. Or d. Select the port from the Model's Port Definition Library list. 5. Select the AWG, if needed. AWG (American Wire Gauge) denotes the gauge of the electrical cable feeding the outlet port. If this list is empty, the Gatekeeper can populate it from the Administration > Lists page. 6. Enter comments, if needed. 7. Click Create Ports. If needed, continue creating additional ports. 8. Click Port Placement to open the dialog containing the front and rear view of the device you are adding the port to. From this dialog, you can define the location of the ports on the equipment. See Port Placement (on page 274) for more details on this function. 9. Once all ports are created, click Close. 272

281 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Rack PDU Ports In additional to adding ports for rack PDUs, you can also clone existing ports. See Cloning Ports (without Cloning Items) (on page 276). Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To add ports for rack PDUs: 1. Select the item from the List page. 2. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click Create Ports in the Power Ports section of the page. The Create Ports dialog appears. 4. Select the port type. You can then select an existing port from the Model's Port Definition Library list or enter the required information to create the port manually. 5. You must create an input cord before creating the first receptacle port. To manually create an input cord port: a. Select or enter a name for the input cord in the Input Cord field. You can create up to two input cords for a single-phase rack PDU. Only one input cord can be created for a 3-phase rack PDU. Required b. Select a connector. Once selected, an image of the connector is displayed. Required c. Select the phase for the input cord (that is, for the rack PDU). Required d. Select the volts and amp rating for the port. The max amps are calculated and applied based on these values. Required If the data center site is in the United States, the rating value is always 80% of the max. For all other countries, the max value is not applicable. The rating value determines the capacity of the port. e. Enter comments, if needed. 6. To manually create a receptacle port: a. From the Input Cord field, select the input cord that the receptacle port is wired to. Required b. Select a receptacle name for the port. Required c. Select a connector. Once selected, an image of the connector is displayed. Required d. Select the phase for the receptacle. Required If the input cord is 3-phase, you must also select the phase leg that indicates the phase or phases the receptacle is wired to. 273

282 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers e. Select the current. Required If the data center site is in the United States, the rating value always 80% of the max. For all other countries, the max value is not applicable. The rating value determines the capacity of the port. f. Select the name of the breaker and the rating of the breaker that the receptacle is wired to if the rack PDU uses breakers or fuses. Otherwise, leave these fields blank. g. Enter comments, if needed. 7. To manually create a comm port: a. See Comm Ports (on page 266). 8. To manually create a temperature or humidity port: a. See Humidity and Temperature Ports (on page 271). 9. Click Create Ports. If needed, continue creating additional ports. 10. Click Port Placement to open the dialog containing the front and rear view of the device you are adding the port to. From this dialog, you can define the location of the ports on the equipment. See Port Placement (on page 274) for more details on this function. 11. Once all ports are created, click Close. Port Placement To place a port on the device image: 1. Click Port Placement to open the a dialog containing the front and rear view of the device you are adding the port to. From this dialog, you can define the location of the ports on the equipment. a. Use the Front and Rear buttons to view the front and rear views of the equipment. b. Use the port labels to indicate where on the image the port is located. Drag the labels to the correct position using your mouse. c. If another device with the same exact model and the same exact port locations already exists in the application, use the Copy From drop-down to select that device and apply that information to the device. d. If there are many ports depicted on the image and they are tightly packed together such that one label covers part of the label next it, click Overlap to change the order in which the labels overlap each other. e. When there are many ports (in the case of a network item or a comm panel) and the ports layout has a repeatable pattern, you can use the Auto Arrange feature. To do so, enter the X,Y coordinates: 274

283 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers First, determine from the layout of the ports if they fall in group and this group repeats. Begin by entering the information for the first group of ports: Start X and Y. These are the X and Y coordinates for the top-left corner of the first label to be placed. Hint: Use the x,y display box that updates as you move the mouse to understand the range of the values within the image. Group X: is the number of labels in the group along the horizontal (X) axis and the distance between labels. Group Y: is the number of labels in the group along the vertical (Y) axis and the distance between labels. Group sort order, is the order in which the labels are placed within the group. Repeats X: is the number of times the group is repeated horizontally and the distance between the left edge of the first label in the first group and the first label in the second group. Repeats Y: is the number of times the group is repeated vertically and the distance between the top edge of the first label in the first group and the first label in the second group. Repeat sort order is the order in which the groups are repeated. Click the Auto Arrange button after filling out all the boxes. You can then vary the values entered in some of the boxes and click Auto Arrange to fine tune the placement. You can draw a window around a group of labels and then drag one of those labels to a new position to move the select group of labels. a. To move labels between the front and rear images, drag the label to the top left most position on the image and click Front or Rear. The label is displayed on the opposite face of the item and you can then drag it to its position. b. Click Apply All... if you want all other items to have the same model as the item you are currently working with to have the same port placement information. 275

284 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers c. Click Save. Alternatively, click Reset to remove the information you have applied or Cancel to close the dialog without applying the port placement information. Cloning Ports (without Cloning Items) You are able to clone ports without cloning the items they are associated with. See Cloning Items and Their Ports (on page 244) for information on cloning items and ports at once. Note: you cannot clone ports for a comm panel. Only a single comm port can be assigned to a rack PDU and these ports are cloned along with the item. Sensor ports are cloned so long as there is not a duplicate sensor with the same name. Rack PDUs can be cloned as long as power ports are not defined for them. If one or more power ports are defined for rack PDUs, however, the power ports are not cloned along with the rack PDU since power ports are related to each other. By not cloning rack PDU power ports, dctrack makes sure the power ports are not invalidated if, for example, power ports are cloned from a single-phase to a three-phase rack PDU. To clone a port (without cloning items): 1. Select the item from the List page. 2. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click Create Ports in the Comm Ports section of the page. The Create Ports dialog appears. 4. Select Comm or Port from the Port Type drop-down depending on the type of port you are creating. 5. Click Clone Ports to open the Clone Ports dialog. 6. By default, the "Look in Site" drop-down displays the site that item you selected on the List page is associated with. If you want to clone an item from another site, select the site from the drop-down. 276

285 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 7. The "FROM Item" is the item that the port you are cloning is associated with. By default, the "Clone FROM Item" drop-down contains the name of the item you selected from the List page. If you want to clone the port from another item, select the item from the drop-down. 8. The "Clone Ports TO Item" field contains the default name applied to the item based on the "FROM Item" selected in the "Clone FROM Item" drop-down. 9. The Model fields are populated automatically based on the values of the "Clone FROM Item" drop-down and "Clone Ports TO Item" field. 10. Select the type of ports you want to clone: comm ports, power ports and/or sensor ports. 11. Click Clone Ports. This process clones all the ports from the template (source) item to the item that is currently being edited (destination). Building New Circuits (Connections) Circuits can be built when you initially place an item. See Search by Make and Model, Place the Item and Build Circuits (on page 239). Alternatively, they can be built separately for existing items. The steps described here are specific to building a circuit separately. After a circuit is created, a request must be issued. Once the change management process is completed for the request, the circuit status is set to Installed. 277

286 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Building Circuits in the Web Client Building a Data Circuit To build a data circuit: 1. In the Web Client, click Connectivity Management > New Data Circuit. A New Circuit tab is displayed and a Node dialog opens. When a circuit tab is already open, click on the New Circuit button to open a New Circuit tab. If you are in the Circuits list page, click the New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. 2. From the Item drop-down, select the item from which the circuit is initiated. Required 3. Select the port on the item that is used in the connection. dctrack validates the port selection to make sure there are no issues. 4. Once you select the item and port for the last node of your circuit, click Save. Alternatively, click anywhere on the page to close the node dialog. If there is an issue between the node item or port you selected and the item and port of the previous node, a Caution icon ( ) is displayed at the bottom right of the node. Click on the node to view the conflict details. Make changes if needed. Note: If you make changes and have already added additional nodes, the nodes that follow are deleted. dctrack displays a warning when this will occur. 5. New nodes are added to the circuit automatically. Click anywhere on the page to stop adding nodes. 6. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key Building a Power Circuit To build a power circuit: 1. In the Web Client, click Connectivity Management > New Power Circuit. A New Circuit tab is displayed and a Node dialog opens. When a circuit tab is already open, click New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. If you are in the Circuits list page, click the New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. 2. From the Item drop-down, select the item from which the circuit is initiated. Required 3. Select the port on the item that is used in the connection. Required 278

287 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 4. Click Next Node, to move to the item and port selections for the next node. If you select the rack PDU output for a rack PDU that is already connected upstream, the remainder of the circuit is displayed. If there is an issue between the node item or port you selected and the item and port of the previous node, a Caution icon ( ) is displayed at the bottom right of the node. Click on the node to view the conflict details. Note: If you make changes and have already added additional nodes, the nodes that follow are deleted. dctrack displays a warning when this will occur. Once you select the item and port for the last node of your circuit, click Save to save the circuit. Alternatively, click anywhere on the page to close the node dialog. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key Building Circuits in Classic View Creating a New Comm Connection Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. To make comm connections: 1. Select Connections > New. 2. From the Actions drop-down, select New COMM Connection. 3. Select the cabinet that houses the item port for which you wish to build a connection. 4. Select the item type from the drop-down. Note: You cannot start building a connection from item classes such as comm panels. 5. In the Port and Color drop-down, select the specific item port for which you wish to build a connection. The Port and Color field is automatically populated after selecting the item port. 6. The connector drop-down is informational only and provides information about the selected item port. It does not change any attributes of the connection being built. The default selection is Connector. 279

288 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 7. The next drop-down selection is optional. It allows you to define the patch cord type as well as a serial number for the patch cord (if available). Enter the serial number in the Cord ID field box to the far right of the drop-down. 8. Click the Add > button to build the next end point in the connection path. 9. If the next end point, such as End Point 2, is a comm panel, dctrack automatically builds the next end point. For example, if it is End Point 2, dctrack automatically builds End Point 3. This represents the far-end comm panel that is linked to the near-end comm panel via structured cabling. 10. If you use color coding to subdivide the network and cabling comm panel ports into logical groupings, dctrack does an autocheck on the color match between the various connection end points. If the colors do not match, a warning appears. This warning can be ignored if necessary since it does not prevent you from completing the connection. 11. Continue building the next end point until you reach the end of your connection path. Note: At any point during the connection build process, you can click the End Point button to view the item's Detail page. Also, if any of the end points include a comm panel, you can click the View Structured Cable Route button to view the floor map, which depicts the structured cable route. Creating a New Power Connection To make power connections: 1. Select Connections > New. 280

289 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 2. From the Actions drop-down, select New POWER Connection. 3. Under the End Point 1 section, select the cabinet that houses the item port (power supply) for which you wish to build a connection. 4. Next select the item class and then select the specific item port for which you wish to build a connection. Note: The Item Class drop-down only lists Device and Network. You cannot start building a connection from other item classes such as a rack PDU or power outlets. 5. The third field is automatically populated when selecting the item port in the previous step. 6. The next drop-down is informational only. It does not change any attributes of the connection being built. The default selection is Connector. 7. The next drop-down selection is optional but it allows for the definition of the power cord type as well as a serial number for the power cord if available. Enter the serial number in the Cord ID field box to the far right of the drop-down. 8. Next is to click on the > button to build the next end point in the connection path. 9. If the next end point is a rack PDU or a power outlet, then dctrack automatically completes the connection all the way up to the circuit breaker. Note: If the rack PDU was never connected to a power outlet, the first time you attempt to connect to the rack PDU, you are prompted to build the next end point for the rack PDU. Typically, the next end point is a power outlet. 10. If you use color coding to subdivide the power resources by redundant power sources (for example, A, B, Red, Blue, etc.), dctrack does an autocheck on the color match between the various connection end points. If the colors do not match, a warning pop-up appears. This warning can be ignored if necessary and it does not prevent you from completing the connection. Note: At any point during the connection build process, you can click on the End Point button to view the item's Detail page. Also, if any of the end points include a power outlet, you can click on the View Electrical Cable Route button to view the floor map that depicts the electrical cable route between the outlet and the circuit breaker. 11. If at any point during the connection build process you wish to exit without saving, select Clear Form from the Actions drop-down. 12. When the connection build process is complete, you can either select Save Connection or Save and Add Another from the Actions drop-down. 281

290 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 13. Once the connection is saved, the page is switched to the List page where all New connections are listed. 14. Submit the New connection for approval by selecting Submit Connection Request from the Actions drop-down. The Gatekeeper must review this request. If approved, a work order must be generated by the Gatekeeper to affect this new connection. Assigning IP Addresses IP addresses can be added to a port either when it is initially added or after it has been added. Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To assign IP addresses: 1. Open the Detail 1 page of the item you want to assign an IP address to. 2. Select Edit from Page Mode drop-down. 3. Click the IP Addresses button. The "Add/Edit IP Addresses for Item:" dialog appears. 4. Click the IP Lookup button to search for an available IP address and to verify whether the IP address or DNS name is live on the network. The IP lookup function performs a live ping and a DNS lookup for the given IP address or name. 5. Assign a new IP address as follows: a. Make a selection from the Port Name drop-down or enter a new name for the port to which you wish to assign an IP address. b. Enter the IP address in the Address field or select a subnet from the "Find a free IP" drop-down. If this list is empty, see Subnets and VLANs (see "Subnets" on page 284). Once a subnet is selected, the first available IP address is automatically inserted in the Address field. You can then search for other available IP addresses in the selected subnet using the second drop-down. Making a selection in this list replaces the IP address and overwrites any previous entries in the Address field. c. The entries for the Mask, Default Gateway and DNS Name fields are completed automatically. You can make changes to these automatic entries. d. DNS names should be unique but there are some cases where they might not be. Therefore, you are warned if a duplicate is found. e. Select the Virtual checkbox if this is not the primary IP address for a port. In some instances, virtual IP addresses (more than one IP address) are assigned to a single port (network interface). 282

291 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers f. If needed, enter comments in the Comment field. When all entries are made, click Add to assign this IP address to the port. IP Address Teaming (or Trunking) Port teaming or port trunking is a common practice in which one IP address is assigned to multiple ports (network interfaces). To team an unassigned port with another port that is already assigned an IP address: 1. From the Explorer menu, navigate to the Item Detail 1 page for the specific item for which you wish to assign or edit IP addresses. From the toolbar, change to the Edit page mode. Note that you cannot assign or edit IP addresses for an Item with an outstanding request. In such case a red lock icon is displayed in the toolbar indicating that the item cannot be edited. 2. Next click on IP Addresses to open the Add/Edit IP Addresses for Item dialog. 3. Select the unassigned port from the Port Name drop-down or enter it if it does not exist in the list. 4. Type in the same IP address as the one already assigned to the port you wish to team with. If the IP address you typed matches an already assigned IP address, a confirmation prompt asks you to confirm that you wish to use this port. Click Yes button and then click Add. 5. The two ports are now teamed. Editing one port's IP address also updates the other port's IP address accordingly. To remove a teamed port: 1. On the Add/Edit IP Addresses for Item dialog, select the port and click Delete. 2. Click Close. 283

292 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers IP Space Subnets When subnets are defined, assigning IP addresses to items is quicker and allows dctrack to provide you with a list of unused IP addresses so as not to duplicate addresses. While an IP address that does not belong to a subnet may be assigned, it is highly recommended that you do not do this since address duplication cannot be tracked and prevented in this case. Subnets are defined for a particular site so you can have different subnets for each data center. Adding Subnets To add a subnet: 1. Select IP Space > Subnets. The Subnets page opens. 2. Select Add from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Make the appropriate selection for the new subnet from the Mask drop-down. 4. Enter the network prefix in the Net Prefix field. 5. From the Subnets drop-down, select the quantity of subnets you want to create. The number of subnets is limited to the maximum possible number of subnets based on the mask selection. 6. The Hosts/Subnet field provides the total number of hosts (or IP addresses) that can be created for each subnet. 7. The first Subnet drop-down provides the address of the first subnet to be created. You can edit the first octet after the network prefix. The fourth octet must always be 0. For example, if the network prefix is two octets, then you can type over the third octet if that address is not in the list. 8. The entry in the Default Gateway field is created automatically but you can edit it as needed. 9. The DNS Suffix entry can remain blank. If a selection is made from the drop-down, the value is appended to the name of the server that is assigned an IP address from this subnet. If this drop-down is empty, ask the Gatekeeper to provide selections and then select the DNS Suffix List. 10. Making a selection form the Logical Name drop-down is optional but highly recommended since it is a way to identify the subnet's purpose or function. If this drop-down is empty, ask the Gatekeeper to provide selections and then select the Subnets/VLANs. 284

293 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 11. The Location Type drop-down can only be completed after a selection is made from the Logical Name drop-down. This list is used in conjunction with the Location drop-down and it limits the item locations that can be assigned IP addresses from the subnet. If Group is selected and the Location drop-down is empty, ask the Gatekeeper to provide selections and then select the Cabinet Groupings. If Row is selected and the Location drop-down is empty, then you have not specified the row label entry for any of the cabinets on the IT Items Cabinet page. 12. Each subnet can be associated with up to four colors for identification purposes. 13. When all fields have been completed, click Create. If a duplication or overlap in the entries is detected, no subnets are created. You must make the necessary adjustments to remove the duplication. 285

294 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Adding Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog) Use the Subnet and VLAN Management dialog to build associations between network items, or associations between blades in a chassis and subnets. If a desired network item is not in the list, make sure the OSI field for that network item is set to Layer 2 or 3 accordingly. The Subnet and VLAN Management dialog can be accessed from three areas in dctrack: An IT item's network Detail 1 page by clicking on the Subnets & VLANs button. The IP Space Subnets page by clicking on the Subnets & VLANs button. The IP Space Addresses page by clicking on the Subnets & VLANs button. There are two ways to associate equipment and subnets from this dialog: Select specific subnets and then add the subnet to additional equipment. Use the "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" view by selecting its corresponding radio button. Select specific equipment and then add additional subnets to it. Use the "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" view by selecting its corresponding radio button. You can also remove subnets from equipment or remove equipment from subnets. To add subnets to equipment: 1. Select IP Space > Subnets. The Subnets page opens. 2. Click the Subnets & VLANs button. The Subnets and VLAN Management dialog appears. 3. Add subnets to equipment: a. Leave the "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" radio button selected. b. In the Network Equipment in OSI Layer 2&3 list, select the equipment you want to add the subnet to. If other subnets are already applied to the equipment, they are displayed in the "Subnets in" list. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. c. From the All Subnets list, select the subnet you want to add to the equipment and then click the < Add button. The subnet is added to the equipment and displayed in the "Subnets in" list. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. Or 4. Add equipment to subnets: 286

295 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers a. Select the "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" radio button. b. From the All Subnets list, select the subnet you want to add to the equipment. The equipment the subnet is currently associated with (if any) is displayed in the "Equipment serving Subnet" list. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. c. In the Network Equipment in OSI Layer 2&3 list, select the equipment you want to add the subnet to and then click the < Add button. The subnet is added to the equipment and displayed in the "Equipment serving Subnet" list. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. Submitting Requests Submitting a New Request Once an item is added, select Submit New Item Request from the Actions drop-down of the item's Detail page. After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request, a work order to physically add the item in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper. Creating a Discard Item Request You can discard or decommission items that are no longer used in the data center and, therefore, can be removed from dctrack. If the item is a device and it has comm ports and power ports that are already connected, these ports are disconnected as well. Any IP addresses that were assigned to comm ports are released back to the IP subnet address database once the discard process is completed. Once the request is submitted, the Gatekeeper reviews and approves the request, and issues a work order. Disconnection work orders must be completed before Item Discard work orders. If there are several requests to discard items and disconnect comm ports and power port connections, these requests are linked together. Therefore, all requests can be approved at once by approving any one of the associated requests. Once the work order is marked as Complete, the discard process is complete. To discard (remove) an item: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > [Item Class]. For example, IT Items > Device. 2. From either the List or Detail page, select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Select Discard Item Request from the Actions drop-down. 287

296 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Creating a Move Item Request Items can be moved from one cabinet to another cabinet either within the same site or to another site. Note: You cannot move blades by themselves. You must move a chassis along with its blades. When you move blade chassis, any comm ports associated with it are not moved. You must recreate them. To create a move item request: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > [Item Class]. For example, IT Items > Device. 2. From either the List or Detail page, select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Select Move Item Request from the Actions drop-down. The Move page opens. 4. Begin the move process by selecting the new destination site and cabinet from the Destination Information section. The Destination Site drop-down contains the current site by default. Once the Cabinet drop-down is selected, select an available rail position from the Rail Position drop-down. 5. Reconnect the device comm ports via patch cords to the available comm panel (cabling patching panel) comm ports. To do this: a. Select the device comm port from the Connect drop-down. b. Click Select Connection to open the Connection Building page. c. Build the connection and click Use Connection Below to save it. Alternatively, if you want to skip reconnecting the port, click Don't Reconnect Port. A Disconnect request is then created for the port at the item's source location and it is not get reconnected after the item is moved to the destination location. d. Finally, if you wanted the connection for the port to remain on the same network port after it is moved, define the new cabling portion of the connection. When you reach the endpoint for the network port, click Keep Current Port. The network endpoint is filled in with the same network port that the device comm port is already connected to. Repeat this step for every device comm port in the drop-down. You can skip reconnecting all comm ports at the destination by selecting the Skip checkbox in the Device Comm Port section of the page. 6. Reconnect the device power ports (power supplies) via power cords to the available rack PDU power ports or power outlet ports. To do this: 288

297 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers a. Select the device power port from the Connect drop-down. This is the port that the near-end of the power cord is to be plugged in to. b. Select the rack PDU power port or power outlet port from the drop-down. This is the port that the far-end of the power cord is plugged in to. c. Click Add. If there is available power in the power path of the selected port, the connection is accepted and added to the list. If power is not available, the connection is denied and you must choose a different port in the rack PDU or a different rack PDU. If none are found, you may need to choose a different cabinet. Repeat this step for every device power port listed in the drop-down. You can skip reconnecting the power ports at the destination by selecting the Skip checkbox in the Device Power Ports section of the page. 7. In the far right section of the page, the Resource indicators display whether the requested move has all the required resources. The following indicators must be green for the move to be allowed: Rail Comm connector All network indicators Power Connector and Amps The following indicators are not required to be green. When they are yellow, the match in the destination cabinet has not been found. However, this is only a warning and you can proceed without the availability of that resource. 289

298 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Comm port color code and group Network port color code and group Power port color code. When any of the indicators is gray, the recourses are not applicable and do not affect whether the move is allowed or not. For example, if the device you are moving does not have any comm ports or you elected to skip all the comm ports, the comm port indicators and network port indicators are gray. Managing Existing Items Existing items have already been added to dctrack, installed in the data center, and any tickets associated with their installation are marked in dctrack as Complete. Once the item exists in dctrack, it can be located in the application and, if necessary, changes can be made to it. Changes may include moving the item, cloning the item, decommissioning the item and so on. 290

299 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Quick Item Search Use the Quick Item Search feature to quickly locate an item and view the item's information such as make, model, location, cabinet and so on. Focus the search using the Search In drop-down, and dctrack searches only for the selected item class type. The Search By drop-down allows you to select the criteria by which you want to search. Depending on the criteria you select, you either: Select from a list of values such as selecting a Make or Type Enter item details such as searching by weight or purchase price using greater than, lesser than or equal to criteria Enter full or partial search criteria such as entering a full or partial item name or cabinet name Note: When doing a partial search, dctrack finds all items containing that partial criteria. For example, if you are searching for 'BC', items that contain 'ABCD', 'BCD', and 'BC' are displayed. If item(s) matching your criteria are found, the results are displayed on the Quick Item Search page. This information is read-only. Once results are displayed, further narrow down your results using any one or all of the following: Location - select the location(s) the item resides in Class - select the item's class to narrow the search Status - select the status currently applied to the item to narrow the search Note: You cannot sort on the first three columns, but all other columns are sortable. dctrack does not support sorting by more than one column at a time. If needed, copy the results of a quick search to a text file or Microsoft Excel file using Ctrl + click to select the rows, then Ctrl + C to copy the field headings and selected rows. The information is copied to your clipboard and can be pasted into either file format. Records are delimited by a pipe symbol ( ). See your Microsoft Excel documentation for information on formatting the data in a spreadsheet. To search using the quick item search: 1. Click Asset Management > Quick Item Search. The Quick Item Search page opens. 2. Select the Search In criteria. 3. Select the Search By criteria. 291

300 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 4. Type full or partial search criteria in the Search field, or select criteria (depending on the Search In selection you made). 5. Click Search. Editing Items See Edit Privileges by Role (on page 125) for details on edit privileges for each dctrack role. Once a status of Installed is applied to a, placement fields cannot be edited in Edit mode. This means that rail positions cannot be changed once the item is installed. As a workaround, administrators can edit items from the Items & Ports page in Classic View. To edit items: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > [Item Class]. For example, IT Items > Device. 2. From either the List or Detail page, click on the item to be edited and select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Edit the item as needed, including adding information such as serial number and so on the Details 2 page. 4. Click Save. Changing a Physical Server to a VM Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To change a physical server to a VM server: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > Device. 2. Select the device you want to change to a virtual machine. 3. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 4. From the Actions drop-down, select Convert Item to VM. If the device item has data/comm and power ports that are connected to it, these ports are disconnected when the server is changed. Also, if the item has power ports, disk volumes, and IP and MAC addresses, these ports, disks and MAC addresses are deleted and the IP addresses are released back to the IP subnet database. However, any applications assigned to this device item remain unchanged. 292

301 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers The Gatekeeper then reviews and approves/rejects the request(s) and issues the associated work order(s). Note: All requests for converting the item and disconnecting the data/comm ports and power ports are linked together, so they can be approved by approving any of the associated requests. Note: Disconnection work orders must be completed before an Item Discard work order. Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. Once the work orders are completed and the requests are marked as Complete, the conversion process is then complete. Adding Applications to a Device Item In the bottom section of device Detail 1 item pages, there is a form to track as many applications as needed. Applications can be added manually or through SNMP, and they can be added when the item is initially added to the application or after it has been added. For each application, there are five fields that can be used for tracking: Criticality Application Admin User Departments - This field can be managed by clicking on the Application User Departments button. a. From the dialog, select the application from the Application Name drop-down. b. Make the corresponding selection from the User Department drop-down c. Click Add. Repeat these steps as needed to add multiple user departments for each application. d. Click Close to save and close. Application Sites - This field can be managed by clicking on the Application Sites button. a. From the dialog, select the application from the Application Name drop-down. 293

302 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers b. Make the corresponding selection from the Application Sites drop-down c. Click Add. Repeat these steps as needed to add multiple sites for each application. d. Click Close to save and close. Dependency Note: You can create ports in either Add or Edit mode. To add an application: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > Device. 2. Select the device you want to add the virtual machine to. 3. Select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 4. Add the application manually or through SNMP. Manually: a. From the Application Name drop-down, select the application to be tracked. b. If the application name does not exist in the list, then switch to Add page mode and select Add New Application Name from the Actions drop-down. The Manage Lists dialog appears. Add the application name and click Save. Switch back to the Edit page mode and go back to the device item in question. Auto-Discovery a. Click the Discovered Applications button. The Apps from SNMP dialog appears. All applications that were auto-discovered via SNMP and are installed on the device item are displayed. If no applications are displayed or the specific application you are looking for is not displayed, run the SNMP process again. b. Select applications to be added. 5. Click Update and then click Close. Building New Circuits (Connections) Circuits can be built when you initially place an item. See Search by Make and Model, Place the Item and Build Circuits (on page 239). Alternatively, they can be built separately for existing items. The steps described here are specific to building a circuit separately. After a circuit is created, a request must be issued. Once the change management process is completed for the request, the circuit status is set to Installed. 294

303 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Building Circuits in the Web Client Building a Data Circuit To build a data circuit: 1. In the Web Client, click Connectivity Management > New Data Circuit. A New Circuit tab is displayed and a Node dialog opens. When a circuit tab is already open, click on the New Circuit button to open a New Circuit tab. If you are in the Circuits list page, click the New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. 2. From the Item drop-down, select the item from which the circuit is initiated. Required 3. Select the port on the item that is used in the connection. dctrack validates the port selection to make sure there are no issues. 4. Once you select the item and port for the last node of your circuit, click Save. Alternatively, click anywhere on the page to close the node dialog. If there is an issue between the node item or port you selected and the item and port of the previous node, a Caution icon ( ) is displayed at the bottom right of the node. Click on the node to view the conflict details. Make changes if needed. Note: If you make changes and have already added additional nodes, the nodes that follow are deleted. dctrack displays a warning when this will occur. 5. New nodes are added to the circuit automatically. Click anywhere on the page to stop adding nodes. 6. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key Building a Power Circuit To build a power circuit: 1. In the Web Client, click Connectivity Management > New Power Circuit. A New Circuit tab is displayed and a Node dialog opens. When a circuit tab is already open, click New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. If you are in the Circuits list page, click the New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. 2. From the Item drop-down, select the item from which the circuit is initiated. Required 3. Select the port on the item that is used in the connection. Required 295

304 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 4. Click Next Node, to move to the item and port selections for the next node. If you select the rack PDU output for a rack PDU that is already connected upstream, the remainder of the circuit is displayed. If there is an issue between the node item or port you selected and the item and port of the previous node, a Caution icon ( ) is displayed at the bottom right of the node. Click on the node to view the conflict details. Note: If you make changes and have already added additional nodes, the nodes that follow are deleted. dctrack displays a warning when this will occur. Once you select the item and port for the last node of your circuit, click Save to save the circuit. Alternatively, click anywhere on the page to close the node dialog. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key Building Circuits in Classic View Creating a New Comm Connection Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. To make comm connections: 1. Select Connections > New. 2. From the Actions drop-down, select New COMM Connection. 3. Select the cabinet that houses the item port for which you wish to build a connection. 4. Select the item type from the drop-down. Note: You cannot start building a connection from item classes such as comm panels. 5. In the Port and Color drop-down, select the specific item port for which you wish to build a connection. The Port and Color field is automatically populated after selecting the item port. 6. The connector drop-down is informational only and provides information about the selected item port. It does not change any attributes of the connection being built. The default selection is Connector. 296

305 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 7. The next drop-down selection is optional. It allows you to define the patch cord type as well as a serial number for the patch cord (if available). Enter the serial number in the Cord ID field box to the far right of the drop-down. 8. Click the Add > button to build the next end point in the connection path. 9. If the next end point, such as End Point 2, is a comm panel, dctrack automatically builds the next end point. For example, if it is End Point 2, dctrack automatically builds End Point 3. This represents the far-end comm panel that is linked to the near-end comm panel via structured cabling. 10. If you use color coding to subdivide the network and cabling comm panel ports into logical groupings, dctrack does an autocheck on the color match between the various connection end points. If the colors do not match, a warning appears. This warning can be ignored if necessary since it does not prevent you from completing the connection. 11. Continue building the next end point until you reach the end of your connection path. Note: At any point during the connection build process, you can click the End Point button to view the item's Detail page. Also, if any of the end points include a comm panel, you can click the View Structured Cable Route button to view the floor map, which depicts the structured cable route. Creating a New Power Connection To make power connections: 1. Select Connections > New. 2. From the Actions drop-down, select New POWER Connection. 297

306 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 3. Under the End Point 1 section, select the cabinet that houses the item port (power supply) for which you wish to build a connection. 4. Next select the item class and then select the specific item port for which you wish to build a connection. Note: The Item Class drop-down only lists Device and Network. You cannot start building a connection from other item classes such as a rack PDU or power outlets. 5. The third field is automatically populated when selecting the item port in the previous step. 6. The next drop-down is informational only. It does not change any attributes of the connection being built. The default selection is Connector. 7. The next drop-down selection is optional but it allows for the definition of the power cord type as well as a serial number for the power cord if available. Enter the serial number in the Cord ID field box to the far right of the drop-down. 8. Next is to click on the > button to build the next end point in the connection path. 9. If the next end point is a rack PDU or a power outlet, then dctrack automatically completes the connection all the way up to the circuit breaker. Note: If the rack PDU was never connected to a power outlet, the first time you attempt to connect to the rack PDU, you are prompted to build the next end point for the rack PDU. Typically, the next end point is a power outlet. 10. If you use color coding to subdivide the power resources by redundant power sources (for example, A, B, Red, Blue, etc.), dctrack does an autocheck on the color match between the various connection end points. If the colors do not match, a warning pop-up appears. This warning can be ignored if necessary and it does not prevent you from completing the connection. Note: At any point during the connection build process, you can click on the End Point button to view the item's Detail page. Also, if any of the end points include a power outlet, you can click on the View Electrical Cable Route button to view the floor map that depicts the electrical cable route between the outlet and the circuit breaker. 11. If at any point during the connection build process you wish to exit without saving, select Clear Form from the Actions drop-down. 12. When the connection build process is complete, you can either select Save Connection or Save and Add Another from the Actions drop-down. 298

307 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 13. Once the connection is saved, the page is switched to the List page where all New connections are listed. 14. Submit the New connection for approval by selecting Submit Connection Request from the Actions drop-down. The Gatekeeper must review this request. If approved, a work order must be generated by the Gatekeeper to affect this new connection. Editing Connections To edit connections: 1. Select Connections > New. The List page contains the connection status in the second column. For the connection to be editable, the value in the Status column must be New. 2. Select the connection to be edited from the List page and either double-click on it or click on the Detail icon. 3. You can make changes to the final end point in the connection path. If you want to make changes to prior end points, you are prompted to clear all the end points downstream from the end point you are currently editing. 4. When connection editing is complete, select Save Connection from the Actions drop-down. This switches the page to the List page where all New connections are listed. 5. Submit the New connection for approval by selecting Resubmit Connection Request in the Actions drop-down. The Gatekeeper must review this request. If approved, then a work order must be generated by the Gatekeeper to affect this new connection. Disconnecting Connections To disconnect: 1. Select Connections > New. The List page contains the connection status in the second column. To be able to disconnect a connection, the value in the Status column must be Installed. 2. From the List page, select the connection to be disconnected and select Disconnect from the Actions drop-down. This initiates the request process for the disconnect. The Gatekeeper must review this request. If approved, a work order is generated by the Gatekeeper to disconnect the connection. Editing and Deleting IP Addresses To edit an IP address: 1. From the Explorer menu, navigate to the Item Detail 1 page of the item for which you wish to edit IP addresses. 299

308 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 2. Switch the page to Edit page mode. 3. Select the port with the IP address you wish to edit. 4. Select Edit. This populates all the entries in the text and drop-down fields. 5. Make the desired edits and click Update. To delete an IP address: 1. From the Explorer menu, navigate to the Item Detail 1 page of the item for which you wish to delete an IP addresses. 2. Switch the page to Edit page mode. 3. Select the port with the IP address you wish to delete. 4. Select Delete. This restores the IP address to the database of available IP addresses. Editing and Deleting Subnets To edit a subnet: Note: The Mask, Subnet Start and Subnet End fields cannot be edited. If these values must be removed or changed, the subnet must be deleted and a new one created. 1. From the toolbar, select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 2. From the list of subnets in the "Defined Subnets for this Site" list, click on the subnet you want to edit. Editable values appear in the text fields and drop-downs. 3. Make changes as needed and click Update. To delete a subnet: 1. From the toolbar, select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 2. From the list of subnets in the "Defined Subnets for this Site" list, click on the subnet you want to delete. 3. Click the Delete button. A subnet cannot be deleted if the IP addresses of the corresponding subnet have already been assigned to items. Only one subnet can be deleted at a time. 300

309 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Viewing Existing Subnets and Related Equipment Subnets can be viewed on the Subnets page in the "Defined Subnets for this Site" section. To view the relationships between subnets and the equipment they are associated with, click the Subnets & VLANs button on the Subnets page to open the Subnet and VLAN Management dialog. This dialog allows you to view all subnets and the equipment-to-subnet relationships currently maintained in the application, as well as add and remove item subnets. See Adding and Removing Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog). Use the "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" or "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" radio buttons to change how the relationships between the equipment and subnets are displayed. Leaving the default "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" radio button selected displays the subnets that are associated with the piece of equipment selected in the Network Equipment in OSI Layer 2&3 list on the left side of the dialog. The "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" displays the pieces of equipment that are associated with the selected subnet listed in the All Subnets list on the right side of the dialog. Removing Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog) To remove a subnet associations: 1. Remove a subnet from equipment: a. Leave the "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" radio button selected. b. To remove an association, select one or more subnet from the list in the middle and click the > button. Or 2. Remove equipment from a subnet: a. Select the "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" radio button. 301

310 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers b. To remove an association, select one or more pieces of equipment from the list in the middle and click the < Remove button. Editing IP Addresses Editing existing IP addresses is best performed from the item's Detail 1 page. However, an IP address can also be edited from the IP Space Addresses page. To edit an IP address: 1. Select IP Space > Addresses. The IP Address page opens. 2. Select Edit from Page Mode drop-down. 3. Locate the IP address you want to edit and select it. 4. Make the appropriate changes to the following fields: a. MAC address b. Address c. Mask d. Gateway 5. Click the IP Lookup button to search for an available IP address and to verify whether the IP address or DNS name is live on the network. The IP lookup function performs a live ping and a DNS lookup for the given IP address or name. 302

311 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers 6. Click the IP Subnets button to navigate to the Subnets page or the Subnets & VLANs button to open the Subnets and VLAN Management dialog. See Subnets and VLANs (see "Subnets" on page 284). DNS Audit The DNS Audit page allows you to perform an audit in order to update the manually entered DNS names for each server. To do this, dctrack compares the manually entered values with the live DNS server on your network. When you click the Begin Audit button, a DNS lookup for each IP address is sent and the received DNS name is compared with the DNS name entered for that IP Address. Once the audit process is complete, you can choose one of three options, as described in this section, to resolve any conflicts. Audit Trail Changes to an item's information are tracked in the Audit Trail log. Changes are logged when made in Edit Mode only. While in Add Mode, no changes are logged to the Audit Trail. If the item has audit trail results, the results that are displayed are filtered for that item. If the item does not have audit trail results, audit trail results for all items are displayed. You can sort and filter the audit trail results as needed. Click the Advanced button to apply addition Boolean filters to the results. To view an audit trail: From any item page in any page mode, click Audit Trail. The Automatic Audit Trail Log dialog appears. 303

312 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Getting Item Readings You are able to retrieve power and sensor readings from device, rack PDU, probe, UPS, PDU and CRAC items by opening the item and clicking on Get Readings in the Power Ports section of the item's Detail 1 page. In order to get these readings, if you are using Power IQ, Power IQ integration must be turned on. Additionally, in order for readings to be retrieved, the items must be capable of reporting data over SNMP, and the following criteria must be met for the items: An IP address and SNMP community string must be assigned to the comm port Power ports and/or temperature and humidity sensors must be created for it If you are not using Power IQ and are using dctrack only, an SNMP MIB must be defined to the item (see Creating a SNMP MIB Definition (on page 188)). Note: While dctrack does not support contact closure and air flow sensor items being added to dctrack, if these sensor types are being monitored by PowerIQ, you can view their readings by clicking Environ. Items > Probes > Readings, then selecting CONTACT_CLOSURE from the Sensor Type drop-down. Asset Management Sensor Event Information To view asset management events: In the dctrack Web Client, click Events. The Events page opens. The following asset sensor management event information is captured on the Events page: Event Authorized - Asset Tag connected Unauthorized - Asset Tag connected Description An authorized asset tag that is attached to a device is plugged in to the correct plug on the asset sensor. It is in an Installed state and attached to the device it is expected to be attached to. An asset tag that is attached to an item and plugged in to an asset sensor is detected but is not authorized to be added since it is not approved in the change management workflow. 304

313 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Asset tag removed Unknown - Asset Tag connected Indicates an asset tag has been unplugged from the asset sensor. dctrack found that the tag ID is not attached to the expected item, or that the tag was originally assigned to one item and is now assigned to a new item. Clicking on an event displays the event details in the Event Details section on the right. The information on the Events page can be sorted by clicking on a column header, and filtered by selecting from the Filter By drop-downs. You can also filter by status by selecting from the Status drop-down in the Status column. Exporting Asset Management Events See Exporting Events (on page 354) for more information. Purging Asset Management Event Information See Purging Events (on page 354) for more information. Reports Viewing Reports There are various reports available in dctrack and each is viewed in the same way. The steps described here are general and apply to all report types. Each report contains different information based on the report type. See the individual report topics in this section for details on the information contained in each report. To view a report: 1. Click Reports and then click on the report you want to view. 2. Select the paper size to apply to the report. 3. Select the items to appear in the report, either Print All or Print Selected. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections if you are including only selected items in the report. 4. Click Preview Report. The report opens in a secondary window. Right-click on the report and select Print to print it. 305

314 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Elevations The Elevations report displays either a text-based or visual representation of the cabinet elevations for the cabinets being managed in dctrack. Report criteria Print All Cabinets Print Selected Cabinets Cabinet View Description Selected by default. Generates a report containing all elevations for all cabinets being managed in dctrack. Select the specific cabinets that appear in the report. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections. Specify whether you want the report to display the elevations as text only, or display the front or rear images of the cabinet elevations. Cab Detail Like the Elevations report, the Cab Details report displays either a text-based or visual representation of the cabinet elevations for the cabinets being managed in dctrack. This report includes addition cabinet details such as the make, model, size, weight, and so on. Report criteria Print All Cabinets Print Selected Cabinets Cabinet View Description Selected by default. Generates a report containing all elevations for all cabinets being managed in dctrack. Select the specific cabinets that appear in the report. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections. Specify whether you want the report to display the elevations as text only, or display the front or rear images of the cabinet elevations. 306

315 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Cab Resource The Cab Resource report contains information on cabinets and the resources that are associated with them such as power ports, network equipment reports, comm ports, and so on. Report criteria Print All Cabinets Print Selected Cabinets Cabinet View Description Selected by default. Generates a report containing all elevations for all cabinets being managed in dctrack. Select the specific cabinets that appear in the report. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections. Specify whether you want the report to display the elevations as text only, or display the front or rear images of the cabinet elevations. Items The Items report contains a list of all items being maintained in dctrack. Additionally, information specific to each item, such as the item type, function, administrator and so on, is captured in this report. This report can be filtered to display information based on criteria you specify. View Options Only one view option can be selected at a time. Report criteria Hide Ports for All Items Show Ports for each Item Show Applications for each Item (Devices Only) Show Custom Fields Description Selected by default. Ports associated with the items are not captured in the report. Ports associated with the items are captured in the report. The applications associated with device items are captured in the report. Any custom fields created for the device is captured in the report. If Show Custom Fields is selected, the Custom User Fields section of the page becomes active. Select the custom fields to include in the report by clicking on them in the Available Custom Fields box and then clicking the Add button. 307

316 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Report criteria Show SNMP Discovered Data Description Use the Column Width (in) field to adjust the report column width as needed to accommodate the custom fields. The maximum column width is 9". Data for the device that was discovered via SNMP data discovery are captured in the report. If Show SNMP Discovered Data is selected, the Show SNMP Discovered Data Options section of the page becomes active. Select the SNMP discovered data options to include in the report. Filters Applying filters allows you to limit the data that is contained in the report. This is useful if you are maintaining a lot of items in dctrack and would like to limit the time needed to generate the report. Report criteria All Data Filter per list below Description This is the same as not applying a filter at all. All data for the items being maintained in dctrack are contained in the report. Select this radio button and then select the criteria by which the report should be filtered. Only data that meets the criteria you set are captured in the report. Once you have selected the criteria for the filter, click the Add button to apply it to the report. Click on the filter and then click Remove to remove it. Sort Sorting allows you to define how the data in the report is sorted when it is displayed. Report criteria Sort on Item Field Description The field that is selected is at the root of the sorting order of the report. Selected Ascending or Descending to order the report data. Once you have selected the criteria for the filter, click the Add button to apply it to the report. Click on the filter and then click Remove 308

317 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Report criteria Description to remove it. Item Details Like the Items report, the Item Details report displays either text-based representations of items or, when available, images of the items being managed in dctrack. This report includes addition device details such as the make, model, and so on. Report criteria Print All Items Print Selected Items Cabinet View Item Images Per Cabinet Report Description Selected by default. Generates a report containing all devices being managed in dctrack. Select the specific devices that appear in the report. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections. Specify whether you want the report to display the devices as text only, or display the front or rear image of the device. Select this if you want to print all items in the currently selected site. The items are sorted by cabinet and ordered from the bottom of the cabinet to the top. Use this report for an initial survey of the site or to perform an audit. Connections The Connections report allows you to view connection information for all cabinets (All Connections in Cabinets Report) or specific types of connectors that are connected to specific items (What Connects to an Item Report). All Connections in Cabinets Report Report criteria Print All Cabinets Print Selected Cabinets Description Selected by default. Generates a report containing all elevations for all cabinets being managed in dctrack. Select the specific cabinets to appear in the report. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections. 309

318 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Report criteria Connection Type Description Select the type of connection to include in the report. Selecting All includes both Comm and Power connections. What Connects to an Item Report Report criteria Item Class Print All Items Print Selected Items Ports Connection Type Description Select the item type you want to view connections for. Selected by default. Generates a report containing all items and all connectors to each item. Select the specific items to appear in the report. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections. Include or exclude ports from the report. Select the type of connection to include in the report. Power The Power report allows you to view power data for cabinets being managed in dctrack. Report criteria Power Reports Print All Cabinets Print Selected Cabinets Description Selected the power related information to be included in the report. Selected by default. Generates a report containing all elevations for all cabinets being managed in dctrack. Select the specific cabinets to appear in the report. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections. 310

319 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Applications The Applications report contains a list of the applications installed on the servers that are being managed in dctrack. You can view the report by application or by server. Report criteria Group By Description Group the information in the report by application or by server. If Applications is selected, applications are displayed in the selection box. Conversely, if Servers is selected, servers are listed. Select All if you want the report to contain all applications or servers. Choose Selected to select the specific applications or servers to appear in the report. Use Ctrl + click or Ctrl + Shift to make item selections. snmptrack Report The data in the snmptrack report is collected using the snmptrack Poller. See Using snmptrack Poller (on page 187). Report criteria SNMP Capable Items Cabinet Rows Cabinets "Items selected here will be plotted" Readings Amps Temperature Humidity Duration All Dates Date Range Description Use these lists to select the SNMP capable items to be polled for the report. Select the readings to be taken from the equipment during the SNMP polling. Select All Dates if want the report to continue SNMP readings from the date the equipment was added to the SNMP Poller to the present. Select a specific date range within which to poll for readings. 311

320 Chapter 6: Help for Data Center Managers Report criteria X-Axis Layout Description Use this section to define how the report data is displayed on the page in the chart. Minor Tick - Select the number of major tick marks to be used in the report chart and select a time value for them. Major Tick - Select the number of minor tick marks to be used in the report chart and select a time value for them. Date/Time Format - The date and time format used in the report chart. 312

321 Chapter 7 Help for Data Center Technicians In This Chapter Overview dctrack Privileges Needed for Data Center Technicians Search Items Editing Items Editing Connections Disconnecting Connections Editing and Deleting IP Addresses Editing and Deleting Subnets Viewing Existing Subnets and Related Equipment Removing Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog) Editing IP Addresses Marking Work Orders as Complete Overview This section of dctrack Help describes dctrack related tasks associated with the physical installation of data center equipment in a data center by Data Center Technicians. For the purposes of this Help, we are assuming the item being installed has already been added to dctrack and a work order has been created to install the item. For information on performing these steps, see Managing New Items (on page 224). Specifically, this section of Help walks you through: Searching for items in dctrack so you can locate items in the database make updates such as creating circuits, changing placement information such as RU, and so on Creating circuits for an item Editing item information such as rack unit, cabinet and so on Adding item information such as serial numbers, asset tags and so on Change the status of an item to Installed once it is installed in the data center 313

322 Chapter 7: Help for Data Center Technicians dctrack Privileges Needed for Data Center Technicians Depending on the tasks a data center technician performs in a data center, they need at least one of the following: Manager Managers can view, add and edit items and connections so long as the team they belong to is listed under the Admin Team field for the currently selected item or if the Admin Team field is blank, in which case anyone except users with an access level of Viewer can make changes. A red lock icon is displayed when the current selected item is not editable. Member Members can view, add and edit items and connections so long as their name is listed under the System Admin field for the currently selected item or if the Admin Team field is blank, in which case anyone except users with an access level of Viewer can make changes. A red lock icon is displayed when the current selected item is not editable. Viewer Users with Viewer level access are able to access pages but cannot make changes to the data. Viewers can also access and view reports that can then be printed, and they have access to the Web Client Dashboard. 314

323 Chapter 7: Help for Data Center Technicians Search Items The Search Items page allows you to quickly and easily locate items in the data center by searching through items, ports, custom fields you have created, applications, and discovered applications. dctrack provides you with the ability to search based on a wide range of criteria such as item name, item type, model, manufacturer, and so on. Further, you are able to define the parameters of the search so you control how narrow or wide your results are. Once items are found that match your criteria, you can view them by double-clicking on them in the list. You can also export your search results to a spreadsheet by clicking Export and providing a file name. The search criteria and fields that are displayed in the results vary based on the item type you select. For example, if you are searching items, Status, Item Class, Item Name fields and so on are criteria by which you can search. If you are searching applications, you can select criteria such as Application Name, User Departments and so on. Editing Items See Edit Privileges by Role (on page 125) for details on edit privileges for each dctrack role. Once a status of Installed is applied to a, placement fields cannot be edited in Edit mode. This means that rail positions cannot be changed once the item is installed. As a workaround, administrators can edit items from the Items & Ports page in Classic View. To edit items: 1. From the Explorer menu, select IT Items > [Item Class]. For example, IT Items > Device. 2. From either the List or Detail page, click on the item to be edited and select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 3. Edit the item as needed, including adding information such as serial number and so on the Details 2 page. 4. Click Save. 315

324 Chapter 7: Help for Data Center Technicians Editing Connections To edit connections: 1. Select Connections > New. The List page contains the connection status in the second column. For the connection to be editable, the value in the Status column must be New. 2. Select the connection to be edited from the List page and either double-click on it or click on the Detail icon. 3. You can make changes to the final end point in the connection path. If you want to make changes to prior end points, you are prompted to clear all the end points downstream from the end point you are currently editing. 4. When connection editing is complete, select Save Connection from the Actions drop-down. This switches the page to the List page where all New connections are listed. 5. Submit the New connection for approval by selecting Resubmit Connection Request in the Actions drop-down. The Gatekeeper must review this request. If approved, then a work order must be generated by the Gatekeeper to affect this new connection. Disconnecting Connections To disconnect: 1. Select Connections > New. The List page contains the connection status in the second column. To be able to disconnect a connection, the value in the Status column must be Installed. 2. From the List page, select the connection to be disconnected and select Disconnect from the Actions drop-down. This initiates the request process for the disconnect. The Gatekeeper must review this request. If approved, a work order is generated by the Gatekeeper to disconnect the connection. Editing and Deleting IP Addresses To edit an IP address: 1. From the Explorer menu, navigate to the Item Detail 1 page of the item for which you wish to edit IP addresses. 2. Switch the page to Edit page mode. 3. Select the port with the IP address you wish to edit. 4. Select Edit. This populates all the entries in the text and drop-down fields. 316

325 5. Make the desired edits and click Update. To delete an IP address: Chapter 7: Help for Data Center Technicians 1. From the Explorer menu, navigate to the Item Detail 1 page of the item for which you wish to delete an IP addresses. 2. Switch the page to Edit page mode. 3. Select the port with the IP address you wish to delete. 4. Select Delete. This restores the IP address to the database of available IP addresses. Editing and Deleting Subnets To edit a subnet: Note: The Mask, Subnet Start and Subnet End fields cannot be edited. If these values must be removed or changed, the subnet must be deleted and a new one created. 1. From the toolbar, select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 2. From the list of subnets in the "Defined Subnets for this Site" list, click on the subnet you want to edit. Editable values appear in the text fields and drop-downs. 3. Make changes as needed and click Update. To delete a subnet: 1. From the toolbar, select Edit from the Page Mode drop-down. 2. From the list of subnets in the "Defined Subnets for this Site" list, click on the subnet you want to delete. 3. Click the Delete button. A subnet cannot be deleted if the IP addresses of the corresponding subnet have already been assigned to items. Only one subnet can be deleted at a time. 317

326 Chapter 7: Help for Data Center Technicians Viewing Existing Subnets and Related Equipment Subnets can be viewed on the Subnets page in the "Defined Subnets for this Site" section. To view the relationships between subnets and the equipment they are associated with, click the Subnets & VLANs button on the Subnets page to open the Subnet and VLAN Management dialog. This dialog allows you to view all subnets and the equipment-to-subnet relationships currently maintained in the application, as well as add and remove item subnets. See Adding and Removing Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog). Use the "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" or "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" radio buttons to change how the relationships between the equipment and subnets are displayed. Leaving the default "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" radio button selected displays the subnets that are associated with the piece of equipment selected in the Network Equipment in OSI Layer 2&3 list on the left side of the dialog. The "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" displays the pieces of equipment that are associated with the selected subnet listed in the All Subnets list on the right side of the dialog. Removing Item Subnets (from the Subnets and VLAN Management Dialog) To remove a subnet associations: 1. Remove a subnet from equipment: a. Leave the "Show Subnets served by selected Equipment" radio button selected. b. To remove an association, select one or more subnet from the list in the middle and click the > button. Or 2. Remove equipment from a subnet: a. Select the "Show Equipment serving selected Subnet" radio button. 318

327 Chapter 7: Help for Data Center Technicians b. To remove an association, select one or more pieces of equipment from the list in the middle and click the < Remove button. Editing IP Addresses Editing existing IP addresses is best performed from the item's Detail 1 page. However, an IP address can also be edited from the IP Space Addresses page. To edit an IP address: 1. Select IP Space > Addresses. The IP Address page opens. 2. Select Edit from Page Mode drop-down. 3. Locate the IP address you want to edit and select it. 4. Make the appropriate changes to the following fields: a. MAC address b. Address c. Mask d. Gateway 5. Click the IP Lookup button to search for an available IP address and to verify whether the IP address or DNS name is live on the network. The IP lookup function performs a live ping and a DNS lookup for the given IP address or name. 319

328 Chapter 7: Help for Data Center Technicians 6. Click the IP Subnets button to navigate to the Subnets page or the Subnets & VLANs button to open the Subnets and VLAN Management dialog. See Subnets and VLANs (see "Subnets" on page 284). Marking Work Orders as Complete Once a work order has been completed, it can be closed. Once it is closed, a notification is sent to the Gatekeeper so they can mark the request as complete. To mark a work order as complete: 1. Select Change Control > Work Orders. 2. Click on the work order you want to mark as complete. 3. Click Action > Mark Work Order Complete. 320

329 Chapter 8 Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Visualization provides you with a real-time, high-level graphical rendering of the data center floor plan and the contents of the data center. In dctrack, the floor plan is displayed from an overhead (top) view. Visualization includes: Accessing, viewing and managing cabinets via a floor plan of the data center Accessing, viewing and managing items, ports and connections Tracing ports Tracing item connections Searching for items Power path tracing In This Chapter Floor Map Elevations Trace Items Trace Ports Power Path Search Items

330 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Floor Map dctrack allows you to link an existing drawing of a data center floor plan to a site. This drawing must be in AutoCAD DWG file format (.dwg). Microsoft Visio is also supported but Visio drawings must be saved in AutoCAD DWG file format. See Visio Drawings (on page 74). Note: AutoCAD 2010 and 2011 file formats are not supported by dctrack. Note: Administrators can change the floor map units of measure and the way the floor map grid letters are incremented. See Configuring Floor Map Options (on page 219). You link a data center drawing to a site on the Sites page in dctrack. Drawings can be linked to a site during the site creation process or after the site has been created. See Creating a Site. The drawing file is not imported into dctrack after it has been linked to the site. It remains on the file server where it can be accessed and updated as needed. So, when the Floor Map page is opened, the latest version of the drawing is loaded and any changes made to the drawing are shown immediately. When the floor map is loaded for the first time, the objects in the AutoCAD drawing can be linked with items in the dctrack database. See Synchronizing AutoCAD Objects with dctrack Items (see "Link AutoCAD Objects with dctrack Items" on page 78). For example, you can link a cabinet in the AutoCAD drawing to a cabinet in the dctrack database. 322

331 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Floor Map Color Coding The colors of the data center objects on the Floor Map page are defined in the AutoCAD drawing file. However, once floor map objects are selected in dctrack, the following color codes are used: Object Selected object - light blue (cyan) Color Origin object - red Destination object - red Navigating the Floor Map Zooming The following zoom options are available for the floor map: 323

332 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out on a drawing. To zoom in on a particular item, click on the drawing object or click on the item in the list to the left of the drawing area. Select a zoom level from the Zoom Level drop-down. The default zoom level is 75%. Use the left mouse button to draw a window around a particular area to zoom in on it. Zoom out to view the entire data center by clicking on the Fit View to Entire Data Center icon in the toolbar. Select a user-defined zoom-in area from the Current View drop-down in the toolbar. See Creating and Deleting a Custom Floor Map View (on page 328) for more information. Panning Turn panning on or off by clicking on the Allow Panning icon in the toolbar. You can then use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to move around the drawing, or press and hold the mouse wheel and drag it to pan. Viewing Linked Objects Clicking on an object in the floor map changes the object's color to indicate it is selected and the name of the item it is linked to is highlighted in the item list in the left panel of the Floor Map page. Conversely, if you click on an item in the item list in the left panel of the Floor Map page the object that it is linked is highlighted on the floor map. 324

333 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Item Class Radio Button The item radio buttons at the top left of the Floor Map page act as filters. By selecting a radio button, the list is filtered to show only the items in that item class. By default, the first time you open to the Floor Map page, the Cabinet radio button is selected. 325

334 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Data Cabling Radio Button When you select the Data Cabling radio button, you have the option of applying one of two views to the page: One-to-Many View - Shows the cable routes that run from the selected cabinet to all of its destination cabinets. Cabinet Pairs View - Shows the cable routes between cabinet pairs. No matter which view you apply, when you select a cabinet from the item list or click on it on the floor map, the floor map zooms in around the cabinets. The original cabinet is displayed on the floor map in light blue (cyan) and the destination cabinet(s) is displayed in red. The list also contains the cable media type, such as twisted pair, fiber and so on, as well as the cable size. Power Distribution Radio Button If the Power Distribution radio button is selected, the PDU items and all circuit breaker panels that are internal to the PDUs, RPPs and busways are displayed. If a PDU is selected from the list or if you click on it on the floor map, the floor map zooms in on the selected PDU. The PDU, which is the origin of the power distribution chain, is displayed in light blue (cyan) and the cabinets, which are the destination of the power chain, are displayed in red. If the power cables are available from the AutoCAD drawing, they are displayed too. The circuit panel boards internal to a PDU are shown in a list. If selected, the floor map view displays only the subset of destination cabinets and power cables that are fed from the selected panel board. If an RPP exists, it can be selected from the list or by clicking on it on the floor map. If a busway system exists, it can be selected from the list CRAC Radio Button Selecting the CRACs radio button displays all CRAC units in the data center. Selecting an item from the list of CRAC units zooms in on and highlights that unit. It also draws an elliptical outline from the center of the unit, indicating an approximate representation of this unit's zone of influence. The ellipse is drawn to a dimension provided for that particular unit and in the direction specified. These two values are found in the Environ. Items CRAC Detail 1 page in the CRAC Coverage box. The length of the inside smaller ellipse is drawn to the dimension provided in the Throw field. The outside larger ellipse is drawn to be 35% longer. The Direction drop-down specifies the direction the ellipses are drawn relative to the site's North position, which is specified for the site on the Sites page. Tile Radio Button 326

335 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack When the Tiles radio button is selected, the list displays all CRAC units in the data center and the drawing displays all perforated floor tiles. Note: To add and remove tiles in the drawing, the tile objects must be drawn in from AutoCAD. Please refer to Adding and Removing Tiles on the Floor Map (on page 327) for instructions adding perforated tiles to the drawing. Sorting Items on the Floor Map The sort feature works in conjunction with the item radio buttons to sort the information displayed in the left frame of the Floor Map page. The information displayed in this frame varies depending on the item radio button that is selected. For example, if the Cabinet radio button is selected, cabinet-specific information is displayed and can be sorted. If you select an item such as a specific cabinet and then select another item class such as device, only the devices contained in the selected cabinet is displayed in the list. To view all items in a specific class, click Reset and select the appropriate item class radio button. Adding and Removing Tiles on the Floor Map The Gatekeeper can add or remove floor tiles on the floor map drawing. To add and remove tiles in the drawing, the tile objects must be created in AutoCAD and the imported into dctrack. Please refer Optional Drawing Feature Requirements (on page 69) for instructions on how to add a perforated tile to the drawing in AutoCAD. To add a tile: 1. Click the Tiles radio button and then click on a blank tile location on the floor map grid. Tip: Zoom in on the floor map to get a better view of the tile grids. 327

336 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack 2. Enter the percentage of the tile's open area in the Perforated Tile Open Area dialog. For example, entering 25 means that 25% of the tile's area is open. This information is found in the tile's data sheet. 3. Click OK. The tile is added to the floor map. To remove a tile: Click the Tiles radio button and then click on the tile to be removed from the grid. Once selected it is removed. Creating and Deleting a Custom Floor Map View dctrack allows you to create a custom view of a floor map. Once a custom view is created, it is added to the Views drop-down on the Floor Map page. For example, you can create a custom view of the floor map that consists of just the west end of the data center. The Delete icon is only available when a custom user view other than the "Entire Data Center" view is selected. Once a custom view is created and applied to the floor map, however, it can be deleted as needed. To create a custom view: 1. Select Visualize > Floor Map to open the floor map for the data center. 2. Customize the view as needed. For example, zoom in on a specific section of the floor map to make that a part of the custom view. 3. Click Save in the Views section of the task bar at the top of the page. 4. Click No on the "Do you want to overwrite the View Entire Data Center with the current view" dialog. 328

337 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack 5. Enter a name for the custom view in the "Please Enter a new View Name" dialog and click OK. The custom view is added to the View drop-down. To delete a custom view: 1. Select Visualize > Floor Map to open the floor map for the data center. 2. Select the custom view from the drop-down in the Views section of the task bar. 3. Click Delete and then click Yes to confirm the deletion. Viewing Capacity Planning Charts The Capacity Planning Charts drop-down shows a list of predefined visual floor map reports. Select a report from the list to apply it to the floor map. The Clear button clears the selected report view and returns the floor map to its default view. The following color coding is used in the report to indicate capacity: Color code High - red Color Medium - yellow Low - green 329

338 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Color code No information - gray Color Turning AutoCAD Layers On and Off on the Floor Map AutoCAD drawing layers that are applied to the floor map can be turned on and off from the Layers dialog. For example, you can turn off the layer that displays the air conditioning units while leaving all other objects visible on the floor map. When you turn a layer off, the text ID for the item is still visible in the floor map but the drawing object is removed. To turn a layer on and off: 1. Select Visualize > Floor Map to open the floor map for the data center. 2. Select the Layers icon in the toolbar. The Layers dialog appears. 3. Deselect each a layer to turn it off, click Unselect All to deselect all layers, or select layers to turn them on. Click OK. Printing the Floor Map The Print icon automatically prints the current floor map view using your default printer. The Advanced Print icon opens the Print Preview dialog that allows you to control print settings such as printer configuration, orientation, drawing scale, drawing line weight settings, etc. 330

339 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Using Tile: X,Y Coordinates The Tile: X,Y field at the bottom of the Floor Map page displays the data center raised floor grid coordinates. The A1 reference coordinate is defined in the AutoCAD drawing. Viewing Cabinet Elevations from the Floor Map Double-clicking on a cabinet on the floor map opens the Cabinet Elevation view. See Elevations (on page 332) for more details on cabinet elevations. To view details for a cabinet, double-click on the name of the cabinet in the left frame of the Floor Map page. The Details page for that cabinet opens in a secondary window. Double-clicking on a floor PDU opens the Item Details dialog. This dialog contains the floor PDU's power panels with the corresponding circuit breakers. 331

340 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Elevations dctrack displays cabinets, front and rear cabinet rails, PDUs, and the items within the cabinet using a cabinet elevation view. Elevations are a graphical representation of data center cabinets and their contents. By default, cabinets are displayed in a text view, and use color coding to identify the type of item within the cabinet. See Cabinet Elevation Color Coding (on page 333, on page 25). Switching to image view displays images of the items in the cabinet. Note: Items that do not have an image in the dctrack Models library are displayed as text in image view. In addition to displaying color coded front and rear views of the devices within a cabinet, front and rear views of cabinet rails are available. Use the drop-down in the top right corner of the elevation view to switch between displaying the back and front of the cabinet, and text and image views. Zero U rack PDUs mounted on the cabinet are displayed to the right and/or left of the cabinet. Hovering over the rack PDUs displays the PDU name. Hovering over an item in the cabinet displays the item model and whether the item is on one or both rails. From the elevation view, navigate to specific servers, ports, PDUs, and so on by clicking on a Cabinet link at the top of each Cabinet column. Double-clicking on an item in a cabinet displays an image of that item. For example, if you want to view a server within a cabinet, double-click on the server and an image of it is displayed in a dialog. You are able to specify the cabinets that are displayed by selecting the row, cabinet group, percent full, manufacturer or custom information. To view the cabinet details for a specific cabinet, click the Cabinet link that appears above the elevation. Use the Front, Rear and Text drop-down that appears above the elevation to move between those views. The Above and Below drop-downs allow you to view power sources, which can be physically located above or below the cabinet. Clicking the Floor button opens the AutoCAD drawing. The cabinets that are selected are highlighted in the drawing. Clicking Print prints the cabinets and cabinet information. The Elevations page displays up to 12 cabinets at a time. If the requested view contains more than 12 cabinets, use the Right and Left arrow buttons to navigate to the previous and next 12 cabinets. 332

341 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Cabinet Elevation Color Coding In any page with a cabinet elevation, the color legend of the items mounted in the cabinet is available by clicking on the Cabinet Color Legend icon. 333

342 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Trace Items Use the Trace Items page to trace the all port circuits for the selected item. Clicking on a circuit in the list allows you to open and view a list of all circuits for the item. This includes viewing the item ports used by the circuit, color coding applied to the circuit to identify it, and the current status of the circuit. The user who created the circuit and the date and time it was created are also displayed. To trace items: 1. Select Visualize > Trace Items. 2. Select the item class and the item. The circuits for the item are displayed. 3. Double-click on any row to trace the full circuit for that port. Trace Ports The Trace Ports page provides you with a graphical view of the comm and power port circuits between items. The circuits are displayed as end-to-end circuits. Clicking on an End Point button displays the details. Double-clicking on the image of the item shows the enlarged image and highlights the port involved in the circuit. If the circuit includes comm panels, click the View Structured Cable Route button to view the cable route between the two comm panels on the floor map. To trace ports: 1. Select Visualize > Trace Port. 2. Select the circuit type and the item class. 3. Define the criteria used to find (lookup) the connection - item and port, cord ID, or MAC address. 334

343 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack 4. Select the item. The port connections are displayed. 335

344 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Power Path The power path displays the power circuits of all connected power supplies in the data center from the main UPS and all points in between. Use the Power Path page to select a power supply, a rack PDU input cord or output receptacle, or a power outlet. This expands the tree hierarchy to reveal the power path for selected item and port. For each node in this tree hierarchy, the relevant power information is displayed. The Node Specification box shows the power data for the selected node as defined by the manufacturer. The Downstream Power Sum box shows the power totals at the selected node in its three phase form. This data is arranged in nameplate, budget and measured values. Nameplate values are the sum of the nameplate values of all power consuming items below the selected node. Budget values are the sum of budget values for those same items. The Measured column displays the current in amps for the selected item or the sum of measured current from the items below the selected node. If the "Get a New SNMP Reading when a Node" checkbox is selected, each time a node is selected, dctrack generates a SNMP request to the selected node for new power data (provided that item is SNMP-capable, has an IP address, data port/comm port and an associated SNMP MIB). If you do not wish to generate SNMP request each time a node is selected and configured with a data panel/comm panel, deselect the "Get a New SNMP Reading when a Node" checkbox. Alternatively, click Update All SNMP Readings to get a new reading for all SNMP-capable items in your data center. Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. Note: The terms data panel, comm panel and patch panel are used interchangeably in dctrack. Data panel is used in the Web Client and comm panel is used in Classic View. To view power paths: 1. Select Visualize > Power Path. 336

345 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack 2. Select the item and port you want power information on. 337

346 Chapter 8: Visualizing the Data Center in dctrack Search Items The Search Items page allows you to quickly and easily locate items in the data center by searching through items, ports, custom fields you have created, applications, and discovered applications. dctrack provides you with the ability to search based on a wide range of criteria such as item name, item type, model, manufacturer, and so on. Further, you are able to define the parameters of the search so you control how narrow or wide your results are. Once items are found that match your criteria, you can view them by double-clicking on them in the list. You can also export your search results to a spreadsheet by clicking Export and providing a file name. The search criteria and fields that are displayed in the results vary based on the item type you select. For example, if you are searching items, Status, Item Class, Item Name fields and so on are criteria by which you can search. If you are searching applications, you can select criteria such as Application Name, User Departments and so on. 338

347 Chapter 9 Change Control Process In This Chapter Overview Requests Work Orders Overview In order to maintain control of the data in dctrack and maintain an accurate representation of what is actually installed in the data center, a change control process is used. This process is based on a request and approval system. Each user is able to filter and view different requests based on their role. The Gatekeeper is the only person authorized to sign off on the completion of a request by marking the work order as Complete. Each time a request is made, an notification is sent to the Gatekeeper. Following is the process flow the change control process takes: Diagram key Request Issued/Request Updated Request Approved Request Rejected Work Order Issued 339

348 Chapter 9: Change Control Process Work Order Completed Request Completed Requests Overview When you need to make an addition or modification to the data in dctrack, you submit a request to make the change. Requests represent actual activities in a data center such as installing or removing a server, moving a server, connecting a server, and so on. Once a request is made, it is reviewed and either approved or, if the information is incomplete or incorrect, rejected. Once approved, the request is turned into a work order. For example, if a new server is being installed in the data center, a request is made in dctrack to add it, then a work order is issued based on that request to perform the actual server installation. The following information is specific to requests: Type Description Request number All requests are assigned a request number. The first two digits of the number represent the year the request was made. The next five digits are the serial number of the request. The serial number resets to each year. When two requests are associated with each other, they have the same request number and a distinguishing suffix. When an item is moved or removed, a request is generated for the item, and multiple requests are generated for disconnection and/or reconnection of the item's ports. A related request is assigned a request number that includes a suffix consisting of a dash followed by a two-digit serial number starting at 01 to identify the related request. When a single connection is moved, the existing port is disconnected and the new port is connected, which results in a disconnect and a reconnect request pair. 340

349 Chapter 9: Change Control Process Type Request stage Description Such a disconnect is given the suffix -DX and the reconnect is given the suffix -RX. Each request is given a request stage to identify its current stage in the request process. The workflow flowchart details the stages of the request process and the sequence a request must go through. Requests can be archived only if they are in the Request Completed stage. To access requests: 1. Select Change Control > Requests. To view a history of the requests that have been made: Click View Request History in the Action drop-down. Approving or Rejecting Requests To approve or reject requests: 1. Select Change Control > Requests. 2. Click on the request and review the request details. 3. To approve the request: a. Select Actions > Approve Request. b. Click Yes on the confirmation message. c. In the Account Password dialog, enter your account password. An is sent to the requester notifying them the request has been approved and the diagram at the bottom of page indicates the request's status as Request Approved. A work order can now be created for the request. 4. To reject the request: a. Click Select > Reject Request. b. Click Yes on the confirmation message. c. In the Account Password dialog, enter your account password. An is sent to the requester notifying them of the request has been rejected and the diagram at the bottom of page indicates the request's status as Request Rejected. 341

350 Chapter 9: Change Control Process Marking a Request as Complete Once the actual request has been completed, for example the server has been installed or removed from the data center, it can be marked as complete. To mark a request as complete: 1. Select Change Control > Requests. 2. Click on the request to mark as complete. If a work order was issued for a request and has been completed, Request Completed is displayed on the process flow diagram at the bottom of the page. 3. Click Action > Mark as Completed. Request Archiving To archive a request: 1. Select Change Control > Requests. 2. Click on the request. 3. Select Action > Archive Request. To view archived requests: Select Action > View Archived Requests. To restore requests from the archive: 1. Select Action > View Archived Requests. 2. Click on the request. 3. Click Restore Request from Archive on the Action drop-down. Requesting a Bypass on Item Detail Pages When the Request Bypass feature is enabled, every type of request is immediately completed and passed through all steps of the Change Control process. The full request history and work orders are created as if the request was normally processed. The Request Bypass icon opens a dialog that allows you to enable (Yes) or disable (No) the Request Bypass feature. Only the Gatekeeper is allowed to enable the Request Bypass. Note: This feature is enabled by default, but can be disabled for all users, including Gatekeepers, if needed. See Enabling and Disabling Request Bypass for All Items (on page 220). 342

351 Chapter 9: Change Control Process Work Orders Overview Work orders are generated from one or more similar requests. A work order contains the information that is necessary in order to physically carry out a request in the data center. The work order consists of the following information: Type Work order number Description Each work order is assigned a work order number. The first two digits of the number represent the year the work order was generated. The next three characters are always WO- to distinguish the number from a request number. The next five digits are a serial number starting at each year. When a connection work order is a related to an item work order, both work orders are assigned the same work order number, except that a suffix -X is added to the connection work order number. To view open work orders: 1. Select Change Control > Work Orders. 2. Click on the work order you want to view. 3. Click Actions > Preview Work Order. To print work orders: 1. Select Change Control > Work Orders. 2. Click on the work order you want to print. 3. Select Actions > Print Work Order. Work Order Access Levels and Permissions Role access level Viewer Member Work order permission Can view Work Orders but cannot mark them Complete. Can mark work orders that are assigned to them as Complete. 343

352 Chapter 9: Change Control Process Role access level Manager Gatekeeper Work order permission Can mark work orders that are assigned to them or to any member of their team as Complete. Can mark any work order Complete. Work Order Archiving To archive work orders. 1. Select Change Control > Work Orders. 2. Click on the work order you want to archive. 3. Select Actions > Archive Work Order. To view archived work orders: 1. Select Change Control > Work Orders. 2. Select Actions > View Archived Work Orders. 344

353 Chapter 10 Managing External Tickets in the Web Client In This Chapter Overview Ticket Statuses Sorting and Filtering Tickets Process Tickets Archived Tickets Delete a Ticket Overview Tickets received from an external ticketing application are displayed in dctrack on the External Tickets tab. An external ticketing application can send new tickets to dctrack, update an existing ticket s information, request the status of a ticket or delete a ticket. dctrack supports add and discard requests via this API. See the dctrack Web Services API - Ticketing User Guide for details on configuring this feature. In order to preserve data integrity in your external ticketing application, dctrack does not send information to your ticketing application. Your ticketing application connects with dctrack to retrieve and update ticket information. When tickets enter dctrack, they are assigned a status of Received. dctrack then generates its own requests and work orders based on them. The tickets move through the dctrack change management workflow in the same way as requests created in dctrack. Ticket Statuses Following are the statuses that are applied to tickets as they enter dctrack via an external ticketing application, and as they move through the dctrack workflow. Status Received Description Status assigned to a ticket once it is received in dctrack from the external ticketing application. 345

354 Chapter 10: Managing External Tickets in the Web Client Status Incomplete Updated dctrack Request Issued dctrack Request Rejected dctrack Request Updated dctrack Request Approved dctrack Work Order Issued dctrack Work Order Complete Ticket Complete Archived Description Status assigned after dctrack attempts to process the ticket and it is rejected it due to missing or unclear information. The next time the external ticketing application contacts dctrack, it retrieves this status and the ticket can be updated in the external ticketing application and then sent back to dctrack. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. Status applied when a ticket that was updated by the external ticketing application is sent back to dctrack. Status applied when a ticket is rejected and a request for additional information is requested. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. Status applied when a ticket is updated by the external ticket application but is rejected in dctrack. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. Status applied when a ticket that was updated by the external ticketing application after a request from dctrack and it is sent back to dctrack. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. The ticket is approved in dctrack. Once this status is applied, the ticket cannot be deleted from dctrack. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. Status applied once a work order is issued for the change ticket. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. Status applied once the item is added or discarded from the physical location. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. Status applied once the external ticket is closed. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. A ticket is marked Archived automatically by dctrack when it is in Ticket Complete status and the external system requests its status. While this status is applied to a ticket, it is in read-only mode. 346

355 Chapter 10: Managing External Tickets in the Web Client Sorting and Filtering Tickets Tickets received in dctrack display on the External Tickets page. The total number of tickets in the list displays in the Tickets in List section at the top right of the list. Click Refresh to display new or updated tickets. By default, tickets are sorted by creation date in descending order. To sort tickets: Click any column header to sort the list by the data in that column. To filter tickets list: Tickets in the queue are filtered by selecting the filter criteria from the Filter By: drop-down and, using the text box to the right of the drop-down, entering the specific information you want displayed. 1. Select the filter criteria in the Filter By drop-down list. 2. Enter the search terms in the text box to the right of the Filter By field. Example: Select Ticket Status in the Filter By: drop-down list and then enter Received in the text box. Only tickets in Received status display in the list. 3. Delete the contents of the text box to return to viewing all tickets in the queue. 347

356 Chapter 10: Managing External Tickets in the Web Client Process Tickets When dctrack receives external tickets, the ticket's fields, such as make and model, cabinet name and so on, are automatically mapped to dctrack fields. You must map fields that do not map automatically. This is done in the Process Ticket dialog, which is accessed by selecting a ticket from the External Tickets page and clicking Process Ticket. All fields must be mapped and all required fields must be completed to process a ticket. Note: The ticket number and Actions fields are never automatically mapped to dctrack fields. They must be mapped manually. In the Process Ticket dialog, the dctrack fields are displayed under the Field Name column and the ticketing application fields they map to are displayed under the Original Ticket Data column. Use the fields available in the Modified/Corrected Data drop-down to map all unmapped fields. If a field cannot be mapped because it does not match an available dctrack field option, the field is rejected. After the rejected ticket is processed, a status of Incomplete is applied to it. Provided your ticketing application is set up to retrieve this information, it receives it the next time it connects to dctrack. Changes can then be made within the external ticketing application and sent back to dctrack for processing. Add Item Tickets To process an add item ticket: 1. In the Web Client, select Change Management > External Tickets. The External Tickets table opens. 2. Select the ticket you want to process and click Process Ticket. The Process Ticket dialog appears. 3. If needed, map missing fields by selecting from the Modified/Corrected Data drop-down or entering information directly. If no matches are found, select the Field Rejected checkbox. In the Comments text box, enter notes or questions regarding the rejected field. This information is included when your ticketing application connects to dctrack and retrieves the ticket information. Tip: Resize the Description and Comments text boxes by dragging the resize icons ( expand width, expand length). 4. If the item name is missing, enter it in the Item Name text box under Modified/Corrected Data. The item name must be unique. 348

357 Chapter 10: Managing External Tickets in the Web Client Note: Once a cabinet is selected in the Modified/Corrected Data section, the elevation view of the cabinet is displayed. View the cabinet elevation in text format (default) or front and back images of the cabinet by selecting from the Text drop-down. Click the Information icon text view means. to view a legend describing what each color in 5. Enter additional description information or comments as needed. 6. Click on Item Ports Information in Ticket to expand the panel. All ports for the item that were added in the external ticket application are listed. If needed, update and add ports. a. Add or delete data ports: If needed, add ports by clicking the Add button under the Select Port box. Alternatively, select a port and click Delete to delete it. Note: Once a port is added and saved, it cannot be removed. Add or update the port name, if needed. Each port name must be unique. Apostrophes are not supported for this field. Map the remaining fields as needed. If no matches are found, select the Field Rejected checkbox and enter any comments regarding the unmapped field in the Comments text box. a. Add or update power ports: Click the Power Ports tab to open it. Add or update the power port prefix, if needed. Map the remaining fields as needed. If no matches are found, select the Field Rejected checkbox and enter any comments regarding the unmapped field in the Comments text box. Note: If you click Cancel, all updates that have been made are discarded with the exception of port information, which is retained. 7. Do one of the following: Click Save to close the dialog and save the information without processing the ticket. Click Reject Ticket if there is missing or unclear information that needs to be updated in the external ticketing application. If a ticket is rejected, a status of Incomplete is applied to it and the ticket is read-only until the updates are sent back to dctrack. Click Process Add Item Ticket... to open the Place dialog. Click Place and Issue Request to place the item and create a request. A status of dctrack Request Issued is applied to the ticket once it is placed. 349

358 Chapter 10: Managing External Tickets in the Web Client Once the item is placed, dctrack displays a confirmation message. If there are any errors, dctrack prompts you to correct them. The reservation is removed from the Reservation page once it is placed. A status of Updated is applied to tickets once they are processed and the ticket enters the dctrack request and work order workflow. See Ticket Statuses (on page 345) for more information. Discard an Item In order to process a discard change ticket, no outstanding requests, such as requests for information and so on, can be associated with the ticket. To process a discard item request: 1. In the Web Client, select Change Management > External Tickets. The External Tickets table opens. 2. Select the ticket you want to process and click Process Ticket. The Process Discard Item Ticket dialog appears. 3. If needed, map fields that were not mapped automatically. All fields must be mapped and all required fields must be completed in order to process the ticket. If no matches are found, select the Field Rejected checkbox. In the Comments text box, enter notes or questions regarding the rejected field. This information is included when your ticketing application connects to dctrack and retrieves the ticket information. Tip: Resize the Description and Comments text boxes by dragging the resize icons ( expand width, expand length). 4. Do one of the following: Click Reject Ticket if there is missing or unclear information that needs to be updated in the external ticketing application. If a ticket is rejected, a status of Incomplete is applied to it and the ticket is read-only until the updates are sent back to dctrack. Click Process Discard Ticket. A status of dctrack Request Issued is applied to the ticket and it enters the dctrack request and work order workflow. See Ticket Statuses (on page 345) for more information. 350

359 Chapter 10: Managing External Tickets in the Web Client Archived Tickets By default, the tickets list includes only active tickets. To view archived tickets, select the Show Archived checkbox. Archived tickets cannot be processed but they can be purged from dctrack. Purging a ticket removes deletes it from the dctrack database permanently. To purge tickets: 1. Display the archived tickets. 2. Select a ticket or select multiple tickets using Ctrl + click. 3. Click Purge. 4. Click OK when prompted to confirm. Delete a Ticket Tickets can be deleted from the dctrack ticket list if they have a status of Received, Updated or Incomplete. Tickets cannot be deleted if they have already entered the dctrack request and work order workflow with a status of dctrack Approved (or greater). See Ticket Statuses (on page 345) for information on ticket statuses. Tickets are not deleted in the external ticketing application they originated from when they are deleted in dctrack. If your external ticketing application connects with dctrack and the ticket is not found because it was deleted, an message is sent from dctrack to the external ticketing application that the ticket does not exist. Tickets that are deleted in the external ticket application are deleted from dctrack. To delete a ticket: 1. Select a ticket or select multiple tickets using Ctrl + click. 2. Click Delete. 3. Click OK when prompted to confirm. 351

360 Chapter 11 Managing Events in the Web Client In This Chapter Overview Viewing Events Exporting Events Clearing Events Purging Events Overview Access the Events page by clicking on Events from the dctrack Web Client. This page contains a list of events and event details regarding dctrack, as well as Power IQ and asset sensors if you are using them as part of your dctrack configuration. Clicking Refresh accesses updated events that have been added, modified or deleted by other users. It also performs periodic polling of Power IQ for asset management related events or from user initiated operations. 352

361 Chapter 11: Managing Events in the Web Client Viewing Events The following event information is displayed on the Events page: Occurred At - the date and time the event occurred. Note that the date and time are pulled from Power IQ when the event is specific to asset sensors. Severity - the severity of the event: Critical - the event, such as a connectivity failure, that adversely affects dctrack's ability to manage data center items and should be addressed Informational - an event, such as when dctrack establishes communication with device, has occurred but no action need be taken Warning - an event was completed successfully but errors have occurred and should be addressed as needed Event Type - the type of event, such as asset sensor added, communication error and so on Summary - a description of the event Source - where the event occurred, such as Power IQ, asset sensor and so on Status - the status of the event Active - the event is still open and has not been resolved Cleared - the event is closed and has been resolved When you click on an event, the details are displayed in the Event Details section on the right side of the page. The information on the Events page can be sorted by clicking on a column header, and filtered by selecting from the Filter By drop-downs. You can also filter by status by selecting from the Status drop-down in the Status column. 353

362 Chapter 11: Managing Events in the Web Client Exporting Events dctrack allows you to export the information on the Events page to a CSV file. If you filter the information and export it to a CSV, only the filtered information is contained in the file. For example, if you filter the page to only display Cleared events and then export the data, only Cleared events are contained in the file. The event details displayed in the Event details section of the page and all of the information displayed in the table are included in the export. To export the information on the Events page to a CSV file: Click Export to CSV on the Events page and save the exported file to a location of your choice. Clearing Events Once an event is resolved or no longer relevant, you can remove the event from dctrack by marking it as cleared. Use Ctrl+click to select more than one event. To clear an event: 1. On the Events page, click on the event you want to clear. 2. Click Clear Selected. The status is changed to Cleared. Purging Events Events marked as Cleared can be purged as needed. Important: Once purged, the event is deleted from the Event page and cannot be restored. To purge an event: 1. On the Events page, click on the event and then click Purge Selected. 2. Click Yes when prompted to confirm. The event is deleted from the application. 354

363 Chapter 12 Reserving Cabinet Space for an Item In This Chapter Overview Creating and Placing Reservations for Items from the Reservations Tab356 Editing and Deleting Reservations Overview Use the Reservations feature to reserve space for an item in a cabinet within a data center. A reservation holds the cabinet space you specify versus immediately creating a request to add and place the item using the Search and Place feature. If you know the details of the item you want reserve space for and place, you can create, edit and add it directly in the Reservations tab without using the Search and Place. See About Search and Place (on page 359) for information on creating reservations using Search and Place. Reservations do not create a change request. Reservations are placeholders for items within cabinets. In order to create the actual request to physically place the item in the cabinet in the data center, you must place the reservation using the Place Reservation feature. See Creating and Placing Reservations for Items from the Reservations Tab (on page 226). Once a reservation is created, it is displayed on the Reservations page. The newest reservation is always at the top of the list and each prior reservation is listed below it. Only Gatekeepers and the person who creates the reservation can place it. By default, reservations are sorted by reservation number, which is made up of the letter RN for reservation number, the year the reservation was created, and the number of the reservation itself. However, reservations can be sorted by any of the column headers on the page by clicking on that column. Every reservation has an expiration date. The reservation expires on the next day of the expiration date. When a reservation expires, the Expiration Date is shown in red and the cabinet space is no longer reserved. To view reservations: In the Web Client, click Change Management > Reservations. The Reservations tab opens and displays existing reservations. 355

364 Chapter 12: Reserving Cabinet Space for an Item Creating and Placing Reservations for Items from the Reservations Tab To create a reservation: 1. In the Web Client, click Change Management > Reservations. The Reservations tab opens. 2. Click Create Reservation on the Reservations tab. The Create New Reservation dialog opens. 3. Enter the Reservation Name. Since the reservation name is displayed in the cabinet elevation, short names are recommended. Reservation names do not have to be unique. Required 4. Enter the Reservation Purpose to include details about the reservation. Required 5. Select the date on which the reservation expires. By default, it is the current date plus one month. Required Note: Once this date expires, the cabinet space you reserved with the original reservation is freed up. 6. Select the location where the item belongs. Required 7. Select the make and model of the item. If a make and model are selected, the RU Height field is automatically populated based on the make and model selections. Note: The make and model are not required fields in order to create a reservation, but they are required in order to place the reservation. 8. Enter the RU height if you have not selected a make and model. If you want to increase the RU height to reserve additional space, update it as needed. Required The Cabinet drop-down is populated with cabinets that contain free space matching the RU height requirements you enter. 9. Select the cabinet where the reservation is to be made. Required Once you select a cabinet, a graphical representation of the cabinet is displayed on the right side of the dialog. Use the drop-down above the cabinet display to change the view of the cabinet from the default Text view to either viewing the front or back of the items in the cabinet. The U Position drop-down is populated with U positions available in the cabinet you selected based on the RU selected. 10. Select the U position where the reservation is to be made. Required 11. Click Save to save the information and close the dialog, or click Save and New to save the information and refresh the Create New Reservation dialog so that you can create another reservation. 356

365 Chapter 12: Reserving Cabinet Space for an Item Once the reservation is created, it is displayed on the Reservation tab and that space is removed from the list of available space displayed using search and place or the reservation function. If you open the reservation, the space you have reserved is blocked off in the cabinet in red and the name of the reservation is displayed. To place a reservation: 1. Select the reservation from the list on the Reservations page. 2. Click Place Reservation. 3. If you have entered all required information, the Place dialog opens. 4. If the make and model were not previously entered, you are prompted to enter the information. Once the make and model are selected, click and save. The Place dialog is opened. 5. A status of New is automatically applied to the item. 6. At a minimum, enter a name for the item. Required 7. Complete the remaining fields or make changes as needed. 8. Do one of the following: Click Place to place the reservation and remove it from the reservation list. This does not generate a request. Click Place and Issue Request to place the item and create a request. 9. If there are any validation issues, dctrack prompts you to correct them. The reservation is removed from the Reservation page once it is placed. 10. To view requests, go to Classic View and select Change Control > Requests. The request is reviewed or rejected by the Gatekeeper based on their assessment and a work order is issued after approval. See Change Control Process (on page 339) for more information. 357

366 Chapter 12: Reserving Cabinet Space for an Item Editing and Deleting Reservations All users (except a Viewer Access Level user) can create a reservation and place their own reservations. However, only Gatekeepers and the person who originally created the reservation can edit or delete it. If you create a reservation and either change the make and model, or enter a make and model for the first time, dctrack verifies the RU height you originally entered against the make and model you have selected. dctrack automatically provides you with alternative cabinets based on the new RU height if it does not match what is available in the originally selected cabinet. To edit an existing reservation: 1. In the Web Client, click Change Management > Reservations. The Reservations tab opens. 2. Select the reservation from the list and click Edit Reservation. 3. Make changes as needed and click Save. If you change the make and model, your selection may affect the RU height you originally entered. The RU change may then affect the cabinet and U position if there is not enough rack space in the cabinet to accommodate the make and model. If you change the location, you may have to enter new criteria for the reservation since the newly selected location may not contain the same resources and space as the location you originally selected. To delete a reservation: 1. Select the reservation from the list and click Delete Reservation. Use Ctrl + click to select more than one reservation at a time to delete. 2. Click Yes on the Delete Reservation Alert message to delete the reservation. 358

367 Chapter 13 Search and Place In This Chapter About Search and Place About Search and Place Use Search and Place to locate a cabinet and U position for an item you wish to add to the data center. Searches are done from the Search and Place page. Search results return the following information: Location - data center location of the cabinet that may be suitable for your new item Cabinet Name - name of the cabinet suitable for your new item U Position - recommended U position of the cabinet suitable for your new item Available RUs - the available rack units in the cabinet Contiguous RUs - the largest contiguous U position space in the cabinet Note: dctrack uses the terms rail position and U position interchangeably. Group - indicates the cabinet group that the cabinet belongs to Type - indicates the item type assigned to the cabinet Function - indicates the item function assigned to the cabinet Data Ports - number of available data ports in the cabinet Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. 359

368 Chapter 13: Search and Place Power Ports - number of available power ports in the cabinet Free Watts - amount of watts available for the item in the cabinet Searches are performed based on either RU height, or make and model. When searching by RU height, you are searching for a cabinet that has the requisite number of contiguous rack units available (in addition to any other criteria you apply to narrow your results). When searching by make and model, you select from a list of available makes and models that are pulled from the dctrack Models library. The RU height, and data port and power port information are entered automatically based on the make and model you select. The models listed are only models of the class Device, and have a mounting type equal to rackable or free-standing. You can search one or more locations for an item. Search results can be narrowed down by selecting additional criteria such as cabinet group, type or function, as well as data and power connectivity. You can add or delete criteria as needed at any time during the search. Use the Reset button at any point to clear all of the criteria you have specified. The search results display all of the cabinets at the location(s) that match the criteria you specified, have enough data ports using the correct connector, color code and VLAN/Grouping, and have enough power to support the item. Use the Maximize buttons next to the Data Port and Power Port information to view the available ports. Once the results are returned, select a cabinet to either place the item in it or reserve the U positions to use for the item at a later date. If no results are displayed, dctrack did not find any cabinets matching your criteria. Each time you click the search result, the search results time stamp is updated, letting you know a new search was performed. Reserving space in a cabinet does not create a request but, rather, holds the space so you can place the item at a later time. For information on the Place dialog and cabinet elevations, see Place Dialog (on page 26) and Cabinet Elevations and Item Details in the Web Client (on page 23), respectively. 360

369 Chapter 14 Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client In This Chapter Data and Power Connections Data and Power Connections dctrack provides you with the ability to build, edit and view both whole and partial data and power circuits. Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. 361

370 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Circuits Page From the Circuits page in the dctrack Web Client, do any of the following: View all full and partial circuits View the status of all full and partial circuits Add circuits Edit circuits Delete circuits Issue a request to disconnect a circuit Issue a request to install a new circuit that was previously saved without issuing a request To access the Circuits page: Click Connectivity Management > Circuits. Click Refresh to update the page with the latest circuit information. 362

371 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Sorting and Filtering Sort circuits on the page clicking on any of the column headers on the page. Quickly filter by clicking on any of the first three column headers, and/or using the Filter By drop-down. Column header filters include: Location - physical location of the item and circuit(s) Type - data or power Status - New or Installed The Filter By drop-down allows you to filter by: Connector - the type of connector used in the first or last node of circuit Created by - the user who created the circuit Creator's Team - the team the user who created the circuit belongs to Creation Date - the date the circuit was created in dctrack First Node Cabinet - the cabinet the circuit originates from Item Name/Port Name - the item and the port of an item used in the circuit. This filter can be applied to starting, ending and intermediate nodes Last Node Cabinet - the cabinet where the circuit terminates Request Number - the number ID assigned to request that is made to physically create the circuit Requests Stage - the status of the request 363

372 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Circuit Workflow Statuses Once a data or power circuit is created and saved, so long as the Issue Request checkbox is selected, a request is generated to physically create the circuit in the data center. If the Issue Request checkbox is not selected, the circuit is saved but no request is generated. Work orders are created by the Gatekeeper once the request has been approved. Once it is installed and the work order is marked as Complete, a status of Installed is applied to the circuit and it is displayed on the Circuits page. A New circuit can be edited and saved if there is no Request for it, or if the Request has not be approved. Installed circuits can be edited but a Request must be issued for the change to take place. When saving the edits of an Installed circuit, both the Original circuit and a Proposed version of this circuit are created. Clicking the View link in the Proposed column of the Circuits list allows you to view a proposed circuit. Filter by the Status column to view the circuits with a status of either New or Installed. 364

373 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Visualizing Data and Power Circuits View a specific data or power circuit by double clicking on the circuit on the Circuits page, or by selecting one or more circuits and clicking on View/Edit. Each node and connection in the circuit is displayed using a graphical representation of the circuit. You can view the complete circuit from the starting item to the ending item, including each item in between. Circuits can be viewed horizontally across the page or wrapped on the page. Nodes are numbered in the order in which they appear in the circuit from left to right. In horizontal view, if the number of nodes in the circuit exceeds what can be displayed on the page, a scroll bar appears at the bottom of the page. To wrap the circuits, select the Wrap Circuit View checkbox. The circuits are displayed from left to right on the first line, then right to left on the second line, and so on. Connections are represented by the following: Curved line = patch cord Straight line = structured cabling between data panels, or electrical wiring between a power outlet and the breaker and all other electrical wiring up to the UPS bank Dotted line = virtual or logical connections or, for an internal connection of a network switch, between an uplink and other ports in the switch Select an Item and Port for this Node Dialog Click an item or connection to open the Select Item and Port for this Node dialog, which contains item-specific information such as item class, U position, circuit type and so on. This information is populated based on the item selected from the Item drop-down. The same is true for the item's port. In this dialog, when creating new circuits, Location/Site defaults to your location/site, as defined in your user profile. By default, you location/site is selected. If no location/site is defined in your profile, the default location/site defined for the application is used. For all nodes that follow, the location/site defaults to the location/site of the first node. For saved circuits, the location/site defaults to node's item location/site. To change the item name in the dialog, highlight the name and hit the Delete key on your keyboard. Find items by selecting them from the drop-down or typing the item name in the drop-down field. 365

374 366 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client

375 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client As you build circuits, dctrack validates them. If there is an issue between the node item or port you selected and the item and port of the previous node, a Caution icon ( ) is displayed at the bottom right of the node. Click on the node to view the conflict details. dctrack makes the circuit even if there is a conflict. Select Show Elevation View to view where in the cabinet an item is located. Note that if the item is not yet placed in the cabinet, it does not appear. Nodes that are read-only and cannot be edited are indicated by a red outline around the node's number information.. Click the node to view Each circuit you build is displayed in its own New Circuit tab. A red dot in the New Circuit tab indicates the circuit is not saved, a green dot means it is saved. Once you save the circuit, dctrack generates circuit name, which is then displayed in the tab. Data Circuits Note: The terms data port and comm port are used interchangeably in dctrack. The Web Client uses data port and Classic View uses comm port. 367

376 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Data Circuit Connections Node 1 Options The first node in a data circuit can consist of one of the following items: Device Network Data Panel Probe Rack PDU Floor PDU UPS CRAC Once an item is selected, the item's ports drop-down is shown to select a port. Once an item and port has been selected, the connector and next node are automatically added. The connector between each node is based on the item selected. If the specific connector for the node is not available, a compatible connector is automatically added. If a port and connector are not compatible, the circuit cannot be made until a compatible port and connector are created. You must add at least one other node to the data circuit in order to save the circuit. Node 2 Options For virtual machines and blades: If Node 1 is... Then Node 2... If Node 1 is a virtual machine Node 2 items can be Device/Rackable or Device Blade If Node 1 is a blade or logical port The virtual machines cluster must be equal to the virtual machine cluster of Node 1 The Node 2 free and used data ports must be equal to the free and used data ports in Node 1 Node 2 must be a chassis of the blade selected as Node 1. The chassis is automatically selected when Node 1 is a blade and cannot be edited. 368

377 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client All information specific to the port and item is automatically populated based on your selection. Only items with free data ports are selection options in the data circuit. For Node 2 ports: If... If the port is already being used Then... Except for virtual machines and blades, dctrack completes the circuit based on the items that are already connected to the port If the port is a data panel port dctrack automatically creates its accompanying far end data panel, then adds a node following the far end data panel If the port's subclass is Active The circuit is completed Node 3 and Onward All nodes from Node 3 onward use the same rules as are applied to Node 2 with the exception that ports are not automatically added. Partial Data Circuits View, build and edit partial circuits in dctrack. A partial data circuit is one that starts with a data panel and ends with a network item. When a partial circuit is created, it is saved as an independent circuit. When another circuit is built that joins to the partial circuit, the circuit is saved as a new circuit, so both the partial circuit and full circuit are listed on the Circuits page. Note: You cannot join two partial circuits together to create a compound circuit. Partial circuits that are part of a full circuit are read-only. They are editable only if: The full circuit that it is a part of is edited to use another unrelated node in place of the partial circuit The full circuit that it is a part of is deleted or disconnected To delete or disconnect partial circuits, the partial circuits must first be removed from existing circuits they are used in. Circuit Node Logic dctrack applies the following logic to building data circuits. 369

378 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client First Node Item Class/Subclass First Node Port Subclass Connection Second Node Class/Subclass Connection Third Node & On Connection Device/rackable or chassis Active Cord Device/rackable, Chassis or blade, network Data panel Circuit ends N/A Straight line Far end data panel N/A Cord Data panel (FanOut) Straight line Network - circuit ends N/A Device/blade Active Cord Device/rackable, chassis or blade, network, data panel Circuit ends N/A N/A Network Active Cord Network, data panel Circuit ends N/A N/A Rack PDU, floor PDU, UPS, CRAC, Probe Active Cord Network, data panel Circuit ends N/A N/A Data panel Passive Cord Network, data panel Circuit ends N/A N/A Device/VM Virtual Virtual Device/rackable, device/blade in same VM cluster as the VM Cord Device/rackabl e, chassis or blade, network, data panel Straight Line if Data Panel Circuit ends if not data panel Device/blade Logical Virtual Locked, preselected device/chassis that contains the selected blade Cord Device/rackabl e, chassis or blade, network, data panel Straight Line if Data Panel Circuit ends if not data panel Power Circuits No more than two rack PDUs can exist in a power circuit. 370

379 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Partial Power Circuits Partial power circuits start with a rack PDU and end on a power infrastructure item. Note: You cannot join two partial circuits together to create a compound circuit. Power Circuit Logic dctrack applies the following logic to building power circuits. Once a power outlet is added to a circuit, a partial circuit follows it. The partial circuit is created as follows: First Node Item Class/Subclass Device/rackable or chassis, network, probe First Node Port Subclass Power supply Connection between Cord Rack PDU Input cord Cord Second Node Class/Port Subclass Rack PDU/rack PDU output Power outlet Rack PDU/rack PDU output Power outlet Connection between Dashed line to input cord node Straight line Cord Straight line Building New Circuits (Connections) Circuits can be built when you initially place an item. See Search by Make and Model, Place the Item and Build Circuits (on page 239). Alternatively, they can be built separately for existing items. The steps described here are specific to building a circuit separately. After a circuit is created, a request must be issued. Once the change management process is completed for the request, the circuit status is set to Installed. 371

380 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Building a Data Circuit To build a data circuit: 1. In the Web Client, click Connectivity Management > New Data Circuit. A New Circuit tab is displayed and a Node dialog opens. When a circuit tab is already open, click on the New Circuit button to open a New Circuit tab. If you are in the Circuits list page, click the New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. 2. From the Item drop-down, select the item from which the circuit is initiated. Required 3. Select the port on the item that is used in the connection. dctrack validates the port selection to make sure there are no issues. 4. Once you select the item and port for the last node of your circuit, click Save. Alternatively, click anywhere on the page to close the node dialog. If there is an issue between the node item or port you selected and the item and port of the previous node, a Caution icon ( ) is displayed at the bottom right of the node. Click on the node to view the conflict details. Make changes if needed. Note: If you make changes and have already added additional nodes, the nodes that follow are deleted. dctrack displays a warning when this will occur. 5. New nodes are added to the circuit automatically. Click anywhere on the page to stop adding nodes. 6. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key Building a Power Circuit To build a power circuit: 1. In the Web Client, click Connectivity Management > New Power Circuit. A New Circuit tab is displayed and a Node dialog opens. When a circuit tab is already open, click New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. If you are in the Circuits list page, click the New Circuit to open a New Circuit tab. 2. From the Item drop-down, select the item from which the circuit is initiated. Required 3. Select the port on the item that is used in the connection. Required 372

381 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client 4. Click Next Node, to move to the item and port selections for the next node. If you select the rack PDU output for a rack PDU that is already connected upstream, the remainder of the circuit is displayed. If there is an issue between the node item or port you selected and the item and port of the previous node, a Caution icon ( ) is displayed at the bottom right of the node. Click on the node to view the conflict details. Note: If you make changes and have already added additional nodes, the nodes that follow are deleted. dctrack displays a warning when this will occur. Once you select the item and port for the last node of your circuit, click Save to save the circuit. Alternatively, click anywhere on the page to close the node dialog. Edit any node by clicking on it and updating it. To remove an entry in a field, highlight the text and delete it using your Delete key 373

382 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Editing, Deleting and Disconnecting Circuits A circuit saved in the application can have one of two statuses: New or Installed. When a circuit is first created and saved it is in the New status. A circuit status of Installed is applied after a request is issued and completed. The New status reflects a planned circuit installation in the data center. An Installed status indicates a circuit that actually exists in the data center. A circuit with the status of New is editable if a request has not been issued for its installation, or if the request has been issued but not yet approved. The following users are allowed to edit these circuit: The user that created the circuit A user with Manager Access Level that belongs to the same team as the user that created it A user with Gatekeeper Access Level A circuit with a status of Installed is editable so long as an open request for it does not exist. Installed circuits can be edited by any user other than users with Viewer Access only. Once an installed circuit is edited, a request must be issued when the edits are saved. This indicates that change is being proposed for the installed circuit. Therefore, once the edits are saved, two circuits exist in the application - the original circuit and the proposed circuit. The original circuit cannot be edited again. The proposed circuit can be edited as long as the request for change has not yet been approved. Partial circuits that are part of a full circuit are read-only. They are editable only if the full circuit(s) that use(s) the partial circuit are deleted or disconnected. Circuits with a status of New can be deleted. Circuits with a status Installed can be disconnected. When deleting a circuit, the circuit is immediately deleted from the application. When disconnecting a circuit, you are issuing a request to disconnect it that has to go through the change management workflow. Once the request is complete, the circuit is deleted from the application. To edit a circuit: 1. Select the circuit from the list on the Circuits page. 2. Double click on the circuit, or select it and then click View/Edit. The circuit diagram opens in a new tab. 3. Click on a node in the circuit to open the node's dialog, and make changes as needed. 4. Click Accept Changes. dctrack validates the changes and indicates conflicts, if applicable. 374

383 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client 5. If you are editing a New circuit, leave Issue Request selected to create a request for the installation of this circuit. If you are editing an Installed circuit, the Issue Request cannot be deselected. 6. Click Save. The red ball in the circuit tab turns green indicating a successful save operation, as well as successfully issuing a request if Issue Request was selected. 7. Once you return to the Circuits page, you will note the Refresh button is blinking red to notify you that changes occurred to the list of circuits and a refresh is required. Click Refresh. The circuit list is updated. If Issue Request was selected, you will see a Request Number and Request stage columns have new data for the circuit you edited. If you edited an Installed circuit, you will also see the link View in the Proposed column. Clicking the View link will open the proposed circuit for viewing and editing. To delete a circuit: 1. Select the circuit on the Circuits page. You may select multiple circuits by holding down the Shift or Ctrl keys while clicking. When selecting multiple circuits to delete, they all must have the New status, otherwise the Delete is disabled. 2. Click Delete. Once you confirm the deletion, the circuit is permanently deleted from the application. Note: New circuits that cannot be deleted due to permissions or due to an open request is skipped during a multi-circuit delete. Alternatively, a circuit can be deleted from the circuit s tab in the Manage Circuit page. Select to view a circuit from the Circuits page, then from this circuit s tab in the Manage Circuits page, you may click Delete. To disconnect a circuit: 1. Select the circuit on the Circuits page. Select multiple circuits using the Shift or Ctrl keys and click on additional circuits. When selecting multiple circuits to disconnect, they all must have a status of Installed, otherwise Disconnect is disabled. 2. Click Disconnect. Once you confirm the disconnect, a disconnect request is issued for each circuit that was selected. Once the request for each circuit is approved, the work order to perform the disconnect is issued and marked complete, the circuit is deleted from the application. 375

384 Chapter 14: Managing Items and Circuits in the Web Client Note: Installed circuits that cannot be disconnected due to an open request, is skipped during a multi-circuit disconnect. When deleting or disconnecting a full circuit that uses a partial circuit, the partial portion of the circuit remains intact after the delete or disconnect. For example, if you delete a power circuit that begins with a device connected to a rack PDU, only the connection between the first two nodes (device and rack PDU) is deleted. The remainder of the circuit or partial circuit, such as the rack PDU input cord to the power outlet, remains connected. 376

385 Chapter 15 Integrating dctrack with Asset Management Sensors via EMX or PX2 In This Chapter Overview EMX Asset Sensor Management PX2 Asset Sensor Management Overview dctrack allows you to monitor your devices and provide location information on each asset at the rack level using asset management sensors. To do this, dctrack integrates with either Raritan's EMX or PX2, which manage Raritan asset management sensors and the Raritan asset management tags that are attached to devices in a data center and plugged in to the asset management sensor. 377